Skip to main content

Full text of "Graduate catalog"

See other formats


Digitized  by  the  Internet  Archive 

in  2009  with  funding  from 

Lyrasis  IVIembers  and  Sloan  Foundation 


http://www.archive.org/details/graduatecatalog1978indi 


> 

_  2 
2   > 

H 

2  H  C 

>•" 

2   T  -rt 
o   < 

-»  t- 

< 

> 


3 

c 

a 

3" 

5j' 

fD 

CiO 

3 

1. 

CO 

pj 

■D 

c_ 

"? 

p 

o 

33 

(Q 

fi) 

_k 

!_, 

CD 

CD 

a\ 

00 

■D 

o 

0) 

f 


r^f  ■«!  tm  III  la  » 


■;*««55:'^'TH' 


-wr^-s^:!'.^       ifairTM7rT''^i"ilfii*""'"rit'>'f^'''tiii  r""     ~ri"-inf>ir(7riiininlnitiirf<r'i"l  in  -lir'    (i^'I^TT    r>MiiV ^■-^^-v.-- 


pcnnsylva 

raduat€  schoo 
ataloa    1978-80 


''  /l 


^^ 


.^Qo 


i  K  ^^^^^ 


THIS  UNIVERSITY  IS  ACCREDITED  BY  THE  NATIONAL  COUNCIL  FOR  ACCREDITATION  OF  TEACHER 
EDUCATION  FOR  THE  PREPARATION  OF  ELEMENTARY  AND  SECONDARY  TEACHERS  AND  TEACHERS 
IN  THE  SPECIAL  FIELDS  OF  ART,  BUSINESS,  HOME  ECONOMICS.  MUSIC,  DRIVER  AND  SAFETY 
EDUCATION,  DENTAL  HYGIENISTS,  AND  PUBLIC  SCHOOL  NURSES,  AND  BY  THE  MIDDLE  STATES 
ASSOCIATION  OF  COLLEGES  AND  SECONDARY  SCHOOLS.  THE  UNIVERSITY  IS  A  MEMBER  OF  THE 
COUNCIL  OF  GRADUATE  SCHOOLS  IN  THE  UNITED  STATES. 

lUP  IS  COMMITTED  TO  AFFIRMATIVE  ACTION  AND  PROVIDES  EQUAL  EDUCATION  AND  EMPLOYMENT 
OPPORTUNITIES  UNDER  TITLE  IX.  IN  ANY  PERSONNEL  ACTION  —  RECRUITMENT,  APPOINTMENT, 
PROMOTION,  TRAINING  OR  SEPARATION  —  lUP  DOES  NOT  DISCRIMINATE  AGAINST  ANY  PERSON  ON 
ACCOUNT  OF  RACE,  COLOR,  RELIGIONS,  CREED,  LIFE  STYLE,  AFFECTIONAL  OR  SEXUAL 
PREFERENCE,  HANDICAP,  ANCESTRY,  NATIONAL  ORIGIN,  UNION  MEMBERSHIP,  AGE,  OR  SEX. 


Indiana  University  of  Pennsylvania  Bulletin 

1978-1980  Graduate  Catalog 


INDIANA  UNIVERSITY  OF  PENNSYLVANIA 
INDIANA,  PENNSYLVANIA  15701 


TELEPHONE:  (412)  357-2100 


TABLE  OF  CONTENTS 

Graduate  School  Calendar  2-3 

The  Graduate  School  at  Indiana  5 

Academic  Information 8 

General  Service  Courses  24 

Program  Curricula  27 

Directory  119 

Index    122 

Forms  125 


FALL  SEMESTER,  1977-1978 

August  1  Students  who  plan  to  take  graduate  work  during 

the  fall  semester  must  have  an  application  for 
graduate  study  approved  on  or  before  this  date. 

October  1  Prospective   December  graduates  must  have 

filed  an  application  for  graduation  and  also  have 
received  official  approval  of  the  thesis  proposal 
on  or  before  this  date. 

November  1  Final  draft  of  research  thesis  due  for  December 
graduates. 

SPRING  SEMESTER,  1978 

December  1  Students  who  plan  to  take  graduate  work  during 
the  spring  semester  must  have  an  application  for 
graduate  study  approved  on  or  before  this  date. 

March  1  Prospective  May  graduates  must  have  filed  an 

application  for  graduation  and  also  have  re- 
ceived official  approval  of  the  thesis  proposal 
on  or  before  this  date. 

April  1  Final    draft   of   research   thesis  due  for   May 

graduates. 


GRADUATE  SCHOOL  CALENDAR 


SUMMER  SESSION,  1978 

Dates  for  the  1978  summer  sessions  have  not 
been  set.  Please  contact  Graduate  School  for 
these  dates. 

June  1  Prospective  August  graduates  must  have  an 

application  for  graduation  approved  on  or 
before  this  date. 

June  28  Final  draft  of  thesis  due  for  August  graduates. 

FALL  SEMESTER,  1978-1979 

August  1  Students  who  plan  to  take  graduate  work  during 

the  fall  semester  must  have  an  application  for 
graduate  study  approved  on  or  before  this  date. 

October  1  Prospective   December  graduates   must  have 

filed  an  application  for  graduation  and  also  have 
received  official  approval  of  the  thesis  proposal 
on  or  before  this  date. 

December  1       Final  draft  of  research  thesis  due  for  December 
graduates. 


SPRING  SEMESTER,  1979 


December  1 


March  1 


April  1 


Students  who  plan  to  take  graduate  work  during 
the  spring  semester  must  have  an  application  for 
graduate  study  approved  on  or  before  this  date. 

Prospective  May  graduates  must  have  filed  an 
application  for  graduation  on  or  before  this  date. 

Final  draft  of  research  thesis  due  for  May 
graduates 


SUMMER  SESSION,  1979 

Dates  for  the  1979  summer  session  have  not 
been  set.  Please  contact  Graduate  School  for 
these  dates. 

June  1  Prospective  August  graduates  must  have  an 

application  for  graduation  approved  on  or 
before  this  date. 

June  28  Final  draft  of  thesis  due  for  August  graduates. 


^ 


--s^. 


f'^>'i/ 


'i'-lS^£^-^- 


ifP7 


j^^^^^H'jp 


The  Graduate  School 


THE  GRADUATE  SCHOOL  AT  INDIANA 


GENERAL  INFORMATION 


Graduate  work  was  inaugurated  at  Indiana  University  of 
Pennsylvania  in  September,  1957. 

Programs  leading  to  the  degrees  Master  of  Education,  Master 
of  Arts,  Master  of  Science,  Doctor  of  Education,  and  Doctor  of 
Philosopfiy  are  now  available.  Non-degree  programs  leading  to 
certification  in  various  fields  are  also  available. 

In  all  graduate  programs  the  objectives  are  (1)  to  encourage 
excellence  in  scholarship,  (2)  to  provide  for  depth  in  the 
student's  special  field,  and  (3)  to  stimulate  enthusiasm  for 
continued  cultural  and  professional  growth 

Location  —  Indiana  University  of  Pennsylvania  is  located  in 
Indiana,  Pennsylvania,  a  community  with  a  population  of 
approximately  20,000.  Indiana  is  30  miles  north  of  Johnstown 
and  60  miles  northeast  of  Pittsburgh.  Situated  in  the  foothills  of 
the  Allegheny  Mountains.  Indiana  has  a  climate  that  is 
conducive  to  study  the  year  round. 

Library  —  The  Rhodes  R.  Stabley  Library  provides  excellent 
facilities  for  graduate  work  with  professional  librarians  readily 
available  for  assisting  with  specialized  reference  work. 

The  present  book  collection  of  475,000  volumes  grows  at  the 
rate  of  approximately  50,000  volumes  annually.  The  library 
owns  630,000  units  of  microform  and  in  addition  there  are 
extensive  holdings  of  periodicals  (about  4,000  current  titles), 
microfilms,  microcards,  curriculum  materials,  federal  and  state 
documents,  filmstrips  and  recordings. 


The  Rhodes  R.  Stabley  Library  was  opened  in  1961.  It  is 
designed  to  give  efficient  service  through  a  uniform  flow  of 
library  materials  in  an  attractive,  but  functional  setting.  At  least 
one  professional  librarian  is  always  on  duty  to  provide  reference 
service.  Book  stacks  are  open  to  all  students. 

Instructional  Resources  Services  —  The  University  support 
service  dealing  with  Instructional  Systems  Technology  has 
been  developed  to  assist  in  the  teaching/learning  process  by 
making  available  sensory  or  non-book  materials  for  instruction 
and  actively  assisting  faculty  in  the  process  of  Instructional 
Development. 

The  services  consist  of  the  research  and  development  of 
instructional  systems  such  as  dial  access,  student  response,  FM 
radio,  closed-circuit  as  well  as  community  Cable  TV,  and 
personal  self-instructional  materials.  In  addition,  the  services 
provide  photographic,  sound  recording  and  reproduction, 
design  and  production  of  conventional  instructional  materials; 
procurement,  inventory,  and  maintenance  of  University  multi- 
media equipment  and  materials;  developing  and  maintaining  a 
16mm  film  library;  and  assisting  in  technical  consultative 
services  dealing  with  sensory  materials  to  the  administration, 
instructional  staff,  students,  and  community. 

Although  the  media  equipment  and  materials  are  primarily 
located  in  the  academic  departments,  the  service  center  with  the 
exception  of  maintenance,  is  housed  in  the  lower  floor  of  Davis 
Hall.  It  is  estimated  that  the  University  media  inventory  is  worth 
well  over  a  half  million  dollars. 


Indiana  University  of  Pennsylvania 


The  Computer  Center  —  The  Computer  Center,  established 
in  July,  1963,  is  located  in  the  heart  of  Indiana's  main  campus. 
The  Center  provides  computational  support  for  undergraduate 
and  graduate  courses,  faculty  and  student  research,  and  the 
administrative  requirements  of  the  University.  The  computing 
capacity  of  the  Center  is  provided  by  a  large-scale  disk  oriented 
central  processor  which  supports  both  time-sharing  and  batch 
processing  services  for  the  university  community.  Typewriter 
terminals,  located  both  in  the  Computer  Center  and  in  various 
departments  on  campus,  permit  the  use  of  the  computer  on  a 
time-sharing  basis,  Keypunching  facilities  and  a  full 
complement  of  tabulating  equipment  are  available  in  the 
Computer  Center  for  student  use.  Additional  keypunching 
facilities  are  also  available  in  many  departments  on  campus.  Aid 
in  the  use  of  the  computer  and  facilities  may  be  obtained  from 
user  assistants  on  duty  at  the  Computer  Center,  and  from  the 
Center's  professional  staff. 

Indiana's  Computer  Center  plays  an  active  part  in  the  daily 
functioning  of  the  University.  It  is  the  principle  laboratory 
facility  for  computer-oriented  courses  and  is  used  as  a  teaching 
aid  in  many  classes  involving  statistical  and  numerical  analyses 
and  computer  simulations.  The  staff  at  the  Center  is  actively 
involved  in  continuing  work  aimed  at  making  computers  a  more 
effective  and  readily  accessible  tool  for  both  the  academic  and 
administrative  segments  of  the  university  community. 

Career  Services  —  Placement  is  a  service  offered  by  Indiana 
University  of  Pennsylvania  to  its  graduates  without  charge.  The 
services  of  the  Placement  Bureau  are  available  to  students  who 
have  received  their  Master's  degree  or  who  have  been  accepted 
as  candidates  for  the  degree  in  the  Indiana  Graduate  School. 
Graduate  students  wishing  to  take  advantage  of  placement 


service  should  complete  the  necessary  forms  with  the  Director 
of  Career  Services. 

The  Career  Services  Office  prepares  a  listing  of  all  current 
job  openings  available  to  lUP  graduates.  To  obtain  this  listing, 
the  graduate  can  stop  in  Career  Services  or  send  a  stamped, 
self-addressed  envelope  requesting  the  listing.  Credentials  are 
also  mailed  out  to  potential  employers  at  their  request. 

Address:     Career  Services  Office 
302  Pratt  Hall 
Indiana  University  of  PA 
Indiana,  Pa.  15701 


FINANCIAL  AID 

Assistantships 

For  full-time  graduate  students  (9  or  more  semester  hours),  a 
number  of  graduate  assistantships  are  available  at  the 
University  each  year.  Duties  include  teaching  under 
supervision,  assisting  professors  in  an  instructional  or  research 
capacity  and  providing  needed  student  services. 

The  two  levels  of  assistantship  assignment  are  for  duties  of 
20  hours  per  week  with  a  stipend  of  $2705  and  duties  for  10 
hours  per  week  with  a  stipend  of  $1352.  Both  assistantship 
levels  provide  a  waiver  of  tuition  for  the  period  of  assumption  of 
duties  through  the  following  August. 

Students  interested  in  assistantship  appointments  should 
request  applications  from  the  office  of  the  Associate  Dean  of  the 


The  Graduate  School 


Graduate  School.  The  deadline  for  making  application  is  March 
15.  Applicants  for  assistantship  must  complete  their 
applications  for  admission  to  the  Graduate  School  and  be 
accepted  before  they  can  be  considered  for  an  assistantship. 
Assistantship  appointments  are  made  upon  the  recommenda- 
tion of  the  Chairman  or  Director  of  Graduate  Studies  in  the 
department  concerned  with  the  approval  of  the  Graduate 
School.  Applicants  are  notified  of  the  decision  of  their 
application  on  or  shorty  after  April  1. 

Fellowships 

Fellowships  may  be  available  from  specific  departments. 
These  vary  In  stipends  paid  and  tuition  waived.  Interested 
students  should  contact  the  departments  directly. 

Graduate  Alumni  Scholarship 

This  $500.00  scholarship  is  awarded  both  Fall  and  Spring 
Semesters  by  the  Indiana  University  of  Pennsylvania  Alumni 
Association.  The  applicant  must  be  an  alumnus  or  a  descendant 
of  an  alumnus  of  Indiana  University  of  Pennsylvania.  The  award 
is  made  on  the  basis  of  ability.  Applications  must  be  submitted 
to  the  Graduate  School  by  December  1st  and  August  1st. 
Contact  the  Graduate  School  for  additional  information. 

Scholarships 

The  Indiana  University  of  Pennsylvania  Board  of  Trustees 
has  authorized  the  Loan  and  Scholarship  Committee  to  award 
some  scholarship  aid  to  meritorious  graduate  students.  The 
following  procedure  has  been  established  by  the  Loan  and 
Scholarship  Committee. 


1.  One  $50.00  scholarship  be  awarded  each  semester  to  the 
graduate  student  who  best  merits  the  award. 

2.  Three  members  of  the  Graduate  Council  serve  as  a 
committee  to  recommend  the  recipient  to  the  Loan  and 
Scholarship  Committee. 

3.  Nominations  for  the  award  be  made  to  the  committee  by 
the  Dean  of  the  Graduate  School. 

4.  To  be  eligible  for  nomination  the  student  must  have 
completed  twelve  semester  hours  of  graduate  work  at  Indiana 
and  be  an  approved  candidate  for  a  graduate  degree  at  Indiana. 

Delta  PI  Epsilon  Graduate  Scholarship  —  This  graduate 
scholarship  was  established  by  Beta  Alpha  Chapter  of  Delta  Pi 
Epsilon  which  is  a  National  Honorary  Graduate  Fraternity  in 
Business  Education.  The  scholarship  award  of  $25.00  is  made 
each  year  by  Beta  Alpha  Chapter  and  is  awarded  to  a  business 
education  graduate  student  on  the  basis  of  outstanding 
scholarship  and  research. 

Kappa  Delta  Pi  Graduate  Schoiarship  —  The  Kappa  Delta  Pi 

Graduate  Scholarship  was  established  by  Beta  Gamma  Chapter 
of  this  university  to  honor  that  member  of  the  graduate  group 
who  is  judged  the  ideal  student.  The  award  of  $25.00  is  made 
each  year  by  a  committee  of  the  local  chapter  and  is  awarded  on 
the  basis  of  scholarship  and  research  competition. 

Veterans  —  Indiana  is  approved  to  offering  training  under  the 
various  G.I.  Bills  (Public  Law  550)  and  Public  Law  894  (disabled 
veterans).  Students  who  are  entitled  to  training  under  one  of 
these  bills  should  contact  the  Veterans'  Counselor  immediately 
after  being  accepted  for  admission  to  Indiana  in  order  to  secure 
additional  instructions.  This  procedure  is  necessary  so  veterans 
may  be  included  on  the  monthly  payrolls.  The  Office  of  the 
Veterans'  Counselor  is  in  Pratt  Hall. 


i 


'XIteW;lU>   b1UU-!5^   i''"-<t 


n 


PROCEDURES  AND  REGULATIONS 

A  student  is  expected  to  assume  full  responsibility  for 
knowing  the  regulations  of  the  Graduate  School.  These 
regulations  are  set  forth  in  the  catalog.  Students  should  be 
familiar  with  general  regulations  governing  requirements  for  the 
degree  and  specific  regulations  governing  the  program  in  which 
he  plans  to  work.  In  addition,  students  should  be  familiar  with 
regulations  set  forth  in  Graduate  Student  Rights  and 
Responsibilities.  A  copy  may  be  secured  from  the  Graduate 
School  Office. 


PROGRAM  CHANGES 


To  insure  their  quality  and  relevance,  the  graduate  programs 
at  Indiana  University  are  subject  to  constant  review  and  change 
by  responsible  and  duly-appointed  groups.  Consequently,  the 
University  recognizes  that  provision  must  be  made  to  prevent 
hardship  to  students  already  enrolled  in  programs  when 
program  or  general  university  requirements  are  changed. 
Students  affected  by  changes  in  programs,  policies  and 
regulations  are  given  the  option  of  following  requirements  in 
force  when  the  student  first  enrolled  for  graduate  study  or  those 
requirements  in  force  at  the  time  of  expected  graduation.  While 
it  is  the  student's  option  to  choose  between  old  or  new 
requirements  for  his  chosen  program,  he  cannot  vacillate 
between  adhering  to  either  one  or  the  other  set  of  requirements. 


Academic  Information  —  9 


ACADEMIC  INFORMATION 


Should  a  matter  of  interpretation  of  such  situations  arise,  the 
student,  his  advisor,  or  both  should  petition  the  Dean  of  the 
Graduate  School  for  a  decision  on  which  requirements  apply. 

ADMISSIONS 

Admission  to  the  Graduate  School  is  required  of  all  students 
who  wish  to  take  graduate  courses  for  graduate  credit.  Each 
student  applying  for  admission,  either  as  an  applicant  for  a 
graduate  degree  program  or  as  an  applicant  for  a  non-degree 
program,  must  file  with  the  Graduate  School  an  application  for 
admission  and  such  other  supporting  documents  required. 
Application  materials  will  be  supplied  by  the  Graduate  School 
upon  request.  The  application  materials  should  be  on  file  in  the 
Graduate  School  at  least  one  month  prior  to  the  beginning  of  the 
semester  or  term  in  which  the  applicant  expects  to  begin 
graduate  work.  Each  applicant  should  check  the  Calendar  in 
this  catalog  for  application  deadlines. 

Admission  to  the  Graduate  School  means  that  a  student  may 
program  and  register  for  graduate  courses.  Admission  to  the 
Graduate  School  does  not  guarantee  subsequent  admission  to 
candidacy  for  a  degree  nor  does  it  guarantee  successful 
completion  of  all  requirements  for  the  degree. 

Application  Procedures 

I.Each  applicant  must  file  with  the  Dean  of  the  Graduate 

School  a  complete  application  form. 
2.  Each  applicant  must  request  two  copies  of  official  transcripts 


from  each  undergraduate  and  graduate  institution  attended. 
Forms  for  requesting  transcripts  are  included  in  the  applica- 
tion packet. 

3.  Each  applicant  should  request  letters  of  recommendations 
from  three  individuals  familiar  with  his  background.  At  least 
two  letters  should  be  requested  from  individuals  familiar  with 
the  academic  background  of  the  applicant.  Recommendation 
forms  are  included  in  the  application  packet. 

4.  All  applicants  will  be  asked  to  take  the  Graduate  Record 
Examination.  See  instructions  in  application  packet. 

5.  An  application  fee  in  the  amount  of  $10.00,  non-refundable, 
must  accompany  the  application.  The  check  should  be 
payable  to:  Indiana  University  of  Pennsylvania. 

Requirements  for  Admission 

1 .  An  applicant  must  have  a  Bachelor's  degree  from  a  college  or 
university  accredited  by  the  Middle  States  Association  of 
Colleges  and  Secondary  Schools  or  an  equivalent  regional 
accrediting  agency. 

2.  The  applicant  shall  present  an  official  transcript  of  all 
previous  college  and  university  work.  The  undergraduate 
honor  point  values  should  be  2.6  or  better  for  all  four  years 
(2.6  assumes  a  grading  system  in  which  A  =  4.0).  If  not,  the 
applicant  under  certain  circumstances  may  be  asked  to 
submit  additional  evidence  of  academic  ability.  Normally, 
this  additional  evidence  may  be  in  the  form  of  scores  from  the 
Graduate  Record  Examination. 

3.  Graduate  Record  Examination  scores  must  be  submitted  by 


10  —  Indiana  University  of  Pennsylvania 


all  students  prior  to  admission  to  Graduate  School.  Students 
in  the  Master  of  Business  Administration  program  should 
schedule  the  Graduate  Management  Admissions  Test  admin- 
istered by  Educational  Testing  Service. 
4.  Applicants  planning  admission  to  programs  leading  to  the 
M.Ed,  degree  should  have  a  Provisional  Pennsylvania 
Teachers  Certificate  or  its  equivalent.  Applicants  for  admis- 
sion to  graduate  study  leading  to  the  M.Ed,  degree  who  do  not 
have  proper  teacher  certification  may  be  required  to 
complete  a  planned  program  leading  to  certification  by  the 
time  the  student  applies  for  candidacy  for  the  M.Ed,  degree. 

Admission  Classifications 

An  applicant  for  admission  to  the  Graduate  School  w^ill 
receive  notification  of  admission  classification  from  the  Dean  of 
the  Graduate  School  prior  to  the  term  in  which  the  applicant 
intends  to  begin  study.  Admission  classifications  are  as  follows: 

1 .  Full  Graduate  Standing.  This  classification  may  be  given  to  an 
applicant  who  plans  to  work  towards  a  graduate  degree  in  the 
field  of  study  and  who  has  satisfied  the  requirements  for 
admission  to  the  Graduate  School.  Admission  to  the 
Graduate  School  on  full  graduate  standing  allows  the  appli- 
cant to  program  for  courses,  but  it  does  not  guarantee 
subsequent  admission  to  candidacy  for  a  degree  in  a  specific 
field. 

2.  Provisional  Graduate  Standing.  This  classification  may  be 
given  to  qualified  applicants  who  plan  to  work  towards  a 
graduate  degree,  but  whose  application  materials  are  in- 
complete at  the  time  of  admission.  However,  if  upon  comple- 
tion of  application  the  applicant  does  not  meet  the  minimum 
standards  for  admission,  he  may  be  denied  admission. 


3.  Temporary  Graduate  Standing.  May  be  granted  to  applicants 
who  do  not  plan  to  work  toward  a  graduate  degree  and  have 
satisfied  the  requirements  for  admission  to  the  Graduate 
School.  Applicants  may  wish  at  a  future  time  to  be  reclassified 
as  Full  Graduate  Standing.  This  may  be  done  upon  request. 
Credits  completed  while  on  Temporary  Graduate  Standing 
may  be  applied  toward  a  graduate  degree  with  the  approval  of 
the  student's  department  after  changing  to  Full  Graduate 
Standing.  Such  action  requires  the  approval  of  the  Graduate 
Dean. 

4.  Special  Graduate  Standing.  This  is  a  probationary  classifica- 
tion which  may  be  granted  to  students  who  at  the  time  of 
admission  may  have  some  academic  deficiency. 

5.  Inactive  Standing.  Applicants  who  decide  to  postpone  their 
actual  enrollment  in  graduate  classes  will  be  classified  as 
inactive.  Applicants  may  remain  on  inactive  status  up  to  one 
year  after  the  intended  date  of  initial  enrollment  in  courses. 
Thereafter,  they  must  reapply  for  admission  to  the  Graduate 
School. 

6.  Denied  Admission.  This  classification  may  be  given  to  an 
applicant  who  does  not  satisfy  minimum  requirements  for 
admission  to  the  Graduate  School.  An  individual  denied 
admission  will  normally  receive  a  letter  giving  the  reasons  for 
the  denial. 


Miller  Analogies  Test  —  Applicants  for  admission  who  are 
requested  to  take  the  Miller  Analogies  Test  should  schedule  the 
examination  through  the  Testing  Center,  lUP.  The  test  is 
administered  once  a  month.  Applicants  taking  the  M.A.T.  at 
another  institution  should  request  that  the  score  be  sent  to 
Dean,  Graduate  School,  Indiana  University  of  Pennsylvania. 


Academic  Information  —11 


Graduate  Record  Examinations  —  Applicants  to  all 
departments  must  take  the  APTITUDE  section  of  the  Graduate 
Record  Examination.  The  following  departments  also  require 
that  the  applicant  take  the  ADVANCED  section:  Biology; 
Educational  Psychology  (Education);  German;  Home  School 
Visitor  (Education);  Music  (M.A.  Music);  Music  (M.Ed. 
Education);  Psychology;  School  Psychology  (Education); 
Spanish;  D.Ed,  in  Elementary  Education  (Education);  Ph.D.  in 
English  (English). 

Foreign  Student  Applicants 

All  foreign  students  applying  for  admission  to  the  Graduate 
School  should  follow  general  procedures.  In  addition  each 
applicant  whose  native  language  is  not  English  must  present 
evidence  of  ability  to  comprehend  English.  Each  applicant 
should  plan  to  take  the  Test  of  English  as  a  Foreign  Language 
(TOEFL)  administered  by  the  Educational  Testing  Service, 
Princeton,  New  Jersey,  U.S.A.  No  foreign  student's  application 
will  be  considered  until  scores  are  filed  with  the  Dean,  Graduate 
School,  Indiana  University  of  Pennsylvania.  Each  applicant 
must  also  present  evidence  to  the  Graduate  School  of  adequate 
financial  resources.  These  resources  should  be  sufficient  to 
meet  the  cost  of  living  in  Indiana,  Pennsylvania,  cost  of  travel  to 
and  from  the  student's  native  country  and  cost  of  graduate 
education.  Evidence  of  adequate  financial  resources  should  be 
sent  directly  to  the  Dean,  Graduate  School,  Indiana  University 
of  Pennsylvania,  Indiana,  Pennsylvania  15701.  As  a  regular 
procedure,  the  Graduate  School  notifies  the  University  Foreign 
Student  Advisor  at  the  time  of  every  student's  application. 
Applicants  with  questions  on  legal-political  matters  should 
direct  them  to  him. 


Auditors 

A  student  cannot  audit  a  class  unless  he  has  been  admitted  to 
the  Graduate  School.  Auditors  must  have  permission  from  the 
instructor  and  the  Dean  of  the  Graduate  School  before 
programming  as  an  auditor.  An  auditor  will  pay  the  normal 
tuition  and  required  fees.  An  auditor  will,  with  permission  from 
the  instructor,  participate  in  class  discussion,  do  practicum 
work,  take  examinations  and  share  the  privileges  of  a  class 
member.  An  audit  grade  will  be  given  only  if  the  student  has 
completed  all  course  requirements.  The  auditor  cannot  secure 
credit  for  his  work  nor  can  he  subsequently  secure  credit  for 
work  done  in  the  course.  A  student,  who  because  of  his  status  as 
a  graduate  assistant  or  a  fellowship  recipient,  is  required  to 
register  for  a  certain  number  of  credits  is  not  permitted  to  count 
those  courses  for  which  he  Is  registering  as  an  auditor  for  this 
purpose. 


Academic  Load 

Many  graduate  students  depend  upon  part-time  or  full-time 
employment  to  meet  expenses.  A  student  who  is  thus  employed 
must  recognize  the  time  demands  of  his  work  schedule  in 
planning  his  academic  program.  The  Graduate  School  takes  the 
position  that  the  facilities  of  the  Graduate  School  should  be 
made  available  only  to  students  who  can  profit  from  their 
Graduate  School  experience  to  a  maximum  extent. 

It  is  possible  for  students  to  schedule  a  full-time  load  in  many 
of  the  approved  programs.  Nine  to  fifteen  semester  hours  of 
work  per  semester  is  regarded  as  a  full-time  graduate  load.  Eight 
semester  hours  of  work  or  less  is  regarded  as  a  part-time 
graduate  load.  Students  who  intend  to  take  a  full-time  load 


12  —  Indiana  University  of  Pennsylvania 


should  not  plan  to  hold  an  outside  full-time  job.  Graduate 
Assistants  cannot  register  for  more  than  thirteen  hours  in  any 
one  semester.  No  student  can  accumulate  more  than  six  hours 
in  "tour"  courses  toward  a  degree. 


PROGRAMMING  AND  REGISTRATION 

Advisement  —  After  a  student  has  been  admitted  to  the 
Graduate  School,  he  should  check  with  the  Chairman  or  the 
Director  of  Graduate  Studies  in  his  intended  field  of  study.  If  the 
student  is  unclassified,  he  should  consult  with  the  Dean  of  the 
Graduate  School.  Advisement  is  required  for  all  students 
enrolling  for  graduate  classes  for  the  first  time.  Certain 
departments  require  that  students  be  advised  before 
programming  for  courses  each  semester.  Consult  instructions 
with  program  materials  for  a  listing  of  departmental  instructions 
on  advisement. 

Pre-Reglstratlon  —  Prior  to  each  semester  or  summer 
session  the  graduate  student  will  receive  pre-registration 
materials  and  instructions  from  the  Graduate  School.  Fill  out  the 
program  form  according  to  instructions  and  return  form  to  the 
Graduate  School  by  the  deadline  specified  in  the  Calendar. 
Each  program  must  be  subsequently  approved  by  the  Graduate 
Dean. 

Final  Registration  —  After  the  student  has  returned  his 
program  to  the  Graduate  School,  he  will  receive  a  bill  for  tuition 
and  fees  from  the  Business  Office.  Bills  should  be  paid  before 
the  student  attends  classes.  Final  registration  for  the  courses 
takes  place  on  campus.  Instructions  will  be  sent  with  pre- 
registration  materials. 


TUITION  AND  FEES 


Full-Time  Tuition  (in-state) 

$400  for  9  to  15  SCH,  then  $43  for  each  additional  SCH. 
Part-Time  Tuition  (in-state) 

$43  per  SCH  for  less  than  9  SCH. 
Full-Time  Tuition  (out-of-state) 

$750  for  9  to  15  SCH,  then  $63  for  each  additional  SCH. 
Part-Time  Tuition  (out-of-state) 

$63  per  SCH. 
Summer  Session  Tuition  (for  Pennsylvania  residents) 

Per  SCH   $43.00 

Summer  Session  Tuition  (for  non-residents  of  Penna.) 

Per  SCH   $63.00 

Application  Fee  (Must  accompany  application  form) . .  $10.00 
Service  Fee  —  Semester  Full-Time  Students 

(9  credits  or  more) $30.00 

Semester  Part-Time  Students 

(8  credits  or  less) $11 .00 

Main  Summer  Session  — 

All  Graduate  Students  $10.50 

Pre  and  Post  Summer  Session  — 

All  Graduate  Students  $  3.75 

Late  Fee $1.00/day  up  to  $10.00 

Applied  Music  Fee $70.00 

Auditors  Fee  (Same  as  tuition) 

Graduation  Fee $  5.00 

Master's  Cap,  Hood  and  Gown  Fee Nominal 

All  fees  are  subject  to  change  without  notice. 


Academic  Information  —  13 


UNIVERSITY  REFUND  POLICY 


Withdrawals  From  the  University 

Graduate  students  withdrawing  from  the  University  must 
process  such  withdrawal  through  the  Graduate  School  Office, 
Stright  Hall.  The  official  withdrawal  date  will  be  established  by 
the  Graduate  School  Office. 

Students  totally  withdrawing  from  courses,  residence  halls 
and/or  meal  contracts  upon  receiving  approval  from  the 
Graduate  School  will  forfeit  a  portion  of  the  semester  charges  in 
accordance  with  the  following  schedule: 

From  the  first  full  day  of  semester  classes  to  and  including 
the  fourteenth  (14th)  calendar  day  following  the  start  of 
classes  a  student  will  forfeit  twenty  (20)  percent  of  the 
total  semester  charges. 

From  the  fifteenth  (15)  calendar  day  following  the  start  of 
classes  to  and  including  the  twenty-first  (21st)  calendar 
day  following  the  start  of  classes  a  student  will  forfeit  thirty 
(30)  percent  of  the  total  semester  charges. 

From  the  twenty-second  (22nd)  calendar  day  to  and 
including  the  twenty-eighth  (28th)  calendar  day  following 
the  start  of  classes  a  student  will  forfeit  forty  (40)  percent 
of  the  total  semester  charges. 

From  the  twenty-ninth  (29th)  calendar  day  to  and 
including  the  thirty-fifth  (35th)  calendar  day  following  the 
start  of  classes  a  student  will  forfeit  fifty  (50)  percent  of  the 
total  semester  charges. 

After  the  thirty-sixth  (36th)  calendar  day  following  the 


start  of  classes  no  refund  will  be  granted  and  all  semester 
fees  forfeited. 

The  start  of  days  is  defined  as  the  first  day  of  classes  to  begin 
as  scheduled  on  the  University  calendar. 

Refunds  for  students  receiving  financial  assistance  from 
scholarships  and/or  grants  will  be  returned  to  the  source  of  aid 
in  an  appropriate  proportion,  except  in  those  cases  in  which  a 
full  refund  to  the  source  is  required. 

No  refunds  will  be  granted  unless  formal  withdrawal 
procedure  has  been  initiated  by  the  student  or  his  family  within 
30  days  of  the  date  of  withdrawal.  Written  and  dated  notice  is 
required. 

No  refunds  will  be  granted  for  students  suspended  or 
expelled  by  the  University. 

The  Graduate  School  Office  may  request  exceptions  of  these 
policies  and  grant  pro-rated  refunds  when  circumstances  justify 
it.  (EXAMPLE:  death,  medical  reasons  or  military  obligation.) 

Discrete  Course  Withdrawal 

No  refunds  will  be  made  for  reduced  class  load  after  classes 
have  started. 

Withdrawals 

Withdrawal  From  Courses  —  If  a  student  withdraws  from  a 
course  before  one-half  of  the  periods  scheduled,  he  may  do  so 
by  notifying  the  Graduate  Dean  in  writing  of  his  intent  to 
withdraw.  A  grade  of  "W"  will  be  entered  on  the  permanent 
record.  A  student  withdrawing  from  a  course  after  the 
completion  of  the  sixth  week  will  automatically  receive  an  "F".  If 
withdrawal  is  caused  by  a  health  condition  or  for  another 
approved  reason,  the  grade  may  be  indicated  as  incomplete  and 


14  —  Indiana  University  of  Pennsylvania 


made  up  within  sixty  days  of  the  end  of  the  semester  in  which  the 
grade  was  given. 

Withdrawal  From  Graduate  School  —  If  a  student  withdraws 
from  the  Graduate  School,  the  Dean  of  the  Graduate  School 
must  be  notified  in  writing.  Students  withdrawing  for  reasons  of 
health  or  military  service  may  be  reinstated  at  some  future  time 
without  the  leave  period  counting  as  part  of  the  five  years 
required  to  complete  the  degree.  Students  who  have  been 
receiving  financial  aid  through  the  Financial  Aid  office  must 
process  through  that  office  at  the  time  of  their  withdrawing. 

Withdrawal  From  University  Services  —  Students  who 
withdraw  from  the  University  Student  Services  (residence  hall, 
meal  contracts,  etc.)  but  do  not  totally  withdraw  from  the 
University  will  not  be  granted  a  refund. 


GRADING  SYSTEM 

The  following  grading  system  is  used  for  all  graduate  classes. 
A  —  Excellent         C  —  Fair  I   —  Incomplete 

B  —  Good  F  —  Failure         W  —  Withdrawn 

A  "I"  (Incomplete)  may  be  issued  only  when  the  work  is 
interrupted  for  justifiable  reason.  No  "I"  can  be  given  without 
the  consent  of  the  Dean  of  the  Graduate  School.  An  "I"  must  be 
made  up  within  sixty  days  of  the  end  of  the  semester  in  which  it 
was  given.  An  "I"  given  for  GD  550  or  GD  650  may  be  carried 
indefinitely.  If  not  made  up  within  the  sixty  day  period,  the  "I" 
will  automatically  become  an  "F".  A  "W"  will  be  entered  on  the 
permanent  record  if  the  student  officially  withdraws  before  the 


completion  of  the  sixth  week  of  the  scheduled  periods.  No  "W" 
can  be  given  without  the  consent  of  the  dean  of  the  Graduate 
School.  If  a  student  officially  withdraws  after  completion  of  the 
sixth  week  of  the  scheduled  periods,  an  "F"  will  be  entered  on 
the  permanent  record.  However,  if  this  withdrawal  is  justifiable 
and  approved  by  the  Graduate  Dean,  an  "I"  can  be  given. 


COURSE  ABBREVIATION  KEY 

The    following    departmental    abbreviations    are    used   to 
identify  courses  referred  to  in  the  Catalog: 


AC 

Adult  Education 

ED 

Education 

AH 

Art  History 

EP 

Educational  Psychology 

AL 

Allied  Health 

EL 

Elementary  Education 

AM 

Applied  Music 

EM 

Elementary  Math 

AN 

Anthropology 

ES 

Elementary  Science 

AR 

Art 

EN 

English 

AS 

Arts  and  Science 

EX 

Education  of 

AT 

Art  Education 

Exceptional  Students 

AY 

Astronomy 

FL 

Foreign  Language 

Bl 

Biology 

FN 

Food  and  Nutrition 

BU 

Business 

FE 

Foundations  of  Education 

BE 

Business  Education 

FR 

French 

BM 

Business  Management 

GE 

Geography 

CH 

Chemistry 

GK 

Greek 

CO 

Computer  Science 

GL 

Geology 

CS 

Consumer  Services 

GS 

Geoscience 

CE 

Counselor  Education 

GM 

German 

CR 

Criminology 

GR 

Graduate 

DE 

Distributive  Education 

HP 

Health  &  PE 

EC 

Economics 

HI 

History 

Academic  Information  —  15 


HE 

Home  Economics 

PS 

Political  Science 

HO 

Home  Economics  Ed 

PO 

Portuguese 

IS 

International  Studies 

PC 

Psychology 

LA 

Latin 

PN 

Public  School  Nursing 

LR 

Learning  Resources 

RH 

Rehabilitation 

LI 

Linguistics 

RU 

Russian 

Ml 

Marine  Sciences 

SA 

Safety  Science 

MA 

Mathematics 

SC 

Science 

MS 

Military  Science 

SS 

Social  Science 

MU 

Music 

SO 

Sociology 

AM 

Music  —  Applied 

SP 

Spanish 

NU 

Nursing 

SH 

Speech  and  Hearing 

PH 

Philosophy 

ST 

Student  Personnel  Services 

PY 

Physics 

TH 

Theater 

APPLICANTS  FOR  SPECIALIST 
CERTIFICATION  PROGRAMS 


Indiana  University  of  Pennsylvania  offers  specialist 
certification  programs  in  Learning  Resources,  Public  School 
Psychology  and  Reading.  Applicants  forthese  programs  should 
follow  the  same  procedures  for  admission,  programming  and 
registration  described  above.  Appllcantsshould  check  program 
descriptions  in  catalog  for  special  requirements.  The  specialist 
certificate  program  in  Learning  Resources  and  Mass  Media  is  a 
pre-master's  level  program.  Applicants  must  hold  a  permanent 
college  certificate  for  elementary  or  secondary  education. 

The  Public  School  Psychology  program  is  designed  forthose 
individuals  who  are  seeking  certification  as  Public  School 
Psychologist  in  the  Commonwealth  of  Pennsylvania. 
Applicants  for  admission  to  this  program  must  have  a  Master's 
degree  and  an  Instructional  or  Specialist  certificate  from  an 


accredited  Institution. 

The  Reading  program  is  designed  for  those  individuals  who 
are  seeking  certification  as  (1)  Reading  Specialist  or  (2) 
Reading  Supervisors.  The  program  leading  to  certification  as  a 
Reading  Specialist  must  be  taken  In  conjunction  with  an  M.Ed, 
program  In  Reading.  Applicants  who  are  seeking  certification  as 
Reading  Supervisors  must  complete  all  requirements  for  the 
M.Ed.  In  Reading,  be  eligible  for  a  Level  III  certificate  and  18 
semester  hours  of  course  work  selected  from  Reading 
Supervisor's  Program  of  Studies. 

CLASS  CANCELLATION 

It  Is  the  policy  of  the  Graduate  School  not  to  cancel  regularly 
scheduled  classes  because  of  weather  conditions,  nor  does  the 
Graduate  School  issue  announcements  over  radio  stations  or  in 
newspapers  or  give  information  through  Its  switchboard  that 
classes  will  be  suspended  because  of  such  conditions.  In  cases 
of  emergency  which  disrupt  transportation  facilities  or  create 
personal  problems,  students  should  make  decisions  as  to 
attendance  which  appear  appropriate  to  them  in  their  particular 
circumstances. 

GRADUATE  STUDENT  RIGHTS 

AND  RESPONSIBILITIES 

When  a  student  is  admitted  to  the  Graduate  School,  he 
assumes  responsibility  for  following  the  procedure  for  (a) 
programming  and  registering,  (b)  payment  of  fees,  (c) 
withdrawal  from  class,  (d)  residency,  (e)  time  requirements,  (g) 
degree  candidacy,  and  (h)  graduation. 

Grading  —  A  student  has  the  right  to  expect  that  all  course 


16  —  Indiana  University  of  Pennsylvania 


requirements  including  grading  criteria  and  procedures,  will  be 
made  clear  early  in  a  course  and  that  course  grades  will 
represent  the  instructor's  professional  and  objective  evaluation 
of  performance. 

Evaluation  —  A  departmental  evaluation  of  academic 
progress  and  professional  potential  is  to  be  placed  in  personal 
files.  Such  evaluation  is  available  upon  request. 

Instruction  —  One  has  the  right  to  instruction  which 
encourages  the  free  and  open  discussion  of  ideas,  and  which 
respects  the  individual  needs  and  aspirations  of  the  students. 
Likewise,  it  is  one's  responsibility  to  maintain  the  classroom 
decorum  and  atmosphere  which  insures  that  this  process  of 
learning  can  take  place. 

Advisement  —  One  has  the  right  to  the  best  advice  and 
counsel  that  your  department  can  provide  in  such  areas  as 
program  and  planning,  selection  of  courses  and  professors,  and 
general  degree  requirements. 

Role  In  One's  Department  —  Each  department  offering  a 
graduate  program  is  required  to  establish  a  Graduate  Studies 
Committee  and  is  urged,  but  not  required,  to  form  an 
association  for  its  graduate  students. 

The  Graduate  Student  Assembly  —  The  Graduate  Student 
Assembly  is  the  graduate  students'  organization.  One 
representative  to  serve  on  the  Graduate  Student  Assembly  is 
elected  from  each  department  by  the  full-  and  part-time 
graduate  students  of  that  department.  The  Graduate  Student 
Assembly  functions  to  serve  all  graduate  students  by  regularly 
reviewing  the  policies  of  the  Graduate  Council,  by  participating 
in  the  judicial  procedure  for  graduate  students,  and  by  working 
to  improve  the  social  and  cultural  life  of  the  Graduate  student. 


Judicial  Procedure  —  Any  member  of  the  academic 
community  of  Indiana  University  of  Pennsylvania  may  initiate  a 
case  involving  the  rights  or  responsibilities  of  graduate 
students.  The  Graduate  Student  Judiciary,  composed  of  the 
three  officers  of  the  Graduate  Student  Assembly  and  two  other 
council  members,  has  original  jurisdiction  in  all  cases.  A  case 
may  be  referred,  or  a  decision  appealed,  to  the  Departmental 
Graduate  Judiciary,  composed  of  the  Director  of  Graduate 
Studies  of  the  Department,  two  members  of  the  graduate 
teaching  staff,  and  two  graduate  students. 

The  final  step  in  the  judicial  procedure  is  the  University 
Graduate  Judiciary,  composed  of  five  members  of  the  Graduate 
Council.  The  University  Graduate  Judiciary  hears  all  appeals 
brought  before  it,  and  its  decision  is  final  and  binding. 

REGULATIONS  FOR  PRINCIPAL'S 
CERTIFICATES  IN  PENNSYLVANIA 

On  October  1,  1964,  new  regulations  for  the  issuance  of 
principal's  certificates  trecame  effective.  The  new  regulations 
for  the  provisional  elementary  or  secondary  principal's 
certificate  are  substantially  as  follows:  An  applicant  shall:  (1) 
Hold  a  Pennsylvania  College  Certificate.  (2)  Have  three  years  of 
successful  experience.  (3)  Complete  45  semester  hours  of 
graduate  study,  including  a  Master's  degree  with  the  following 
minimum  requirements:  (a)  12  semester  hours  in  an  academic 
field  other  than  psychology;  (b)  15  semester  hours  distributed 
among  administrative  processes,  curriculum  and  instructional 
processes,  and  the  history  and  role  of  the  school  in  society;  and 
(c)  documentary  evidence  of  proficiency  in  English.  The 
College  Certificate  and  experience  must  be  at  the  level 
(elementary  or  secondary)  for  which  administrative  certification 
is  requested. 


Academic  Information  —17 


The  Cooperative  Administration  of  the  Regulations 

by  Indiana  University  of  Pennsylvania  and 

The  Pennsylvania  State  University 

An  applicant  for  a  Provisional  Elementary  or  Secondary 
Principal's  certificate  must  be  endorsed  by  an  institution  with  an 
approved  program  in  administration.  Indiana  does  not  provide  a 
program  in  administration  but  has  a  cooperative  arrangement 
with  The  Pennsylvania  State  University  whereby  a  student 
interested  in  this  certification  may  secure  the  endorsement  of 
the  approved  institution  by  the  following  plan: 

l.lf  a  candidate  for  one  of  these  certificates  completes 
graduate  work  at  Indiana  for  a  Master  of  Education  Degree  in 
Elementary  Education  or  in  an  academic  field,  he  may  complete 
the  post  master's-work  (at  least  15  hours)  at  The  Pennsylvania 
State  University. 

2.  When  the  Student  applies  for  admission  to  candidacy  for 
the  M.Ed,  at  Indiana,  he  should  indicate  his  intention  to  seek 
principalship  certification.  The  Dean  of  the  Indiana  Graduate 
School  will  review  the  candidate's  qualifications  and  may 
recommend  the  candidate  to  The  Pennsylvania  State 
University. 

3.  The  Pennsylvania  State  University  decides  how  much  of 
the  graduate  work  completed  at  Indiana  may  be  counted 
towards  the  45  hours  needed  for  certification  endorsement.  Part 
or  all  of  the  minimum  30  hours  earned  for  the  M.Ed,  at  Indiana 
may  be  acceptable.  The  student  should  plan  to  schedule 
reading  courses  and  courses  in  measurement  and  statistics  as 
electives  in  his  program  at  Indiana. 

4.  The  completion  of  the  research  requirement  at  Indiana 
may  be  accepted  as  documentary  evidence  of  proficiency  in 
English. 


5.  After  completion  of  his  graduate  program  at  Indiana,  the 
student  should  seek  admission  to  the  Graduate  School  of  The 
Pennsylvania  State  University  indicating  his  interest  in 
principalship  certification.  For  application  forms  and  informa- 
tion write  to:  The  Assistant  Dean  for  Admissions.  The  Graduate 
School,  The  Pennsylvania  State  University,  University  Park, 
Pennsylvania  16802. 

6.  The  provisional  certificate  based  on  the  45  hours  is  valid 
for  serving  as  a  Principal  for  five  years.  To  make  this  provisional 
certificate  permanent,  15  additional  approved  graduate  hours 
are  required  and  may  be  completed  at  The  Pennsylvania  State 
University  or  other  institutions  with  an  approved  administration 
program. 

MASTER'S  DEGREE  PROGRAMS 

The  Graduate  School  at  Indiana  University  offers  work 
leading  to  the  degree  Master  of  Education  in  the  following  fields: 


Art 

Biology 

Business 

Chemistry 

Counselor  Education 

Educational  Policy  Studies 

Educational  Psychology 

Elementary  Education 

Elementary  Mathematics 

Elementary  Science 

English 

Geography 

Geoscience 


German 

Home  Economics 

Learning  Resources 

Mathematics 

Music 

Physics 

Reading 

Science 

Social  Science 

Spanish 

Special  Education 

Speech  and  Hearing 


79  —  Indiana  University  of  Pennsylvania 


Work  leading  to  the  Master  of  Arts  degree  is  offered  in: 


Art 

Adult  Education 

Art  Therapy 

Counseling  Services 

Criminology 

English 

Geography 

Geoscience 

German 


History 

Industrial  Chemistry 

Music 

Psychology 

Public  Affairs 

Sociology 

Spanish 

Student  Personnel  Services 


Work  leading  to  the  Master  of  Science  degree  is  offered  In: 


Biology 
Business 
Chemistry 
Geography 


Mathematics 

Physics 

Special  Education 

Speech  and  Hearing 


A  Master  of  Business  Administration  is  also  offered. 

In  addition  to  the  above  programs,  an  interdisciplinary 
independently  structured  PROFESSIONAL  GROWTH  program 
has  been  developed.  The  degree  awarded  will  be  either  an  M.A., 
M.S.,  or  M.Ed.,  depending  on  the  various  area  concentrations 
determined  by  each  student  and  his  advisory  committee.  For 
further  information  write  PROFESSIONAL  GROWTH  DEGREE, 
THE  GRADUATE  SCHOOL,  INDIANA  UNIVERSITY  OF 
PENNSYLVANIA,  INDIANA,  PENNSYLVANIA. 

Requirements  for  the  Master's  Degree 

All  students  working  towards  a  master's  degree  must  satisfy 
the  minimum  Graduate  School  requirements  described  below. 


In  addition  each  department  may  have  special  requirements. 
Students  should  be  familiar  with  the  requirements  in  their  own 
department. 

Under  certain  circumstances  Graduate  School  requirements 
for  the  Master's  degree  may  be  satisfied  by  means  of 
substitution.  In  no  case  will  a  requirement  be  waived.  Requests 
for  the  acceptance  of  substitutions  should  be  made  in  the  form 
of  a  petition  to  the  Graduate  Council.  Each  petition  must  have 
the  approval  of  the  Graduate  Dean  and  the  Department 
Chairman. 

Residency  Requirement  —  Each  student  working  towards  a 

master's  degree  must  satisfy  the  residency  requirement.  The 
residency  requirement  can  be  satisfied  by  either  full-time  study 
(nine  or  more  semester  hours)  during  fall  or  spring  semester  or 
by  completing  12  semester  hours  in  two  consecutive  summer 
sessions  plus  four  semester  hours  during  the  Intervening 
academic  year  or  1 6  semester  hours  in  two  consecutive  summer 
sessions. 

Admission  to  Candidacy  —  The  student  must  compiete  the 

following  steps  to  qualify  for  admission  to  candidacy: 

1 .  Submit  an  official  application  for  admission  to  candidacy. 

2.  Complete  with  satisfactory  grades  at  least  six  semester 
hours  and  no  more  than  12  semester  hours  of  graduate 
work  at  Indiana  University  of  Pennsylvania. 

3.  Submit  scores  from  the  Graduate  Record  Examinations. 

4.  Satisfy  me  Research  Course  requirement. 

5.  Submit  a  tentative  program  of  study  for  the  completion  of 
the  graduate  program. 

An  applicant  for  admission  to  candidacy  must  be 
recommended  for  admission  by  his  department.  Admission  to 


Academic  Information  —  19 


candidacy  requires  the  approval  of  the  Graduate  School. 

Transfer  of  Credit  —  Credit  for  graduate  courses  completed 
at  another  institution  may  under  certain  circumstances  be 
transferred  to  a  graduate  student's  program  at  Indiana 
University.  These  courses  must  have  been  completed  on  the 
main  campus  of  an  accredited  institution.  Transfer  credit  will 
not  be  accepted  for  courses  in  which  a  grade  lower  than  a  B  or 
its  equivalent  have  been  received.  Transfer  credit  will  be  given 
only  if  the  course  was  completed  within  the  five  years 
immediately  preceding  the  awarding  of  the  degree. 

No  more  than  six  credits  of  transfer  work  will  be  accepted.  A 
student  cannot  request  transfer  of  credit  until  he  has  been 
admitted  to  candidacy.  Transfer  of  credit  must  be  approved  by 
the  candidate's  department  and  the  Dean  of  the  Graduate 
School.  Students  who  wish  to  register  for  courses  in  another 
institution  while  enrolled  in  a  graduate  degree  program  at 
Indiana  University  must  receive  permission  from  the  Dean  of  the 
Graduate  School  prior  to  registering  for  these  courses. 

Credit  Requirement  —  Each  candidate  for  the  master's 
degree  must  complete  a  minimum  of  30  semester  hours,  as  well 
as  all  other  requirements  for  that  degree. 

Time  Requirement  —  All  requirements  including  course 
requirements  must  be  completed  within  the  five  years 
immediately  preceding  the  date  of  the  awarding  of  the  degree. 
Any  work  accepted  by  transfer  from  another  institution  must  fall 
within  this  period. 

Scholarship  —  Each  candidate  for  the  master's  degree  must 
complete  an  acceptable  program  with  an  overall  grade  point 
average  of  3.0  (B)  or  better.  Candidates  who  have  completed  all 
other  requirements  for  the  master's  degree,  but  are  below  the 


minimum  overall  grade  point  average  will  not  be  accepted  as 
applicants  for  the  degree. 

Final  Six  Credits  —  All  candidates  for  the  Master's  degree 
must  complete  the  final  six  credits  of  work  in  courses  given  by 
Indiana  University.  Under  certain  circumstances  appropriate 
substitutions  may  be  made  in  order  to  satisfy  this  requirement. 
Students  wishing  to  make  substitutions  may  make  such  a 
request  to  the  Graduate  Council. 

Application  for  Graduation  —  After  completing  all 
requirements  for  the  master's  degree,  the  candidate  must  file  an 
application  for  graduation.  All  applications  must  be  filed  prior  to 
the  deadlines  listed  in  the  Calendar. 

Graduation  —  At  the  time  that  all  requirements  for  the 
Master's  Degree  have  been  completed,  the  degree  will  be 
awarded  at  the  following  graduation  date.  An  official  diploma 
will  be  available  for  the  student  at  graduation  following  the 
completion  of  the  requirements. 

Requirements  for  Certification  Programs 

Applicants  admitted  to  the  Graduate  School  who  wish  to 
work  towards  certification  should  check  program  descriptions 
in  catalog  for  requirements  related  to  their  program.  Students 
admitted  to  certification  programs  which  include  the 
completion  of  a  master's  degree  will  come  under  the  same 
regulations  described  above.  The  Graduate  School  does  not 
certify  students.  Certification  is  made  upon  the  recommenda- 
tion of  the  Dean  of  the  School  of  Education. 

The  Research  Requirement 

Each  student  should  contact  the  departmental  advisor  or 


20  —  Indiana  University  of  Pennsylvania 


Director  of  Graduate  Study  concerning  requirements  regarding 
tlie  means  of  achieving  the  research  requirement.  In  certain 
departments  it  may  be  found  that  the  thesis  is  an  optional 
requirement. 


Master  of  Education  Curriculum  Requirements 

The  Master  of  Education  Degree  at  Indiana  University  of 
Pennsylvania  operates  under  the  following  organizational 
structure.  Such  a  structure  assures  studies  in  humanistic  and 
behavioral  areas  as  well  as  assuring  studies  in  professional 
education  and  the  subject  specialty  areas. 

I.  Professional  Development  Area  (9  s.h.) 

A.  Humanistic  Studies  (3  s.h.)  One  of  the  following  courses: 
FE  511  Historical  Foundations  of  Education 

FE  512         Philosophical  Foundations  of  Education 
FE  513         Social  Foundations  of  Education 
FE  514         Comparative  Foundations  of  Education 
(See  page  71  for  course  descriptions) 

B.  Behavioral  Studies  (3  s.h.)  One  of  the  following  courses: 
EP  504         Advanced  Educational  Psychology 

EP  573  Psychology  of  Adolescent  Education 

EP  576  Behavioral  Problems 

EP  578  Learning 

EP  580  Pupil  Adjustment 

CE  529  Group  Procedures  (Elementary) 

CE  529  Group  Procedures 

EX  531  Psychology  of  the  Exceptional  Child 

(See  pages  56,  47,  116  for  course  descriptions) 


C.  Research  (3  s.h.) 

Graduate  515  Elements  of  Research 
(See  page  25  for  course  description) 

II.  Specialization  Core  (6  s.h.) 

FE  515         Decision  Making  in  Curriculum 

Development  (pg.  71) 
LP  500         Seminar  in  Learning  Resources  (pg.  85) 
or  Departmental  Methods  or  Curriculum 

Course(s). 

III.  Subject  Area  and/or  Electives  (11-15  s.  h.  maximum) 

Advanced  Graduate  Study  Beyond  ly^aster's  Degree 

Students  may  find  that  more  courses  are  offered  that  would 
be  of  benefit  to  them  than  they  are  able  to  include  in  their 
Master's  degree  program.  These  students  are  encouraged  to 
continue  their  training  after  receiving  their  Master's  degree  and 
this  additional  training  will  be  recognized  by  many  school 
districts  for  salary  purposes  and  by  the  Bureau  of  Teacher 
Certification  for  certification  purposes.  Students  are  advised, 
however,  that  most  graduate  schools  have  their  own  residence 
requirements  and  will  probably  not  accept  more  than  30  credit 
hours  (or  Master's  equivalent)  of  graduate  credit  earned  at 
Indiana  toward  the  Doctor's  degree  at  their  institution. 

Appropriate  certificates  may  be  awarded  to  the  student  who 
completes  an  additional  15  or  30  credit  hours  beyond  the 
Master's  degree.  For  purposes  of  this  certificate  these  credits 
must  be  apportioned  in  a  manner  approved  by  the  Dean  of  the 
Graduate  School. 


Academic  Information  —  21 


Eligibility  of  Teaching  Staff 

Members  of  the  teaching  faculty  of  Indiana  University  of 
Pennsylvania  with  a  rank  of  Assistant  Professor  or  above  (or 
equivalent),  may  not  receive  a  graduate  degree  from  this 
institution.  This  regulation  applies  also  to  any  faculty  member 
employed  by  this  institution  (ull-tlme  at  the  instructor  rank 
unless  such  an  individual  is  already  an  approved  candidate  for  a 
degree  in  the  Graduate  School  of  I  UP  at  the  time  he  is  given  full- 
time  employment  as  an  instructor.  Faculty  members  may, 
however,  register  for  work  in  the  Graduate  School  and  apply  the 
credit  toward  graduate  degrees  to  be  conferred  by  other 
institutions. 


DOCTORAL  DEGREE  PROGRAMS 

The  Graduate  School  at  Indiana  University  offers  work 
leading  to  the  degree  Doctor  of  Philosophy  in  the  following 
fields: 

English  and  American  Literature 
English  Education 
Work  leading  to  the  degree  Doctor  of  Education  is  offered  in 
the  following  field: 

Elementary  Education 
The  Graduate  School  requirements  for  the  Ph.D.  and  the 
D.Ed,  are  available  in  the  Graduate  School  Office.  Students 
admitted  to  these  programs  are  responsible  for  securing  a  copy 
of  these  regulations. 


Requirements  for  the  Doctoral  Degree 

All  students  working  towards  a  doctoral  degree  must  satisfy 
the  minimum  Graduate  School  requirements  described  below. 
In  addition,  each  department  may  have  special  requirements. 
Students  should  be  familiar  with  the  requirements  in  their  own 
department. 

Under  certain  circumstances  Graduate  School  requirements 
for  the  Doctoral  degree  may  be  satisfied  by  means  of 
substitution.  In  no  case  will  a  requirement  be  waived.  Requests 
for  the  acceptance  of  substitutions  should  be  made  in  the  form 
of  a  petition  to  the  Graduate  Council.  Each  petition  must  have 
the  approval  of  the  Graduate  Dean  and  the  Department 
Chairman. 

Residency  Requirement  —  Each  student  working  towards  a 
doctoral  degree  must  satisfy  the  residency  requirement.  The 
residency  requirement  can  be  satisfied  by  full-time  study  for  at 
least  two  consecutive  semesters  or  full-time  study  for  at  least 
one  semester  preceding  or  following  summer  session. 

Time  Requirement  —  A  minimum  of  three  academic  years  of 
study  beyond  the  Bachelor's  degree,  or  the  equivalent,  or  two 
years  beyond  the  Master's  degree,  must  be  devoted  to  the 
doctoral  program. 

Credit  Requirement  —  A  minimum  of  60  semester  hours  of 
credit,  exclusive  of  research  credits,  must  beearned  beyond  the 
Bachelor's  degree. 

Transfer  Credit  —  Transfer  credit  is  limited  to  the  credit 
equivalent  of  a  Master's  degree,  except  in  special  cases 
approved  by  the  appropriate  department  chairman  and  the 
Dean  of  the  Graduate  School. 


22  —  Indiana  University  of  Pennsylvania 


Statute  of  Limitations  —  After  the  student  has  been  admitted 
to  candidacy  for  the  degree,  a  maximum  of  five  years  is  allowed 
for  the  completion  of  all  work. 

Admission  to  Candidacy  —  Each  student  admitted  to  a 
doctoral  program  will  be  screened  for  candidacy  after 
completing  no  less  than  eight  credits  and  no  more  than  16 
credits  beyond  the  Master's  degree  with  a  minimum  quality 
point  average  of  3.00  or  higher.  Departmental  requirements  for 
minimum  quality  point  average  may  be  set  higher  than  the 
Graduate  School  requirement  but  in  no  case  can  it  be  lower. 

Candidacy  Examination  —  The  candidacy  examination, 
which  may  be  written  or  oral,  or  both,  and  which  may  serve  also 
as  the  final  examination  for  the  Master's  degree  (where  a 
department  requires  such  an  examination),  is  administered  by 
the  department  of  the  student's  principal  subject  in  his  area  or 
areas  of  specialization.  This  examination  may  not  be  taken  until 
the  student  has  completed  at  least  one  year  of  study  beyond  the 
Bachelor's  degree.  Scores  on  the  examination  must  satisfy  the 
student's  dissertation  committee. 

Tiie  Dissertation  Committee  —  The  dissertation  committee 
will  supervise  the  student's  program  from  the  point  at  which  he 
is  admitted  to  candidacy  through  the  defense  of  the 
dissertation.  This  will  include  the  preparation  of  a  plan  of  study, 
setting  of  the  candidacy  examination,  setting  of  the 
comprehensive  examination,  general  supervision  related  to 
satisfying  degree  requirements  and  general  supervision  of 
research  proposal  and  the  dissertation. 

The  Comprehensive  Examination  —  The  Comprehensive 
Examination  is  given  to  determine  whether  the  student  has 


made  satisfactory  progress  in  his  study,  and  to  determine  the 
likelihood  that  he  will  pursue  research  for  his  thesis  profitably 
and  meet  training  requirements  for  the  degree.  It  may  be  both 
written  and  oral  and  is  designed  by  the  candidate's  committee  to 
test  the  student's  knowledge  in  his  major  field  of  specialization 
and  supporting  fields.  It  is  not  necessarily  confined  to  the  areas 
in  which  the  student  has  taken  course  work  at  Indiana  or 
elsehwere. 

Foreign    Language/Research    Tool    Requirement    —    The 

candidate  for  the  Ph.D.  degree  is  required  to  demonstrate  a 
competent  reading  knowledge  of  two  foreign  languages 
appropriate  to  the  general  area  of  study  or  (upon 
recommendation  of  his  advisory  committee)  a  reading 
knowledge  of  one  foreign  language  together  with  a 
comprehensive  knowledge  of  its  literature. 

The  candidate  for  the  D.Ed,  degree  is  required  to  pass  a 
sequence  of  courses  in  statistics  as  prescribed  by  the  major 
department.  He  must  also  demonstrate  by  examination,  or 
through  evidence  of  training  satisfactory  to  the  major 
department,  a  competence  in  computer  language. 

Research  Proposal  —  After  the  candidate  has  passed  the 
comprehensive  examination,  and  after  he  has  done  extensive 
preliminary  research,  he  must  appear  before  his  dissertation 
committee  to  defend  his  research  proposal.  A  copy  of  this 
proposal,  prepared  according  to  directions  supplied  by  the 
Associate  Dean  for  Graduate  Research,  must  be  in  the  hands  of 
the  committee  members  at  least  two  weeks  in  advance  of  the 
meeting.  The  proposal  must  be  found  satisfactory  by  all 
members  of  the  committee  before  the  candidate  may  proceed 
with  the  dissertation. 


Academic  Information  —  23 


The  Dissertation  —  A  dissertation  is  required  of  all 
candidates  for  the  Doctor  of  Education  degree.  The  thesis  must 
demonstrate  the  candidate's  mastery  of  the  area  of  his  research 
and  embody  the  results  of  an  original  investigation  in  his 
principal  field  of  study.  It  must  give  evidence  of  an  exhaustive 
study  of  a  specialized  field  and  must  provide  an  authoritative 
statement  of  knowledge  on  the  subject  or  produce  a  new 
interpretation  by  rearrangement  or  reanalysis  of  existing  data. 
The  work  must  provide  a  definite  contribution  to  knowledge  of 
sufficient  importance  to  warrant  its  publication.  He  may 
schedule  in  research  up  to  three  credits  a  semester  from  the 
time  at  which  the  dissertation  subject  is  approved  by  the 
dissertation  committee. 

Dissertation  Review  Meeting  —  After  the  doctoral 
dissertation  has  been  accepted  by  the  candidate's  research 
advisor,  a  finished  copy  is  presented  to  the  Dean  of  the 
Graduate  School,  from  whom  it  circulates  to  all  members  of  the 
dissertation  committee.  At  a  time  convenient  to  all,  the 
candidate  shall  then  request  a  formal  meeting  of  the  dissertation 
committee  in  order  to  secure  approval  of  the  dissertation.  The 
dissertation  must  be  approved  by  each  member  of  the 
dissertation  committee. 

Pubiicatlon  of  the  Dissertation  —  After  the  dissertation  has 
been  approved  and  accepted  by  the  committee,  three  copies  of 
the  dissertation  and  two  copies  of  an  abstract  must  be  submitted 
to  the  Graduate  Council  through  the  office  of  the  Dean  of  the 
Graduate  School.  The  major  department  may  require  an 
additional  copy  for  the  department  archives.  Instructions  on  the 
final  form  of  the  dissertation  are  available  at  the  office  of  the 
Associate  Dean  for  Graduate  Research. 


The  dissertation  must  be  microfilmed  according  to  the  plan 
provided  by  University  Microfilm,  Ann  Arbor,  Michigan. 

Re-examination  —  A  student  who  fails  the  candidacy 
examination,  or  any  part  of  the  comprehensive  examination,  or 
any  of  the  examinations  in  foreign  languages  and/or  research 
tools,  may  present  himself  for  re-examination  not  earlier  than 
one  semester  later  nor  later  than  one  year  after  the  time  of  the 
first  examination.  No  student  will  be  allowed  a  third  examination 
without  a  recommendation  to  that  effect  from  the  department  in 
which  he  has  done  his  major  work  and  the  approval  of  the 
Graduate  Council. 

Application  for  Graduation  —  Formal  application  for 
graduation  must  be  filed  with  the  Dean  of  the  Graduate  School 
not  later  than  two  months  prior  to  the  date  of  the  University 
Convocation  at  which  the  candidate  expects  to  receive  the 
Doctor's  degree. 

The  Degrees  of  Doctor  of  Philosophy  and 
Doctor  of  Education 

The  Doctoral  degrees  are  conferred  for  distinguished 
achievement  in  a  particular  field  of  scholarship  and  for 
demonstrated  ability  for  independent  research  in  a  subdivision 
of  this  field.  No  specific  number  of  course  credits  entitles  a 
student  to  the  degree. 

Each  department  offering  the  degree  has  beyond  the  general 
requirements  of  the  Graduate  School  its  own  special 
requirements  to  be  met,  and  may,  but  only  with  the  approval  of 
the  Graduate  Council,  waive  or  modify  any  of  the  general 
requirements.  The  department's  detailed  description  of  the 
degree  should  be  consulted. 


COMPUTER  SCIENCE 


CO  501  FUNDAMENTALS  OF  COMPUTER  PROGRAMMING  3  credits 

Introduction  to  digital  computer  programming  Development  of  problem 
solving  skills  using  flowcharting  and  a  problem  oriented  language  such  as, 
FORTRAN.  4  to  5  programs  required  Description  of  a  large  problem  from  students 
field  of  interest  for  possible  computer  solution 

CO  502  COMPUTERS  IN  EDUCATION  3  credits 

Introduction  to  computers  and  computer  programming  in  the  language 
BASIC,  with  emphasis  on  applications  in  education:  general  models  for  computer 
usage  in  education,  and  educational  institutions,  case  studies  of  specific  projects 
in  terms  of  approach,  effectiveness,  and  implications  for  the  future.  No  computer 
prerequisites. 

CO  510  PROCESSOR  ARCHITECTURE  AND 

MICROPROGRAMMING  3  credits 

The  logical  description  of  computer  processor  structure  (architecture),  with 

emphasis  on  the  microprogramming  approach.  Project  assignments  using  the 

Microdata   1600  minicomputer  at  microlevel.   Prerequisite:  Permission  of  the 

instructor 

CO  520  MODERN  COMPUTER  LANGUAGES  3  credits 

Comparative  study  of  the  properties  and  applications  of  a  range  of  modern 

higher  level  programming  languages,  including  APL,  SNOBOL,  PL/I.  ALGOL  60. 


PASCAL,  LISP,  and  TRAC   Comparison  with  older  languages  such  as  BASIC, 
FORTRAN,  COBOL,  and  RPG   Prerequisite:  Permission  of  the  instructor. 

CO  530  INTRODUCTION  TO  SYSTEMS  PROGRAMMING  3  credits 

Concepts  and  techniques  of  systems  programming  with  an  emphasis  on 
assembly  and  compilation  of  user  programs  Representation  of  source  language 
so  as  to  facilitate  the  needed  translation  process  Exercises  using  the  University 
computer  and  the  departmental  minicomputer  and  microcomputer.  Prerequisites: 
Permission  of  the  instructor. 

CO  540  LARGE  FILE  ORGANIZATION  AND  ACCESS  3  credits 

The  organization  of  large  computer  files  for  business  systems,  information 
systems,  and  other  applications  Use  of  COBOL  and  Assembler  tor  efficient  file 
access   Evaluation  of  file  access  Prerequisite:  Permission  of  the  instructor. 

CO  541  DATA  BASE  MANAGEMENT  3  credits 

Review  of  data  base  concepts  Detailed  study  of  data  base  management 
approaches.  Comparative  presentation  of  commercially  available  data  base 
management  systems.  Prerequisites:  Permission  of  the  instructor. 

CO  550  APPLIED  NUMERICAL  METHODS  3  credits 

Polynomial  approximations  using  finite  differences:  applications  in  numerical 
integration  and  differentiation  Numerical  solution  of  initial  value  ordinary 
differential  equations:  boundary  value  problems:  difference  methods  for  partial 
differential  equations.  The  APL  language  will  be  introduced  and  used,  along  with 
FORTRAN,  in  programming  selected  algorithms.  Prerequisites:  Computer 
Programming.  Lmear  Algebra,  and  Ordinary  Differential  Equations. 

CO  551  NUMERICAL  ANALYSIS  3  credits 

Theory  of  polynomial  approximation:  applications  to  quadrature  formulae. 
Numerical  solution  of  linear  systems  and  computation  of  eigenvalues  and 
eigenvectors  using  matrix  transformation  methods.  Selected  topics  from 
differential  equations,  linear  programming,  rational  and  approximations,  and 
Monte  Carlo  techniques.  Prerequisite:  CO  550. 

CO  560  THEORY  OF  COMPUTATION  3  credits 

Formal  methods  for  describing  and  analyzing  programming  languages  and 
algorithms:  Backus-Naur  forms:  productions:  regular  expressions:  introduction  to 
automata  theory:  Turing  machines:  recent  concepts  in  algorithm  theory. 
Prerequisite:  Permission  of  the  instructor. 


General  Service  Courses  —  25 


CO  581  SPECIAL  TOPICS  IN  COMPUTER  SCIENCE  3  credits 

Seminar  in  advanced  topics  from  Computer  Science;  content  will  vary 
depending  on  the  interests  of  the  instructor  and  students  (Consult  Department  (or 
currently  planned  topics)  May  be  repeated  for  additional  credit  Prerequisite: 
Permission  of  the  instructor 

SUPERVISED  LABORATORY  EXPERIENCE 

ED  540  SUPERVISION  OF  STUDENT  TEACHING  3  s  h 

Designed  (or  cooperating  teachers  and  others  working  with  student  teachers, 
this  course  provides  opportunity  for  the  development  of  pertinent  materials  and 
(or  continuous  evaluation  of  various  aspects  of  the  student  teaching  program. 
Stress  is  also  given  to  evaluate  procedures  used  m  working  with  prospective 
teachers  Basic  principles  underlying  an  e((ective  student  teaching  program  are 
examined  (rom  a  theoretical  and  applied  viewpoint  Prerequisite:  Teaching 
certificate  and  teaching  experience 

RESEARCH 

GD515  ELEMENTS  OF  RESEARCH  3  s  h. 

Selection  o(  a  research  problem,  collection  o(  data,  types  o(  research,  research 
report,  and  use  o(  the  library  and  computer  in  connection  with  research  problems 
will  be  studied  Elements  of  statistics  are  introduced  This  course  provides 
background  (or  preparation  o(  thesis  and  enables  the  student  to  become  an 
intelligent  consumer  of  products  of  educational  research  Required  o(all  students 
working  toward  the  M  Ed  degree 

NOTE:  Some  sections  o(  GD  515  are  taught  by  departments  exclusively  (or  their 
majors  Students  should  check  the  schedule  o(  classes  and  program  the 
appropriate  section. 

GD  550  THESIS  1-6  sh 

Thesis  Students  register  for  this  course  when  writing  the  thesis  GD  550 
should  be  scheduled  (or  the  semester  that  the  student  plans  to  complete  his  work 

Recital:  Graduate  students  in  music  education  may  prepare  and  perform  a 
formal  recital  under  the  guidance  of  their  private  teacher  in  their  major  performing 
area  Approval  for  presentation  of  a  recital  in  lieu  of  thesis  must  be  secured  from 
the  graduate  committee  of  the  Music  Education  Department.  A  student  should 


GENERAL  SERVICE  COURSES 

secure  approval  for  this  event  early  in  his  graduate  program,  but  actual 
performance  of  recital  should  occur  close  to  the  end  of  his  graduate  program  GD 
550  should  be  scheduled  for  semester  that  the  student  plans  to  give  his  recital 

GD  650  DISSERTATION  1-10  Sh.  —  Hours  to  be  arranged 

Students  preparing  a  doctoral  dissertation  (or  credit  must  register  (or  this 
course  The  number  o(  credits  assigned  and  the  extent  o(  lime  (or  which  research 
activity  is  scheduled  depend  upon  nature  and  scope  o(  the  individual  student's 
research  problem  as  well  as  his  total  doctoral  program 

NOTE:  Credits  for  both  GD  550  and  650  if  not  completed  during  the  semester 
scheduled  are  recorded  as  INCOMPLETE  They  remain  so  until  the  paper 
IS  approved  THEY  DO  NOT  AUTOMATICALLY  REVERT  TO  THE 
GRADE  OF  "F"  in  a  specific  length  of  time.  Also,  GD  550  and  650  can  be 
programmed  above  the  regular  load. 


GD  540 
GD  545 


INDEPENDENT  STUDY 
SPECIAL  TOPICS 


1-3  s.h. 
1-3  s.h. 


NOTE:  None  of  these  three  courses  should  be  scheduled  unless  prior  approval 
has  been  obtained  from  the  Graduate  School 

STATISTICS 

GD  516  STATISTICAL  METHODS  I  3  s  h 

Consists  of  measurement  and  statistical  techniques  as  used  in  teaching  school 
administration,  and  common  educational  research  Basic  descriptive  statistics, 
including  measures  of  central  tendency,  variability  and  correlation  will  be 
developed  Reliability  and  validity  o(  test  scores  with  emphasis  on  use  ot  statistical 
techniques  studied  and  their  interpretation 

GD517  STATISTICAL  METHODS  II  3sh 

Using  computer  programs  a  wide  array  of  statistical  procedures  for 
educational  research  workers  will  be  explored  Basic  concepts  of  statistical 
inference  and  prediction  will  be  reviewed,  including  regression  analysis  and 
prediction,  hypothesis  testing,  analysis  of  variance  and  covariance.  and  partial 
and  multiple  correlation  Emphasis  on  use  of  computer  and  interpretation  of 
computer  print-outs  along  with  understanding  techniques  employed  No 
computer  knowledge  is  necessary  Prerequisite:  GD  516  or  equivalent 


ADULT-COMMUNITY  EDUCATION 

The  Master's  in  Adult-Community  Education  is  the  first 
program  of  this  type  to  be  offered  in  Western  Pennsylvania.  The 
program's  aim  is  to  develop  qualified  professionals  in  the 
growing  area  of  adult  and  continuing  education.  The  program 
will  serve  a  dual  purpose:  1)  it  will  provide  experience  and 
education  which  will  enable  the  student  to  undertake  a 
professional  position  In  adult  education;  and,  2)  It  will  provide  a 
solid  base  of  concepts  which  will  enable  the  student  to  proceed 
toward  a  doctorate  at  another  institution. 

The  program  objectives  are  to  strengthen  the  education  of 
adult  educators  by  providing:  a  study  of  the  historical  and 
current  roles  adult  education  plays  in  American  society;  an 
understanding  of  methods,  techniques,  and  variations  best 
utilized  to  facilitate  adult  teaching  and  learning;  and  a 
supervised  internship  In  an  adult  education  agency  of  particular 
Interest  to  the  student,  with  the  approval  of  the  Adult- 
Community  Education  faculty. 

Courses  520  through  540  will  provide  the  core  studies 
coupled  with  Elements  of  Research  and  Thesis  Writing,  needed 
for  the  Master  of  Arts  degree.  Nine  semester  hours  should  be 
chosen  around  a  special  emphasis  area.  A  total  of  30  hours  Is 
needed  to  obtain  the  degree. 


Program  Curricula  —  27 
Adult  Education 
Art  and  Art  Education 


COURSE  DESCRIPTIONS 


AC  520  INTRODUCTION  TO  ADULT 

COMMUNITY  EDUCATION  3  s  h 

Definition  o(  adult  community  education,  its  history,  an  operational  view  of 
programs,  understanding  of  its  nature,  and  programming  aspects 

AC  521  TEACHING  IN  ADULT  COMMUNITY  EDUCATION  3  s  h 

Psychological  and  sociological  factors  affecting  adults  as  learners;  uses  and 
adaptations  of  various  methods  and  techniques  for  facilitating  adult  learning 

AC  522  ADULT  COMMUNITY  EDUCATION  SEMINAR  3  s.h. 

Students  are  provided  an  opportunity  to  work  cooperatively  under  guidance 
and  supervision  of  an  experienced  adult  educator  An  intensive  analysis  is  made  of 
specific  programs  Emphasis  on  literature  of  field  and  techniques  of  studying 
agency  problems  Special  projects  are  assigned  to  each  student  for  intensive 
study 

AC  523  ORGANIZATION  AND  ADMINISTRATION  IN 

ADULT  COMMUNITY  EDUCATION  3  s  h 

The  purpose  is  to  provide  information  and  experience  in  the  organization  and 
administration  of  Adult  Community  Educational  programs  and  how  to  worl(  with 
the  entire  community  structure 

AC  540  ADULT  COMMUNITY  EDUCATION  INTERNSHIP  6  s  h. 

An  opportunity  of  integrating  observation  and  participation,  theory  and 
practice  in  an  adult  education  agency  First-hand  experience  will  be  individualized 
for  each  student  A  contract  will  be  made  by  the  student  for  specific  objectives  to 
be  attained  The  agency  shall  be  chosen  in  cooperation  with  the  professor 


PROGRAM  CURRICULA:  A  to  Z 

ART  AND  ART  EDUCATION 


The  following  curricula  make  it  possible  for  a  mature  student 
capable  of  self-direction  to  select  a  program  suited  to  individual 
needs  with  the  help  of  an  advisor.  In  effect,  the  student  and 
advisor  can  tailor-make  a  program  of  study. 


Procedure  for  Admission  (departmental  approval) 

I.The  student  must  file  a  "letter  of  intent"  stating  the 
applicant's  area(s)  of  specialization  and  reasons  for  these 
choices.  The  area  of  specialization  is  subject  to  review 
including  one  revision  in  consultation  with  the  student's 
advisory  committee.  This  review  will  take  place  between 
eight  and  twelve  study  hours.  This  is  the  student's 
responsibility. 

2.  For  admission  to  the  M.Ed,  program,  a  student  must  have 
Level  I  Certification  or  the  equivalent.  To  be  admitted  to  the 
M.Ed,  and  Certification  or  the  M.A.  in  studio  art,  the 
candidate  must  possess  a  B.S.  in  Art  Education,  B.F.A.  or 
B.A.  with  a  studio  major  or  equivalent.  This  will  be 
determined  by  the  departmental  admissions  committee. 


28  —  Indiana  University  of  Pennsylvania 


Advisory 

There  are  four  program  advisors.  The  student  will  be 
assigned  to  one  of  the  advisors  who  will  assist  him  in  planning 
his  program  of  study. 

Program  Advisors  Students 

Thomas  J.  Dongllla  A  —  F 

Frank  Ross  G  —  L 

Robert  E.  Slenker  M  —  R 

John  Dropcho  S  —  Z 

Each  student  will  have  an  advisory  committee  of  (1)  the 
program  advisor,  (2)  a  professor  from  his  area  of  specialization, 
(3)  a  faculty  member  of  the  student's  choice,  and  (4)  either  the 
department  chairman  or  the  director  of  graduate  studies.  This 
committee  will  review  the  student's  progress  and  make  the 
recommendation  for  candidacy.  The  professor  from  the  area  of 
specialization  will  act  as  the  committee  chairman  and  will  be 
chosen  by  the  director  of  graduate  studies  or  the  department 
chairman. 

Research  and  Independent  Study 

Independent  Study:  A  student  may  select  a  specific  problem 
for  one  or  two  semester  hours  and  pursue  it  in  off  campus  study 
with  the  help  of  an  advisor.  The  student  will  present  a  proposal 
for  approval  to  the  advisor  of  his  choice  and  the  director  of 
graduate  studies.  If  the  proposal  is  for  three  study  hours  or 
more,  it  will  be  reviewed  by  the  advisory  committee  and  juried  at 
the  end  by  the  same  committee. 

Thesis:  Under  both  thesis  and  independent  study,  the  final 
product  may  be  a  one-artist  show  of  the  minor  and  major  area. 
The  show  will  be  juried  by  the  thesis  committee,  which  will  be 


composed  of  the  advisory  committee  plus  the  associate  dean  for 
research  of  the  graduate  school.  The  show  will  be  accompanied 
by  a  written  statement,  sketch  books,  catalogue,  notes  or  other 
method  of  reporting  deemed  appropriate  by  the  committee.  All 
shows  will  leave  some  permanent  evidence  of  their  existence 
such  as  slides,  photographs  or  catalogues. 


MASTER  OF  EDUCATION  IN  ART  DEGREE 

See  page  20  for  additional  information  on  the  M.E.  degree. 

I.  Professional  Development  Area  (9  s.h.) 

A.  Humanistic  Studies  (3  s.h.)  —  One  of  the  following: 
FE511,  FE512.  FE  513,  or  FE  514 

B.  Behavioral  Studies  (3  s.h.)  —  One  of  the  following: 

EP  504,  EP  573,  EP  576,  EP  578,  EP  580,  CE  529,  CE  539,  or 
SE531 

C.  Research  (3  s.h.) 

GR  515,  Elements  of  Research 

II.  Specialization  Core  (6  semester  hours) 
Two  of  the  following  courses: 

FE  515         Decision  Making  Curriculum  Development 
LR  500         Seminar  in  Learning  Resources 
AT  510         Art  and  the  Exceptional  Child 
AT  512         Supervision  and  Administration  in 

Art  Education 
AT  511  Curriculum  Development  in  Art  Education 

*AT  513         Research  in  Art  Education 
AT  514         History  and  Philosophy  of  Art  Education 
•Required  of  Master  of  Education  Candidates. 


Program  Curricula  —  29 
Art  and  Art  Education 


III.  Subject  Area  and/or  Elective 

AR  Studio  courses  as  listed  in  catalog. 

(9  semester  hours) 
Art  Elective  (3  semester  hours) 
GR  550         Thesis  (3  semester  hours) 

MASTER  OF  ARTS  DEGREE  IN  ART  THERAPY 

The  design  and  philosophy  of  this  program  is  to  provide  the 
theoretical  and  social  interaction  for  art  therapy  skills,  which  are 
practiced  in  a  clinical,  educational  or  rehabilitative  setting.  A 
practicum  or  internship,  under  the  supervision  of  a  practicing 
art  therapist,  psychiatrist  or  other  clinical  personnel,  in  an 
applicable  setting  is  required.  The  actual  master's  program  is  an 
interdisciplinary  one  of  art,  art  therapy,  psychology  and  related 
areas.  Students  enrolled  in  the  program  are  a  part  of  existing 
course  offerings  except  for  the  12  hours  of  Art  Therapy  Core 
Course  vi/ork.  Students  may  select  electives  appropriate  to  their 
backgrounds,  interests  and  individual  goals.  Each  student  Is 
expected  to  consult  with  their  art  therapy  advisor  before 
planning  their  particular  program. 

Semester 
Hours 
A.  Required  Core  Courses 

PC  533         Psychology  of  Personality  3 

PC  534         Abnormal  Psychology  3 

■PC  545         Theory  and  Techniques  of 

Psychological  Intervention  or  3 

*EP   562         Psychotherapy  and  Group  Dynamics         3 
EP  563         Projective  Techniques  3 

AT   554  Introduction  to  Art  Therapy  3 

AT  555         Art  Therapy  Seminar  3 


AT  556         Art  Therapy  Practicum  6 
SE   565         Education  of  Children  with  Social  and 

Emotional  Maladjustments  3 

GR  550         Thesis  and  Research  6 


TOTAL 


31-36 


B.  Each  candidate  must  have  mastered  the  tools  and  techniques 
of  the  visual  art.  This  will  be  assessed  through  a  review  of 
records,  experience,  portfolios,  etc.  Studens  weak  in  any 
area  are  expected  to  have  mastered  it  before  receiving  the 
degree.  Thus  some  students  would  be  required  to  take  more 
than  the  required  hours  for  the  program.  All  students  will  be 
asked  to  select  three  to  nine  hours  from  the  following 
semester  hour  courses:  AT  510;  AR  540,  544,  547,  550,  553, 
561,  562,  565,  568  or  EL  545. 

C.  The  remainder  of  the  elective  credits  will  be  chosen  from  the 
following  3  semester  hours  courses:  PC  530,  540,  *542,  546; 
EP  504,  562,  572, 576, 578, 580;  SE  522,  531 ,  532,  538,  539,  565; 
HE  521;  CE  535,  539,  545  or  546. 

A  minimum  of  34  hours  must  be  completed  on  the  program. 
*Must  have  permission  of  instructor. 

MASTER  OF  ARTS  DEGREE 

Studio  Major  (AR  540  through  AR  568)  no  less  than      12 

Studio  Minor  (AR  540  through  AR  568)  no  less  than       6 

Art  Seminar  (AR  515)  3 

Thesis  (GR  515)  2-4 

Electives  3-6 


TOTAL 


30 


30  —  Indiana  University  of  Pennsylvania 


MASTER  OF  EDUCATION  PLUS  CERTIFICATION 

Undergraduate  Requirements 

Elementary  Certification  (AR  317,  EL  421,  EL  422)  11 

Secondary  Certification  (AR  317,  ED  441,  ED  442)  11 

Elementary  and  Secondary  Certification  22 

Graduate  Requirements 

Seminar  in  Learning  Resources  (LR  500)  3 

Educational  Psychology  (EP  504  or  EP  51o)  3 
Foundations  of  Education  (FE  511,  FE  512,  FE  513, 

FE514,  FE515)  3 
Art  Education  (Select  Two:  AT  510,  AT  511, 

AT  512,  AT  514)  6 

AT  513     Research  in  Art  Education  3 

GR515     Elements  of  Research  2 

GR  550    Thesis  3 

Studio  9 

GRADUATE  MINOR  IN  MEDIA 

Graduate  students  may,  with  the  approval  of  their  advisor, 
obtain  a  minor  in  Media  at  the  Indiana  University  of 
Pennsylvania.  The  minor  consists  of  a  minimum  of  six  semester 
hours  of  work  in  Graduate  level  courses  in  Media  and  may 
include  as  many  hours  in  Media  as  are  approved  by  the  student's 
graduate  program  advisor. 

The  minor  may  include  any  combination  of  courses  offered 
by  the  Learning  Resources  Department  except  LR  530  Classifi- 
cation and  Cataloging  of  Learning  Resources,  LR  560 
Management  of  Learning  Resources  Programs  and  LR  569 
Internship.  These  courses  are  designed  for  the  professional 


Media  Center  Manager  rather  than  the  person  minoring  in 
Media.  Media  minors  may  be  designed  around  the  list  of  courses 
under  Learning  Resources  (Page  84).  All  courses  are  tnree 
semester  hour  credits  except  LR  580,  which  may  be  from  one  to 
three  semester  hour  credits. 

The  number  of  semester  hours  in  each  of  these  programs 
represents  the  minimum.  The  student's  committee  reserves  the 
right  to  recommend  more. 


COURSE  DESCRIPTIONS 

AT   510  ART  AND  THE  EXCEPTIONAL  CHILD  3  s  h. 

Designed  to  consider  characteristics  and  needs  of  the  mentally  retarded  and 
the  intellectually  gifted  child  with  particular  emphasis  on  art  aspects  of  their 
education. 

AT   511  ART  CURRICULUI^  DEVELOPMENT  IN 

ART  EDUCATION  3  S.h. 

A  seminar  and  study  of  curricula  at  all  levels   Particular  attention  given  to 

individual  needs  of  class  participants  in  development  of  curricula  pertinent  to  their 

own  teaching  situations  For  those  students  who  have  not  yet  taught,  theoretical 

and  practical  problems  will  be  examined. 

AT   512  SUPERVISION  AND  ADIVIINISTRATION  IN 

ART  EDUCATION  3  s.h. 

Responsibilities,  functions  and  duties  of  Art  Supervisors  and  Administrators. 

AT   513  RESEARCH  IN  ART  EDUCATION  3sh 

Required  of  all  Art  Education  majors.  Reviews  past  and  present  research 
focusing  upon  the  methodologies  pertinent  to  the  field.  Prerequisite  for  this 
course,  GR  51 S,  is  to  be  scheduled  within  the  first  four  to  eight  semester  hours.  AT 
513  must  be  taken  as  soon  after  as  possible  but  within  the  first  12  semester  hours 

AT   514  HISTORY  AND  PHILOSOPHY  OF  ART  EDUCATION  3  s.h. 

Considers  art  education  in  Europe.  United  States  and  Canada,  designed  to 
give  the  student  background. 

AT   554  INTRODUCTION  TO  ART  THERAPY  3  s.h. 

A  survey  of  the  concepts  and  theories,  applications  and  procedures  of  Art 


Program  Curricula  —  31 
Art  and  Art  Education 


Therapy  Consideration  ol  selections  of  materials  and  media  for  varying 
diagnostic  and  therapeutic  problems,  rehabilitory  and  psychiatric  settings  and 
limitations  of  the  art  therapist  Prerequisite  is  admission  to  graduate  school. 
Basically  the  course  will  serve  individuals  with  clinical  backgrounds  (psychology, 
social  workers,  child  care,  speech  therapy,  special  education,  art  education,  art 
therapy),  and  those  with  a  primary  identity  in  one  or  more  of  the  arts. 

AT   555  ART  THERAPY  SEMINAR  3  s  h 

Provides  practical  considerations  in  therapy  to  prepare  student  to  enter  a 
practicum  experience  Prerequisite  is  Introduction  to  Art  Therapy  554  or  the 
equivalent 

AT   556  ART  THERAPY  PRACTICUM  6  s.h. 

A  professional  supervisory  team  will  guide  the  student  in  a  semester 
experience  in  settings  where  they  will  practice  art  therapy  Discussion,  analysis, 
planning  and  data  gathering  will  be  in  the  student's  area  of  interest.  Minimum 
required  courses  for  the  Art  Therapy  Degree  are  the  prerequisites 

AH  506  ANCIENT  MIGRATORY  ART  3  S.h. 

Survey  of  painting,  architecture  and  sculpture  of  Prehistoric  Man:  Egypt  and 
the  Near  East,  as  well  as  Art  of  Primitive  Man  of  later  times  —  The  American  Indian. 
African  Art  and  the  Art  of  Oceanic  (offered  in  alternate  semesters) 

AH  507  MEDIEVAL  ART  3  s  h. 

Prerequisite  Art  History  majors,  by  special  arrangement.  Art  and  architecture 
of  Europe  during  Middle  Ages,  beginning  with  a  study  of  Early  Christian  and 
Byzantine  art  and  concluding  with  art  of  Romanesque  and  Gothic  periods. 

AH  508          ITALIAN  RENAISSANCE  ART  3  S.h. 

Art  History  Majors,  by  special  arrangement  Covers  span  of  Italian  art  from 

t400's  through  1850  and  Mannerist  movement  Special  attention  paid  to  great 
masters  of  the  period 

AH  509  BAROQUE  AND  ROCOCO  ART  3  s.h. 

General  survey  of  an  from  1575-1775.  Will  include  architecture,  sculpture, 
painting  and  other  arts 

AH  522  ART  IN  AMERICA  3  s.h. 

Surveys  American  art  and  its  relation  to  development  of  American  ideas  and 
ideals. 

AH  523  SEMINAR  IN  ART  CRITICISM  3  s  h 

Explores  various  philosophic  theories  of  art  and  an  products  An  attempt  not 

only  to  relate  these  theories  to  senses  and  form  itself,  but  also  to  technical. 


psychological  and  cultural  values  Primary  concepts  explored  are  play,  illusion, 
imitation,  beauty,  emotional  expression,  imagination,  empathy,  creativity  and 
experience  Some  time  will  be  given  to  forms  of  an  that  are  not  primarily  visual, 
including  music,  dance,  literature  and  poetry 

AH  524  ART  OF  THE  EAST  3  s  h. 

Nature  of  Eastern  An's  meaning  and  place  in  contemporary  world  culture. 

AH  525  ARCHITECTURAL  INFLUENCES  IN 

A  CONTEMPORARY  SOCIETY  3  s  h 

Experimental  problems  in  structure  and  aesthetics  as  related  to  architecture 
Attempts  are  made  to  search  out  the  historical  roots  of  many  contemporary  styles 
of  architecture 

AH  526  PRE-COLUMBIAN  ART  3  s  h 

An  of  Mezo-American  cultures,  Mayas,  Aztecs  and  Incas.  as  influenced  by 
Oceanic  migrations 

AH  528  WORLD  ART  SINCE  1875  3  s.h. 

Discoveries  and  advances  in  anistic  expression  in  modern  times.  Subject 
matter  for  study  may  be  found  in  any  or  all  of  the  ans 

All  art  history  courses  are  open  as  electives  to  all  students 

AR   515  ART  SEMINAR  3sh 

Opponunity  for  student  to  discuss  problems  in  an  related  to  his  studio 
interests  proposals  will  also  be  prepared  For  MA  candidates  only 

AR   516  DIRECTED  STUDIES  0-3  S  h. 

Offered  in  instances  where  a  panicular  course  is  needed  by  a  student,  but  is 
not  on  the  regular  schedule  rotation  Approval  must  be  secured  from  the  advisor, 
the  instructor  involved  and  the  Graduate  Committee  in  Art  Education 

AR  540  GRADUATE  STUDIO  IN  CERAMICS  3-18  s  h. 

Prerequisite  —  at  least  one  year  of  undergraduate  ceramics  All  aspects  of 
handforming.  decorating,  glazing  and  finng  will  be  dealt  with  This  may  include 
body  and  glaze  formulation  and  reduction,  oxidation,  salt,  wood  and  raku  finng  as 
well  as  thrown,  coiled  or  slab  construction  or  combinations  thereof  Historic  and 
contemporary  ceramics  and  philosophies  of  the  craft. 

AR   544  GRADUATE  STUDIO  IN  FABRICS  3-18  s  h. 

Fundamentals  of  fabric  construction  and  processes  Emphasis  on 
experimental  approaches  to  fabric  design  and  construction  Designed  to  meet  the 
needs  of  beginning  as  well  as  advanced  students. 


32  —  Indiana  University  of  Pennsylvania 


AR  547  GRADUATE  STUDIO  IN  JEWELRY  AND  METAL  WORK     3-18  sh. 

Advanced  study  dealing  with  specialized  problems  in  design  and  execution  of 
metal  work  and  jewelry.  A  thesis  may  be  developed  depending  upon  research  in 
one  of  areas  relating  to  this  field,  history,  materials,  tools,  processes  or  leaching 
techniques  of  the  craft. 

AR  550  GRADUATE  STUDIO  IN  SCULPTURE  3-18  sh. 

An  advanced  course  in  which  students  are  expected  to  work  on  more  complex 
problems  of  sculpture.  A  student  may  explore  one  or  several  sculpture  or  modeling 
media. 

AR   553  GRADUATE  STUDIO  IN  CRAFTS  3-18  s  h. 

Specialized  study  and  experiences  are  related  to  design  and  execution  of 
problems  relating  to  wood  as  a  crafts  material.  Opportunity  is  presented  to  more 
intensive  exploration  of  materials  and  processes  of  this  craft  employing  both  hand 
and  power  tools. 

AR  561  GRADUATE  STUDIO  IN  DRAWING  3-18  sh 

Drawing  as  a  language  and  continued  development  of  skill  in  communication 
and  expression  in  all  kinds  of  materials  and  media  Drawing  as  an  intimate  work  of 
the  artist  will  be  stressed. 

AR  562  GRADUATE  STUDIO  IN  OIL  PAINTING  3-18  sh. 

Traditional  and  contemporary  methods  and  techniques  in  area  of  plastic 
painting  media.  Composition,  in  relation  to  the  modern  painters'  problems 
Opportunity  is  presented  for  exploration  and  specialization  in  depth  as  well  as 
breadth. 

AR   565  GRADUATE  STUDIO  IN  WATERCOLOR  PAINTING  3-18  s  h 

Painting  in  transparent  watercolor,  gouache,  mixed  media  and  with  new  water 

soluble  paints,  such  as  casein  and  acrylic  polymer  tempera  Traditional,  current 

and  experimental  approaches  with  emphasis  on  design  and  emotional  content 

AR  568  GRADUATE  STUDIO  IN  PRINTIVlAKING  3-18  sh 

Prerequisite  —  AR  217  or  its  equivalent.  Modes,  media,  material,  techniques 
and  processes  of  graphic  arts  and  their  use  in  expression.  The  student  may 
concentrate  on  intensive  exploration  of  one  media  in  depth  or  explore  a  number  of 
media  for  breadth  of  experience. 

Studio  courses  may  be  taken  for  a  total  of  18  semester  hours  in  one  studio.  No 
more  than  6  semester  hours  in  one  studio  may  be  taken  during  any  one  semester. 


BIOLOGY 


Requirements  for  Admission  —  To  be  admitted  to  the  biology 
department,  the  applicant  must  have  completed  the 
requirements  for  a  Bachelor's  degree  from  an  accredited 
college  or  university  which  should  include  a  major  in  biology, 
one  year  in  inorganic  chemistry,  one  semester  of  organic  and 
one  semester  of  biochemistry,  one  year  of  physics,  and 
mathematics  through  one  semester  calculus  or  statistics. 
Applicants  with  undergraduate  deficiencies  may  be  required  to 
register  for  appropriate  courses. 

The  Requirements  for  Candidacy  for  an  M.Ed,  degree  are  — 

The  satisfactory  completion  of  15  semester  hours  of  graduate 
work,  with  at  least  8  hours  in  the  biological  sciences.  For  those 
students  electing  the  thesis  option,  requirements  are  the  same 
as  those  for  M.S.  students  beginning  with  the  second  paragraph 
below.  For  those  students  electing  the  non-thesis  option, 
requirements  are  the  same  as  those  for  M.S.  students  beginning 
with  the  third  paragraph  below. 

The  Requirements  for  Candidacy  for  an  M.S.  degree  are  — 

The  satisfactory  completion  of  15  semester  hours  of  graduate 
work,  with  at  least  8  hours  in  core  courses. 

The  selection  of  an  advisor  and  a  committee  of  at  least  two 
additional  faculty  members  to  guide  the  candidate  in 
completing  a  tentative  program  and  selecting  a  thesis  problem. 

An  official  application  for  admission  to  candidacy,  including 
the  tentative  program  which  has  been  approved  by  the  advisor, 
must  be  submitted  to  the  Biology  Department  graduate 
committee. 

Candidates  for  all  degrees  are  expected  to  maintain  an 
average  of  not  lower  than  B.  Continuance  in  the  graduate 


program  for  those  receiving  two  course  grades  below  the 
minimum  Is  contingent  upon  favorable  review  of  the  graduate 
committee. 

CURRICULUM  FOR  THE  MASTER  OF 
EDUCATION  DEGREE  IN  BIOLOGY 

Students  working  for  this  degree  have  two  options,  a  non- 
thesis  program  with  a  33  credit  hour  requirement  and  a  thesis 
program  with  a  30  credit  hour  requirement.  The  only  way  in 
which  these  programs  differ  is  in  the  credit  hour  requirement 
noted  above  and  that  the  thesis  is  required  for  the  30  credit  hour 
degree.  Students  working  in  either  of  these  programs  will 
complete  the  appropriate  number  of  hours  in  accordance  with 
the  following  requirements: 

I.  Professional  Development  area  (9  semester  hours) 

A.  Humanistic  Studies  —  3  semester  hours  to  be  selected 
from  FE  511-514. 

B.  Behavioral  Studies  —  3  semester  hours  to  be  selected 
from  EP  504,  573,  576,  578,  580,  CE  539,  and  SE  531. 

C.  Research  —  3  semester  hours  —  GR  515  required  of  all 
students  (both  options). 

II.  Specialization  Core  (6  semester  hours) 

Six  semester  hours  to  be  selected  from  Bl  568,  FE  515  and 
LR  500.  Biology  Practicum  (Bl  568)  is  strongly  recom- 
mended. 

III.  Subject  Matter  Concentration  (15-18  semester  hours) 
Fifteen  semester  hours  (for  thesis  program  students)  or  18 
semester  hours  (for  non-thesis  program  students)  to  be 
selected  from  Bl  522  through  Bl  612,  Ml  500,  GD550,  GS570 
and  CH  651. 


Program  Curricula  —  33 
Art  and  Art  Education 
Biology 

CURRICULUM  FOR  THE  MASTER  OF  SCIENCE 
DEGREE  IN  BIOLOGY 

Students  working  for  this  degree  will  complete  30  semester 
hours  of  work  in  accordance  with  the  following  divisions: 

I.  Core  Courses  —  18-20  semester  hours.  Bl  530  (Instrumenta- 
tion), Bl  600  (Methods  of  Research  in  Biology),  Bl  612 
(Seminar)  and  GD  550  (2-4  credits  in  thesis)  are  required 
courses.  The  remaining  10  hours  of  core  credits  come  from 
one  morphology-taxonomy  course  (chosen  from  Bl  536, 
540,  546,  551 ,  553,  554,  557,  559  or  560,  575,  576,  or  578),  and 
one  physiology  course  (chosen  from  Bl  558,  561 ,  562,  563  or 
581),  and  one  ecology  course  (chosen  from  Bl  548,  556  or 
586). 
II.  ElectiveCourses  — 10-1 2  semester  hours  to  be  selected  with 
the  approval  of  the  advisor  from  Bl  522  through  Bl  586  (with 
the  exception  of  Bl  568)  or  from  related  science  and  mathe- 
matics courses. 

III.  Resident  Requirements  for  the  M.S.  —  The  candidate  must 
be  in  residence  for  at  least  seven  consecutive  months  of  full- 
time  work  or  the  equivalent  as  determined  by  the  candidate's 
advisory  committee. 

IV.  Research  Requirements  for  the  M.S.  —  Every  candidate 
must  schedule  Methods  of  Research  in  Biology  (Bl  600)  as 
part  of  his  research  requirement.  This  should  be  done  early 
in  his  program. 

Every  candidate  must  present  a  research  thesis  on  an 
original  topic  approved  by  the  candidate's  advisory  commit- 
tee. This  is  programmed  as  GD  550  (thesis)  for  2  to 4  credits. 
V.  Requirements  for  Completion  of  the  M.S. 

1.  a.  All  students  in  the  M.S.  program  in  the  Biology  Depart- 


34  —  Indiana  University  of  Pennsylvania 


ment  must  pass  a  comprehensive  examination  adminis- 
tered by  the  department  graduate  committee.  The 
purpose  of  this  examination  is  to  assure  that  all  of  our 
graduates  have  a  well  proportioned  knowledge  of  the 
field  of  Biology.  The  examination  will  also  help  point 
out  the  student's  major  areas  of  inadequate  knowledge 
or  training. 

b.  This  examination  is  offered  at  a  specified  time  twice 
each  year  (toward  the  middle  of  each  semester.  The 
student  may  signify  his  intentions  of  taking  the  exami- 
nation by  informing  the  graduate  committee. 

c.  The  student  should  plan  to  take  the  entire  exam  in  the 
second  semester  of  full-time  course  work  (or  the 
equivalent).  A  second  attempt,  if  necessary,  should 
come  in  the  student's  third  full-time  semester.  A  third 
and  final  attempt  is  permitted  only  after  petition  to,  and 
approval  of  the  Graduate  Committee. 

d.  This  will  be  the  only  comprehensive  examination  for 
the  Master  of  Science  degree. 

2.  After  the  thesis  has  been  accepted  in  its  final  written  form 
by  the  candidate's  committee  and  the  Graduate  School, 
the  candidate  is  expected  to  present  a  public  seminar 
reporting  the  results  of  his  research. 

COURSE  DESCRIPTIONS 

In  many  courses  in  the  Biology  Department,  additional 
laboratory  time  may  be  required  beyond  the  regularly 
scheduled  periods. 

Bl     522  BIOMETRY  3  s  h 

The  kinds  and  treatment  of  biological  data  and  application  of  mathematical 

principles  in  treatment  of  these  data,  rather  than  a  theoretical  development  of 

mathematical  concepts.  Data  will  be  analyzed  from  representative  measuring 


instruments,  eg  spectrophotometry,  manometry,  linear  measurement,  etc. 

Bl     526  MOLECULAR  GENETICS  3  s  h 

Study  of  chemical  structure  of  the  gene  in  relation  to  its  molecular  function  in 
control  of  specific  protein  biosynthesis  Emphasis  will  be  placed  on  genetic 
systems  of  bacteria,  fungi,  and  viruses  Prerequisites:  genetics,  organic  chemistry 
and  biochemistry  or  permission  of  instructor 

Bl     530  INSTRUMENTATION  3  s.h. 

An  introduction  to  instrumental  technique  designed  to  aid  in  development  of 
skills  employed  in  biological  research. 

Bl     536  COMPARATIVE  PLANT  MORPHOLOGY  3  s.h. 

Procedures,  general  principles  and  objectives  of  comparative  plant 
morphology  Emphasis  on  relationships  between  morphology,  taxonomy  and 
experimental  morphogenesis  in  vascular  plants 

Bl     540  PROTOZOOLOGY  3  s,h. 

Common  and  representative  genera  of  all  groups  of  free-living  protozoa. 
Emphasis  is  placed  upon  structure,  physiology,  ecology  and  life  histories  of  these 
organisms.  An  independent  research  project  is  required. 

Bl     545  MICROTECHNIOUE  3  s  h. 

Procedures  involved  in  production  of  microscope  slides.  Techniques  of 
preparing  whole  mounts,  microtome  sections  and  serial  sections  of  both  plant  and 
animal  materials. 

Bl     546  DENDROLOGY  3  s.h. 

Study  of  the  woody  plants  as  to  their  identification,  distribution,  ecology, 
culture,  anatomy,  physiology,  mensuration  and  utilization 

Bl     548  PLANT  ECOLOGY  3  s.h. 

Nature  and  distribution  of  vegetation  in  relation  to  environmental  factors.  Field 
investigations  of  local  plant  communities  constitute  bulk  of  lab  work  Prerequisite: 
field  botany,  plant  taxonomy  or  general  knowledge  of  local  flora. 

Bl     551  TAXONOMY  OF  PLANTS  3  s.h. 

Includes  collection,  identification,  and  classification  of  vascular  plant  species 
with  special  emphasis  on  family  characteristics  and  phylogeny.  Prerequisite:  Plant 
Biology. 

Bl     553  PRINCIPLES  OF  ANIMAL  TAXONOMY  3  s.h. 

Study  of  classification  system  and  its  application  to  identification  of  animals. 

Basic   principles  of  taxonomy   rules  of   nomenclature,   a  synoptic  history  of 


Program  Curricula  —  35 
Biology 


classitication  and  the  "old"  and  "new"  taxonomy  will  be  included   A  taxonomic 
field  study  is  required 

Bl     554  ADVANCED  ORNITHOLOGY  3  s  h 

A  detailed  study  of  bird  populations,  behavior,  and  movement  including  the 
annual  cycle   Prerequisites:  identification  by  site  and  song  of  local  birds 

Bl     556  ANIMAL  ECOLOGY  3  s.h 

Effect  of  environmental  factors  on  animals,  animals  as  members  of 
communities,  their  trophic  relationships,  their  ecologic  distribution,  population 
dynamics,  and  aspects  of  animal  behavior  A  field  or  lab  problem  is  required. 

Bl     557  ANII^AL  MORPHOGENESIS  3  s.h 

Factors  that  influence  and  control  the  differentiation  of  organs,  tissues,  and 
cells  Emphasis  is  placed  on  experimental  procedures  and  methods  Prerequisites: 
Embryology  of  Comparative  Anatomy.  Organic  Chemistry  or  Biochemistry,  and 
Genetics 

Bl     558  ENDOCRINOLOGY  4  s.h. 

Phylogeny.  embryology,  micro-anatomy,  and  physiology  of  the  endocrine 
tissues   Prerequisites:  course  in  anatomy  and  physiology. 

Bl     559  ADVANCED  ENTOMOLOGY  3  s.h. 

Insect  morphology,  including  external  and  internal  organization  of  different 
species  of  insects  Comparisons  and  contrasts  among  species  will  be  included  as 
well  as  the  relationships  of  social  insects  and  their  adaptations  Prerequisite: 
Introductory  Entomology 

Bl     560  HERPETOLOGY  3  S.h. 

A  comprehensive  survey  of  the  classes  Amphibia  and  Reptilia,  including  their 
classification,  structure,  origin,  evolution,  phylogenetic  relationships, 
distribution,  and  natural  history  Special  emphasis  is  placed  on  the  herpetofauna 
of  Pennsylvania 

Bl     561  GENERAL  PHYSIOLOGY  4  s  h 

A  molecular  approach  to  quantitative  analysis  of  the  mechanisms  of  functional 
operation  and  coordination  in  living  organisms  Emphasis  is  directed  toward  the 
chemical  and  physical  principles  operating  at  the  primary  functional  units  of 
organization  Prerequisites:  course  in  Physiology.  Biochemistry.  Calculus  (Two 
hours  lecture  and  four  hours  lab  ) 

Bl     562  ANIMAL  PHYSIOLOGY  4  s  h 

The  events  of  digestion,  molecular  transport  of  nutrients  and  wastes,  gaseous 
exchange,  excretion,  muscular  movement  and  control  by  endocrines  and  nervous 
tissue.  Prerequisites:  Animal  Biology 


Bl     563  PHYSIOLOGY  OF  PLANTS  4  s  h. 

A  comprehensive  study  of  physiological  bases  tor  organization  and  function  of 
living  plants  Current  literature  is  emphasized  Lab  exercises  are  designed  to  be 
complementary  to  lecture  material  and  to  be  of  practical  value  Prerequisite: 
Biochemistry  Closed  to  students  with  undergraduate  Plant  Physiology.  Bl  351. 

Bl     568  BIOLOGY  PRACTICUM  2  s.h. 

Designed  for  high  school  biology  teacher  Preparation  of  culture  media  and 
solutions,  problems  and  techniques  in  dealing  with  demonstration  material, 
handling  and  housing  of  plants  and  animals,  safety  in  the  lab  and  field,  and 
maintenance  of  equipment  Emphasis  on  development  of  on-going  experiments 
and  research  projects  Handbooks  and  other  resource  materials  useful  in  the  "lab 
approach"  to  biology  will  be  given  special  attention. 

Bl     572  RADIATION  BIOLOGY  3  s  h. 

Basic  aspects  of  nuclear  physics,  phenomena  of  radioactive  isotopes  and 
biological  effects  of  such  isotopes.  Lab  work  utilizes  instruments  (or  detection  and 
measurement  of  radioactive  nuclides  used  in  biological  experimentation. 
Prerequisites  two  years  Biology,  one  year  Physics,  and  General.  Organic  and 
Biochemistry 

Bl     575  MAMMALOGY  3  s  h. 

A  general  discussion  of  mammals  emphasizing  systematics.  distribution,  and 
structural  and  functional  modifications  related  to  evolution  of  this  group  Lab  work 
samples  numerous  techniques  that  can  be  applied  to  mammalian  biology  A  paper 
is  required. 

Bl     576  PARASITOLOGY  3  s  h. 

The  parasitic  protozoa,  (latworms  and  roundworms.  Major  emphasis  upon 
species  infesting  man  and  includes  their  structure,  physiology,  ecology,  life  cycles 
and  pathogenicity  Lab  includes  some  dissection  of  vertebrate  hosts  and  recovery 
of  their  parasites  Anthropods  involved  in  parasite  transmission  are  also  included. 
Prerequisites:  one  year  Biology.  Vertebrate  and  Invertebrate  Zoology 

Bl     578  MYCOLOGY  3  s  h. 

The  systematics.  morphology,  and  physiology  of  fungi,  with  emphasis  on 
economically  important  and  experimentally  useful  Myxomycophyta  and 
Eumycophta  Lab  includes  physiology  and  genetics  of  fungi  and  collecting, 
culturing  and  identifying  of  representative  species  Not  open  to  students  with 
undergraduate  Bl  381.  Mycology 

Bl     581  MICROBIAL  PHYSIOLOGY  4  s  h. 

Physiological    reactions    involved    in   growth,    reproduction   and   death   of 

microbes.  Metabolism  of  carbohydrates,  proteins,  vitamins  and  fats,  enzymes. 


36  —  Indiana  University  ol  Pennsylvania 


oxidation-reduction  potentials,  energy  relationships,  membrane  potentials  and 
required  nutrients   Prerequisites:  Microbiology  and  Biochemistry. 

Bl     582  PATHOGENIC  MICROBIOLOGY  3  s.h 

Study  of  disease  caused  by  microorganisms  with  emphasis  on  human 
pathogens.  Both  epidemiology  and  aspects  of  host-parasite  relationships  Lab 
stresses  methods  of  isolation  and  identification  of  pathogens  Prerequisite: 
Microbiology. 

Bl     583  IMMUNOLOGY  3  s  h. 

Physical  and  chemical  properties  of  antigens  and  antibodies;  nature  of 
antigen-antibody  interactions;  mechanism  of  antibody  formation;  and  immune 
reaction  in  disease.  The  lab  employs  serological  techniques.  Prerequisites: 
Biochemistry  and  Microbiology. 

Bl     586  TAXONOMY  AND  ECOLOGY  OF  BACTERIA  3  s.h. 

Isolation,  cultivation,  classification  and  ecology  of  major  groups  of  bacteria. 
Special  emphasis  to  principles  of  bacterial  taxonomy  and  ecology  Prerequisite: 
Microbiology. 

Bl     599  SPECIAL  STUDIES  1-3  s.h. 

Consists  of  independent  research  studies  under  guidance  of  an  instructor. 
Maximum  credit  in  any  one  area  is  six  (6)  semester  hours  Time  and  class  hours  will 
be  arranged  by  instructor  involved.  Prerequisite:  Permission  of  instructor 

Bl     600  METHODS  OF  RESEARCH  IN  BIOLOGY  2  s.h 

The  student  will  select  and  plan  a  research  project  or  thesis  problem  in 
biological  area;  will  develop  familiarity  with  general  biological  literature:  will 
conduct  a  literature  search  on  his  selected  topic;  will  write  a  thesis  or  project 
proposal  following  Graduate  School  guidelines  and  the  AIBS  style  manual;  and 
will  give  an  oral  presentation  of  the  proposal 

Bl     612  BIOLOGY  SEMINAR  1  S  h 

An  opportunity  to  become  acquainted  with  various  areas  of  current  research  in 
biology.  One  hour  meeting  per  week. 

Ml    500  PROBLEMS  IN  MARINE  SCIENCE  3  s.h. 

Independent  study  for  the  advanced  student  in  marine  sciences  Topics  are 
selected  from  areas  offered  by  the  Marine  Consortium  and  studies  are  directed  by 
the  instructor  in  that  area.  Prerequisite;  Consent  of  Instructor. 

GD  550  THESIS 

See  entry  under  "GENERAL  SERVICE  COURSES",  page  25. 


BUSINESS 


The  School  of  Business  offers  programs  leading  to  the 
degrees  of  (1 )  Master  of  Education  in  Business  and  (2)  Master  of 
Science  in  Business.  The  Master  of  Education  program  is 
designed  primarily  to  permit  the  business  teacher  to  broaden 
his  understanding  of  the  business  world  and  to  study  his 
teaching  procedures  in  the  light  of  new  experience.  The  Master 
of  Science  program  is  designed  primarily  for  businessmen, 
industrial  personnel,  and  government  employees  who  are 
interested  in  continuing  their  academic  study  in  business. 

Upon  admission  to  the  Graduate  School,  each  student  is 
tentatively  assigned  an  advisor.  The  advisor  assists  the  student 
in  scheduling  his  program  of  studies.  If  thetentative  assignment 
Is  mutually  agreeable  to  the  student  and  the  advisor,  the 
arrangement  is  continued. 

Prior  to  his  admission  to  candidacy  for  the  degree  of  Master 
of  Education  in  Business  or  Master  of  Science  in  Business,  the 
student  must  take  the  Graduate  Record  Examination  aptitude 
test.  Information  about  this  examination  can  be  obtained  from 
the  Graduate  School. 

Business  teachers  with  the  proper  prerequisites  can  earn,  at 
the  graduate  level,  certificates  in  Marketing,  Data  Processing, 
and  Distributive  Education.  They  may  also  earn  an  endorsement 
of  their  present  vocational  certificate  which  qualifies  them  to  be 
a  Cooperative  Education  Teacher. 

Distributive  Education  teachers  seeking  to  broaden  their 
background  in  marketing,  merchandising,  and  management 
may  pursue  the  Master  of  Education  Degree  emphasizing  these 
areas.  Individuals  without  an  undergraduate  degree  in  business 
may  pursue  graduate  work  leading  to  certification  as 
Distributive  Education  teachers. 


CURRICULUM  FOR  MASTER  OF  EDUCATION 
DEGREE  IN  BUSINESS 

The  thirty  hours  required  for  the  degree  must  be  distributed 
as  follows: 

I.  Professional  Development  Area  (9  s.h.) 

A.  Humanistic  Studies  (3  s.h.)  —  One  of  the  following: 
FE  511,  FE  512,  FE  513,  or  FE  514 

B.  Behavioral  Studies  (3  s.h.)  —  One  of  the  following: 

FP  504,  EP  573,  EP  576,  EP  578,  EP  580,  CE  539,  or  SE  531 

C.  Research  (3  s.h.) 

GR  515,  Elements  of  Research 

II.  Specialized  Core  (6  s.h.) 

BU  550  (3  s.h.)  and  3  s.h.  from  the  following:  BU  560*  or 
BU  561* 
*Students  seeking  certification  in  Distributive  Education  may 
substitute  BU  555  or  BU  556. 

III.  Subject  Area  and/or  Thesis  (15  s.h.) 

BU  510  (3  s.h.)  and  12  s.h.  from  the  "Business"  courses  list  in 
the  catalog  or  BU  510  (3  s.h.),  GR  550,  and  9  s.h.  from  the 
"Business"  courses  list  in  the  catalog. 

Courses  in  the  Specialized  Core  Area  and  Subject  Area  should 

be  scheduled  early  in  the  student's  program. 

CURRICULUM  FOR  MASTER  OF  SCIENCE 
DEGREE  IN  BUSINESS 

Students  must  complete  30  s.h.  for  the  degree  distributed  as 
follows: 
I.  Business  Concentration  Area  (18-21*  s.h.) 
BU  510  (required  of  all  students,  BU  501-507,  512.  514, 


Program  Curricula  —  37 
Biology 
Bustness 

520-525,  527,  531-539,  541-545,  570,  580-582.  Courses  in 
this  area  should  be  scheduled  early  in  the  student's  program. 

II.  Business  Related  Area  (3  s.h.) 

CE  546,  EC  501 ,  520,  525,  530,  541 ,  545, 550, 580,  GE  542, 552, 
HE  530,  560,  561,  MA  575,  PC  514,  and  558.  Other  business 
related  courses  may  be  taken  subject  to  the  approval  of  the 
advisor  and  the  director  of  graduate  studies. 

III.  Research  Area  (6-9  s.h.) 

GD  516,  BU  585  (Seminar  in  Methodology  of  Business 
Research),  and  GR  550  (Thesis)**. 

*21  hours  are  required  of  students  selecting  a  non-thesis  option. 
**Optional. 

COURSE  DESCRIPTIONS 

BU  500  ACCOUNTING  SYSTEMS  3  3  h 

Accounting  principles  applied  to  constructing  accounting  systems  Special 
attention  given  to  problems  of  management  as  they  relate  to  accounting  systems 
by  developing  a  system  to  give  management  the  Information  desired  lor  effective 
operation  of  business. 

BU  501  PRINCIPLES  OF  TAX  ACCOUNTING  3sh 

Introduction  to  federal  tax  laws  which  develops  an  understanding  and  working 
knowledge  of  federal  tax  laws  and  regulations  applicable  to  Individuals,  single 
proprietorships,  and  partnerships 

BU  502  ADVANCED  TAX  ACCOUNTING  3  s.h. 

Develops  further  knowledge  of  federal  Income  tax  law  with  emphasis  upon 
corporate  returns,  estates  and  trusts,  federal  estate  tax  and  gift  tax.  Prerequisite: 
BU  501  or  equivalent 

BU  503  FINANCIAL  STATEMENT  ANALYSIS  3  s.h. 

Detailed  analysis  and  interpretation  of  financial  statements  with  advanced 
problems  supporting  theory  presented  Particular  types  of  statements  as  tiiey 
apply  to  public  utilities.  Industrials,  and  moneyed  corporations  are  Introduced. 
Prerequisite:  Bu  352.  Corporate  Accounting,  or  equivalent  (9  semester  hours). 


38  —  Indiana  University  of  Pennsylvania 


BU  504  BUDGETING  AND  COST  ANALYSIS  3  s  h 

Theory,  preparation,  and  use  of  budgets,  analysis  of  cost  variances,  direct 
costing,  and  extensive  analysis  of  various  cost-control  and  profit-planning 
programs   Prerequisite:  BU  353,  Cost  Accounting,  or  equivalent. 

BU  505  ADVANCED  ACCOUNTING  3  s.h. 

Study  of  accounting  problems  of  specialized  nature,  including  the  application 
of  funds  statement,  consignments,  installment  sales,  receivership  accounts, 
agency  and  branch  accounting,  and  corporate  combinations.  Prerequisite:  BU 
352,  Corporate  Accounting,  or  equivalent  (9  semester  hours). 

BU  506  AUDITING  3  s.h. 

Study  of  auditing  theory  and  practical  application  of  auditing  standards  and 
procedures  to  the  verification  of  accounts  and  financial  statements,  working 
papers,  and  audit  reports   Prerequisite:  BU  353,  Cost  Accounting 

BU  507  MANAGEMENT  ACCOUNTING  3  s.h. 

Designed  for  management  personnel  who  are  not  accountants  but  need  to 
understand  and  use  accounting  information  in  their  decision-making  process. 
Emphasizes  management  of  accounting  information  that  requires  the  application 
of  full  cost  data,  differential  costs  and  revenues,  and  responsibility  accounting 
data.  (Available  to  students  with  less  than  nine  hours  of  accounting.) 

BU  510  BUSINESS  COMMUNICATIONS  AND 

REPORT  WRITING  3  s.h. 

Study  and  comparison  of  effective  written  communications   Emphasis  on 

positive  approach,  clear  statements,  good  form  and  structure  Organization  and 

preparation  of  reports  used  in  education,  business,  and  government  Techniques 

of  collecting,  interpreting,  and  presenting  information  useful  to  executives. 

BU  512  OFFICE  ORGANIZATION  AND  MANAGEMENT  3  S  h. 

Duties  and  responsibilities  of  office  manager:  principles  of  practical  office 
management  and  their  application  Includes  survey  and  analysis  development  of 
manuals  and  their  use;  selection,  training,  pay  and  promotion  of  office  employees: 
controlling  expense  and  measuring  office  efficiency;  quality  and  quantity 
standards;  purchase  and  use  of  equipment;  and  report  writing. 

BU  514  EXECUTIVE  SECRETARIAL  TRAINING  3  s.h. 

Stresses  application  of  secretarial  skills  and  knowledges  and  importance  of 
good  human  relations  in  offices.  Develops  methods  of  complimenting  secretarial 
training  so  that  high  school  graduates  may  become  competent,  proficient,  and 
well-adjusted  secretaries. 


BU  520  RETAIL  ORGANIZATION  AND  MANAGEMENT  3  s.h. 

Directed  toward  problems  of  retail  management.  Includes  present-day  trends 
in  retailing,  personnel  management,  merchandise  control,  pricing,  promotion, 
services,  accounting,  and  expense  control 

BU  521  MARKETING  3  s.h. 

Study  of  risks,  costs,  and  methods  of  distribution  including  analysis  of  such 
problems  as  research,  competition,  pricing,  and  laws  in  marketing  goods  from 
manufacturer  to  producer  to  consumer. 

BU  522  SALES  PROMOTION  AND  ADVERTISING  3  s.h. 

Basic  principles  of  sales  promotion  and  advertising  together  with 
consideration  of  the  major  problems  encountered  in  management  of  activities. 
Emphasizes  determination  of  basic  promotional  strategy;  selection  of  advertising 
media;  determining  advertising  appropriations;  and  advertising  research. 

BU  523  MARKETING  RESEARCH  3  s.h. 

Research  procedures  and  techniques  applicable  to  problem  solving  in 
marketing  field  Critical  analysis  of  research  techniques  with  considerable 
emphasis  placed  on  use  of  information  gathered.  Prerequisite:  Marketing. 

BU  524  INTERNATIONAL  MARKETING  3  S.h. 

International  marketing  is  analyzed,  with  consideration  given  to  the 
significance  of  government  regulation,  organization  structures  of  export  and 
import  enterprises,  and  credit  policies  Prerequisites:  Marketing  and  Consumer 
Behavior 

BU  525  THE  PROCESSES  OF  COLLECTIVE  BARGAINING  3  s.h. 

Survey  of  labor  movement  history  in  United  States,  current  laws,  principles 
and  procedures  in  use  in  modern  collective  bargaining  and  evolving  trends  in 
union-management  relations  in  all  segments  of  United  States  economy  including 
blue  and  white  collar,  private  and  public  sector. 

BU  527  INDUSTRIAL  MARKETING  3  S.h. 

Considers  major  activities  involved  in  marketing  of  industrial  goods  and 
services  Includes  industrial  marketing  system,  demand  for  industrial  goods, 
marketing  information  needs  of  industrial  firm,  product  strategies  for  industrial 
goods,  channel  strategies  for  industrial  goods,  pricing  strategies  for  industrial 
goods,  promotional  strategies  for  industrial  goods,  and  industrial  marketing 
implementation  and  control.  Prerequisite:  Marketing  and  Marketing  Management. 

BU  531  PRINCIPLES  OF  INVESTMENT  IN  SECURITIES  3  S.h. 

Introduces  many  forms  of  investment  possibilities  which  exist.  Attention  is 


Program  Curricula  ■ 
Business 


given  to  operation  of  stock  markets,  concepts  and  terminology  ot  investing, 
mutual  funds  and  ttieir  function,  investment  clubs  and  problems  involved  in 
making  investments  througfi  brokers,  bankers,  and  stock  promoters 

BU  532  CURRENT  BUSINESS  ECONOIVlIC  PROBLEMS  3  s  h 

Provides  opportunity  lor  students  to  gain  insights  into  relationship  of  business 
to  many  facets  of  society,  impact  of  major  societal  groups  upon  business,  and 
nature  of  obstacles  that  businessmen  face  in  day-to-day  operations  Review  and 
analysis  of  basic  economic  concepts  and  principles  will  serve  as  a  basis  for  study 
of  selected  economic  problems  of  current  interest  and  concern  to  business  and 
society. 

BU  533  CASE  PROBLEMS  IN  BUSINESS  LAW  3  s.h 

Deals  with  solution  of  case  problems  as  applied  to  various  topics  in  the  field  of 
business  law   Prerequisite   BU  235.  Business  Law  I.  or  equivalent 

BU  534  CONSUMER  ECONOMIC  PROBLEMS  3sh 

Program  for  the  education  of  intelligent  consumers  in  how  to  gain  the 
maximum  satisfaction  from  goods  and  services  An  effort  will  be  made  to  develop 
an  appreciation  of  the  problems  of  the  producer  and  distributor  as  well  as  those  of 
the  consumer 

BU  535  MANAGEMENT  INFORMATION  SYSTEMS  3  s.h. 

Introduces  techniques  involved  in  organizing  computer  based  management 
mformation  systems  and  the  concepts  of  systems  analysis  and  design  including 
problem  definition,  data  gathering,  information  analysis,  presentation  techniques, 
implementation  planning,  systems  control,  and  documentation  is  presented 
Relationship  between  these  techniques  and  the  management  of  modern  business 
organization  is  stressed  Exercises  and  case  studies  used  to  develop  student's 
ability  to  use  the  various  systems  methods  presented  in  solving  informational 
problems  of  modern  business 

BU  536  BUSINESS  DATA  PROCESSING  I  3  s.h 

Covers  the  theory  and  operation  of  remote  computer  terminals  The  BASIC 
language  is  used  to  write  computer  programs  for  Business  Mathematics  and 
Bookkeeping  problems  for  the  Business  Education  and  Distributive  Education 
teacher.  Interactive  programs  utilizing  the  computer  will  be  used  for  this  training  - 

BU  537  BUSINESS  DATA  PROCESSING  II  3  s  h. 

Develop  the  principles  of  COBOL  language  programming  with  specific 
applications  for  the  teachers  of  Business  and  Distributive  Education  The  course 
builds  upon  the  basic  concepts  of  data  processing  developed  in  BU  536  Special 
emphasis  placed  on  computer-based  instruction  and  programmed  instruction  as 


used   with   the   remote  terminals.   The  value  of  library  programs  will  be 
demonstrated.  Prerequisite:  BU  536  or  its  equivalent. 

BU  538  BUSINESS  SYSTEMS  ANALYSIS  I  3  s.h. 

Study  of  the  techniques  used  in  systems  analysis  involving  systems  definition, 
feasibility,  quantitative,  and  evaluative  techniques  of  business  Prerequisite: 
Business  Data  Processing.  Business  Information  Systems.  Business  Systems 
Technology.  Business  Problem  Application  I.  and  Assembly  Language 
Programming 

BU  539  BUSINESS  SYSTEMS  ANALYSIS  II  3sh 

Study  of  business  sub-systems,  such  as  production,  inventory,  and  marketing 
with  the  requirement  of  a  documented  study  of  a  sub-system  of  an  outside 
business.  Prerequisite:  Business  Problem  Programming.  Business  Problem 
Application  II.  and  Business  Systems  Analysis  I 

BU  540  INTERNSHIP  IN  OFFICE  AND  DISTRIBUTIVE 

OCCUPATIONS  4  s.h. 

Students  who  do  not  have  extensive  business  experience  are  given  the 
opportunity  to  work  full-time  for  six  weeks  during  the  summer  in  a  business 
position  under  University  supervision  Evening  seminars  are  held  weekly  to 
discuss  problems  related  to  work  experience  program  A  written  report  of  the 
experience  will  be  required 

BU  541  PRINCIPLES  OF  MANAGEMENT  3  S.h. 

Study  of  development,   nature,  and   meaning  of  basic  functions  of 

management    Emphasis   will   be   placed   upon   functional   activities  of  an 

organization  at  all  levels  of  management  and  the  application  of  these  principles 

BU  542  HUMAN  RELATIONS  IN  BUSINESS  3  s.h. 

Study  of  human  motivations  and  their  constructive  application  to  all  aspects  of 
business.  Psychological  basis  of  human  relations  will  be  developed  as  it  applies  in 
the  business  world.  Major  topics  include  employer-employee  relations,  labor 
relations,  stockholder  relations,  customer  relations,  community  relations,  and 
public  relations 

BU  543  MANAGEMENT  DEVELOPMENT  AND  TRAINING  3sh 

A  survey  of  the  major  aspects,  trends,  and  methodologies  in  management 
development  and  training  as  these  specializations  are  being  practiced  in 
enterprises  in  the  advanced  western  nations 

BU  544  BUSINESS  PROBLEM  PROGRAMMING  3  S.h. 

The  study  of  business-oriented  high-level  languages  ot  COBOL  and  RPG.  and 


40  —  Indiana  University  of  Pennsylvania 


solving  problems  in  accounting,  marketing,  statistics,  and  finance.  Prerequisite: 
Business  Data  Processing.  Business  Information  Systems.  Business  Systems 
Technology.  Business  Problem  Application  I.  and  Assembly  Language 
Programming. 

BU  545  CASE  PROBLEMS  IN  BUSINESS  HUMAN  RELATIONS  3  s.h. 

Application  of  pnnciples  of  personnel  management  m  solution  of  problems  in 
human  relations  Students  will  be  required  to  solve  realistic  problems  in  human 
relations  found  at  all  echelons  of  management.  Emphasis  will  be  placed  upon 
actual  problems  encountered  in  day-to-day  work  activities.  Prerequisite:  BU  542 
or  Its  equivalent. 

BU  550  PRINCIPLES  AND  PROBLEMS  OF 

BUSINESS  EDUCATION  3  s.h. 

Surveys  basic  principles  and  practices  of  busmess  education.  Among  the 

topics  considered  are:  history  of  the  high  school  business  program,  purposes. 

attitudes  of  management  and  labor  toward  education,  relationship  of  general 

education  to  busmess  education,  and  trends  in  the  field. 

BU  553  ADMINISTRATION  AND  SUPERVISION  OF 

VOCATIONAL  EDUCATION  3  s.h. 

An  introductory  course  in  Administration  and  Supervision  of  Vocational 
Education  Histoncal  background  and  problems  connected  with  budgeting 
procedures  and  practices,  teacher  qualification,  certification,  selection  and 
assignments,  in-service  programs,  rating  and  evaluating  vocational  teachers, 
classroom  and  personnel  supervision,  vocational  teachers  conferences, 
curriculum  construction  and  revision,  selection  and  maintenance  of  equipment. 
establishing  and  using  standards  of  achievement,  guidance  selection,  placement 
and  follow-up  programs  will  be  covered  in  this  course 

BU  554  COOPERATIVE  VOCATIONAL  EDUCATION  3  s.h 

To  develop  administrative  procedures  necessary  for  planning,  organizing,  and 
coordinating  cooperative  vocational  education  programs  Ma|or  topics  include 
historical  background  of  cooperative  vocational  education  programs,  program 
development,  supervision,  public  relations,  the  teacher  coordinator  and  his  job, 
labor  laws  governing  such  a  program,  evaluation  of  the  total  program,  and  desired 
educational  outcomes.  Leads  to  Cooperative  Education  Teacher  certification. 


BU  556  METHODS  OF  TEACHING  COURSES  IN 

DISTRIBUTIVE  EDUCATION  3  S.h. 

Acquaints  students  with  basic  principles  of  group  and  individual  instruction  in 
various  subject  matter  areas,  as  well  as  methods  of  presentation.  Students  prepare 
unit  plans,  lesson  plans,  demonstrations,  and  evaluations. 

BU  560  IMPROVEMENT  OF  INSTRUCTION  IN 

SECRETARIAL  COURSES  3  s.h. 

Provides  business  teachers  with  a  working  philosophy  and  practical  approach 
to  teaching  of  secretarial  subjects  —  shorthand,  typewriting,  transcription,  and 
office  practice  Teaching  procedures  basic  to  development  of  vocational 
proficiency  in  shorthand,  typewriting,  transcnption.  and  office  practice  including: 
content,  methods,  teaching  aids,  available  instructional  materials,  measurement 
of  skills,  and  standards  of  achievement. 

BU  561  IMPROVEMENT  OF  INSTRUCTION  IN  ACCOUNTING 

AND  BASIC  BUSINESS  COURSES  3  s.h. 

Problems  and  techniques  in  teaching  accounting  and  basic  business  courses, 
including  objectives,  place  and  purpose  of  accounting  and  basic  business 
courses,  curricular  organization,  teaching  techniques,  instructional  materials, 
resource  materials,  course  standards,  testing,  and  evaluation.  For  experienced  or 
prospective  high  school,  vocational-technical  school,  and  community  college 
teachers  of  accounting,  general  business,  consumer  economics,  business 
mathematics,  economics,  and  business  principles  and  management. 

BU  570  ECONOMIC  BACKGROUNDS  OF  BUSINESS  3  s.h 

Overview  of  economic  environment  in  which  business  and  other  agencies 
operate  Students  will  gain  a  broad  perspective  of  business  operation  through 
such  topics  as  business  organization  and  management,  consumption  of  goods, 
business  risks,  business  cycle,  budgeting  and  investments.  Not  open  to  business 
majors,  but  is  designed  as  a  general  studies  course  for  other  programs. 

BU  576  SPECIAL  STUDIES  IN  BUSINESS  AND 

DISTRIBUTIVE  EDUCATION  1-6  s.h. 

Special  topics  in  business  and  distributive  education.  Topics  will  be 
announced  well  in  advance  of  registration. 


BU  555  PRINCIPLES  OF  DISTRIBUTIVE  EDUCATION  3  s.h. 

To  acquaint  prospective  teacher-coordinators  with  objectives  of  vocational 
distributive  education,  including  state  plan  and  curnculum.  To  understand 
problems  in  organizing,  administering,  and  supervising  a  complete  cooperative 
program. 


BU  580  FINANCIAL  INSTITUTIONS  AND  MARKETS  3  s.h. 

Review  of  entire  structure  of  financial  institutions,  money,  and  capital  markets 
of  which  the  business  enterprise  is  both  a  supply  and  demand  factor,  and  structure 
and  dynamics  of  interest-rate  movements.  Prerequisite:  Monetary  Economics  and 
Principles  of  Investments. 


BU  581  INVESTMENT  ANALYSIS  3  s.h. 

Integrates  work  of  various  courses  in  finance  areas  and  familianzes  student 
witfi  tools  and  techniques  of  research  in  the  different  areas  of  investments 
Prerequisite:  Corporate  Accounting.  Finance,  and  Principles  of  Investments 

BU  582  SEMINAR  IN  FINANCE  3  s.h 

Covers  topics  in  all  areas  of  finance  by  using  recent  articles,  cases, 
discussions,  speakers,  and  a  financial  simulation  game  Designed  to  bring 
together  all  aspects  of  finance  Prerequisite  Finance.  Principles  of  Investments. 
Finance  II.  and  one  advanced  finance  course 

BU  599  INDEPENDENT  STUDY  1-6  S.h. 

This  course  should  not  be  scheduled  unless  prior  approval  has  been  obtained 
from  the  Graduate  School 


Program  Curricula  —  41 
Business 
Chemistry 

CHEMISTRY 


The  Chemistry  Depailment  offers  three  different  degree 
programs  on  the  masters  level:  the  Master  of  Education  and 
Master  of  Science  degrees  in  chemistry  and  the  Master  of  Arts 
degree  in  Industrial  chemistry. 

The  Master  of  Education  program  is  designed  for  the 
secondary  school  teacher  to  afford  the  teacher  the  opportunity 
to  gain  more  knowledge  of  chemistry  and  keep  abreast  of  a 
rapidly  changing  field.  The  major  emphasis  is  on  subject  matter. 
The  student  may  enroll  on  either  a  full-  or  part-time  basis. 

The  Master  of  Science  degree  is  for  the  chemist  who  intends 
to  pursue  further  graduate  work  leading  to  a  Ph.D.  or  who 
intends  to  work  as  a  professinal  chemist  and  desires  to  become 
more  competent  in  chemistry.  This  degree  is  research  oriented 
and  successful  completion  of  an  experimental  thesis  is 
required.  Also,  two  consecutive  semesters  of  residency  are 
required. 

The  Master  of  Arts  degree  is  designed  to  meet  the  needs  of 
the  chemist  who  is  currently  a  full  time  employee  of  the 
chemical  industry  and  who  wishes  to  strengthen  his  knowledge 
in  those  areas  relevant  to  his  employment.  The  emphasis  here  is 
on  course  work. 

Four  core  courses,  one  in  each  of  the  areas  of  inorganic, 
organic,  analytical,  and  physical  chemistry,  are  required  in  the 
M.S.  and  MA.  programs.*  Beyond  this  point  the  programs 
separate  with  the  M.S.  and  MA.  student  taking  more  specialized 
work  in  chemistry  along  with  an  experimental  research 
problem.  The  M.Ed,  candidate  will  take  broadening  courses 
which  will  make  him  a  more  effective  teacher.  The  industrial 
chemist  will  take  more  specialized  work  in  chemistry  and  will  be 


42  —  Indiana  University  of  Pennsylvania 


encouraged  to  take  courses  outside  the  sciences  if  they  are 
relevant  to  his  particular  area  of  employment. 

General  Admission  Requirements  —  Candidates  for 
admission  to  the  Master's  program  must  have  a  Bachelor's 
degree  from  an  accredited  college  or  university  and  an 
undergraduate  grade  point  average  of  2.5  or  better.  Students 
should  have  completed  one  year  each  of  general  chemistry, 
analytical  chemistry,  organic  chemistry,  physical  chemistry**, 
general  physics,  and  calculus.  Students  wishing  to  specialize  in 
biochemistry  should  also  have  had  an  undergraduate  course  in 
biochemistry.  Students  deficient  in  the  above  areas  of  study 
may  also  be  admitted  provided  these  deficiencies  are  made  up 
concurrently  with  the  student's  graduate  studies. 

The  general  requirements  for  admission  to  candidacy  for  a 
Master's  Degree  are  discussed  on  page  18  of  this  bulletin. 

*An  exception  to  this  is  afforded  the  student  wishing  to  specialize 

in  biochemistry. 
*Only   one   semester   of   physical   chemistry   is   required   for 

education  majors. 


CURRICULUM  FOR  MASTER  OF  ARTS 

IN  INDUSTRIAL  CHEMISTRY 

I.  Industrial  experience  —  Before  the  degree  of  M.A.  in 
Industrial  Chemistry  can  be  granted  the  applicant  must  have 
had  three  years  of  full  time  employment  in  an  approved  area 
of  the  chemical  Industry.  Only  those  years  of  employment 
acquired  after  obtaining  the  bachelor's  degree  may  be 
counted. 

This  industrial  experience  meets  the  university  residency 
requirements. 


II.  Course  requirements  include  14  hours  in  the  following; 
CH  610,  620,  630,  640  and  600.* 

*The  M.A.  candidate  is  not  required  to  attend  all  of  the  day 
time  seminars  but  is  required  to  present  two  seminars  and  is 
expected  to  attend  the  evening  seminars. 

III.  Course  electives  (lOto  16s. h.)  —Any  graduate  level  courses 
selected  from  the  natural  sciences  and  mathematics  with  the 
permission  of  the  candidate's  advisor.  Special  permission 
from  the  Chemistry  Department's  Graduate  Committee  will 
be  required  for  courses  outside  the  sciences. 

IV.  Research  Requirements  (0,  2,  or  4  s.h.) 

A.  Research  not  required  —  a  total  of  30  credits  in  suitable 
courses  being  acceptable. 

B.  No-Committee  Thesis  (2  s.h.)  —  Refer  to  the  Graduate 
School  Catalog  for  the  steps  in  satisfying  the  research 
requirement  by  submitting  a  "Two  Hour,  No-Committee 
Thesis". 

C.  Committee  Thesis  (4  s.h.)  —  If  the  candidate  is  doing 
research  at  his  place  of  employment  and  if  he  has  the 
permission  of  his  supervisors  he  may  present  his  research 
as  a  proposal  and  if  accepted  he  may  write  up  his  research 
when  it  is  complete  and  submit  it  as  a  thesis.  It  is 
expected  that  his  supervisor  will  serve  as  an  ex  officio 
member  of  the  proposal  and  thesis  committees. 

CURRICULUM  FOR  MASTER  OF  EDUCATION 
DEGREE  IN  CHEMISTRY 

Students  working  for  this  degree  with  a  major  in  Chemistry 
will  complete  a  minimum  of  30  semester  hours  of  work  in 


Program  Curricula  —  43 
Chemistry 


accordance  with  the  following  divisions: 
I.  Subject  Area  and/or  Thesis  —  15-18  semester  hours 

A.  Elective  Chemistry  Courses  —  11-18  semester  hours  of 
work  selected  from  CH  500  and  CH  600  level  courses. 

B.  Thesis  —  0-4  semester  hours.  After  consultation  with  his 
advisor  the  student  may  choose 

1.  No  thesis  (if  the  student  chooses  this  option  he  must 
earn  a  minimum  of  18  credits  in  A  above. 

2.  A  no-committee  thesis  —  2  semester  hours. 

3.  A  committee  thesis  —  4  semester  hours. 

II.  Professional  Development  Area  —  9  semester  hours 

A.  Humanistic  Studies  —  3  semester  hours  in  one  course 
selected  from  the  following;  FE  511,  512,  513,  or  514. 

B.  Behavioral  Studies  —  3  semester  hours  in  one  course 
selected  from  the  following:  EP  504,  573,  576,  578,  580, 
CE  539  or  SE  531. 

C.  Research  —  3  semester  hours  required  of  all  students 
GR  515. 

III.  Specialization  Core  —  6  semester  hours  —  CH  505  and  one 
of  the  following  courses:  FE  515,  LR  500,  or  SC  572. 


CURRICULUM  FOR  MASTER  OF  SCIENCE 
DEGREE  IN  CHEMISTRY 

I.  Residence  Requirements  —  The  student  shall  be  in  resi- 
dence a  minimum  of  two  consecutive  semesters  of  full-time 
work.  Students  working  as  graduate  assistants  and/or 
making  up  deficiencies  can  expect  to  be  in  residence  for  at 
least  two  years. 


II.  Course  Requirements  —for  those  specializing  in  analytical, 
inorganic,  organic,  or  physical  chemistry. 

A.  Required  Courses  (15  semester  hours),  including  CH  610, 
620,  630  and  640.  One  additional  course  designated  by 
600  chemistry  numbers  selected  from  one  of  the  four  core 
areas  for  3  hours. 

B.  Electives  (6  semester  hours) 

The  electives  may  be  selected  from  the  areas  of 
chemistry,  physics,  biology,  and  mathematics  by  the 
student  with  the  advice  and  approval  of  his  advisor. 

CH  500,  Special  Studies,  can  provide  a  maximum  of 
three  (3)  semester  hours  toward  the  30  semester  hours 
necessary  for  the  degree. 


III.  Course    Requirement   —   for   those   specializing    in    bio- 
chemistry. 

A.  Required  Courses  (12semesterhours),  including  CH630, 
623,  546  and  Bl  526. 

B.  Electives  (at  least  9  semester  hours),  including  at  least 
one  of  the  following:  Bl  556,  562,  563,  581  or  588  and 
any  graduate  courses  in  the  Natural  Sciences  of  Mathe- 
matics mutually  agreed  upon  by  the  student  and  advisor. 


IV.  Research  and  Thesis  Requirements:  GD  550  for  four  hours. 

A.  The  research  work  must  lead  to  an  acceptable  thesis, 
approved  by  the  student's  advisor  and  supervisory 
committee,  and  defended  in  a  final  oral  examination. 

B.  Seminar  —  2  semester  hours  required  in  CH  600. 

C.  CH  690  for  at  least  three  hours. 


44  —  Indiana  University  of  Pennsylvania 


COURSE  DESCRIPTIONS 


CH  500  SPECIAL  STUDIES  variable  s.h. 

Intensive  survey  of  literature  in  a  particular  area  as  well  as  individual 
instruction  on  recent  advances  in  chemical  instrumentation,  methods  of  research, 
and  specialized  subject  areas.  To  be  arranged  with  instructor 

CH  505  NEW  APPROACHES  TO  TEACHING 

HIGH  SCHOOL  CHEMISTRY  3  S.h 

Chem  Study  and  C.B  A.  approaches  will  be  investigated  Individualization  of 

chemistry  and  application  of  various  teaching  materials  and  techniques  used  in 

individualizing  chemistry.  Environmental  chemistry  and  other  relevant  topics  to 

better  understand  the  chemical  basis  of  our  current  environmental  problems 

CH  533  CHEMICAL  LITERATURE  3  S.h 

Periodicals,  encyclopedias,  handbooks,  abstracting  journals  and  other  books 
dealing  with  various  divisions  of  chemistry  will  be  studied.  Students  are  required  to 
conduct  a  literature  search  on  a  selected  topic  Lecture  —  3  hours. 

CH  576  RADIOCHEMISTRY  3  s.h. 

Basic  aspects  of  nuclear  structure,  phenomena  of  radioactive  isotopes  and 
chemical  effects  of  such  isotopes.  Concurrent  lab  work  utilizing  instruments  for 
detection  and  measurement  of  radioactive  nuclides  used  in  chemical 
experimentation.  Lecture-laboratory  —  3  hours 

CH  600         SEMINAR  1  s  h 

A  study  of  modern  chemical  research  and  research  techniques  Scientific 
communications,  including  the  role  of  the  science  library  in  research  Lecture  —  1 
hour. 

CH  602  CHEMISTRY  IN  MANUFACTURING  PROCESSES  3  S.h. 

A  course  on  the  applications  of  chemistry  to  manufacturing  processes. 
Lecture  and  field  trips.  Lecture  —  3  hours. 

GD  550         THESIS  2  or  4  s  h 

Students  register  for  thesis  course  when  writing  the  thesis  GD  550  should  be 
scheduled  for  the  semester  that  the  student  plans  to  complete  this  work 

CH  599  INDEPENDENT  STUDY  Variable  s.h 

Available  to  students  who  seek  to  deepen  their  knowledge  in  some  specific 
aspect  of  chemistry.  The  student  must  discuss  the  nature  of  the  independent  study 
with  a  faculty  member  having  expertise  in  the  area  prior  to  registration.  Special 
attention  to  development  of  new  ideas  and  new  ways  of  presenting  scientific 
principles.  Prerequisites:  Chemistry  I,  II.  Physics  I,  II. 


INORGANIC 

CH  610  INORGANIC  CHEMISTRY  (core  course)  3sh 

Theoretical  inorganic  chemistry  and,  in  particular,  structure,  periodicity, 
coordination  chemistry,  bonding  and  chemistryof  non-aqueous  solvents.  Lecture 
—  3  hours 

CH  611  COORDINATION  CHEMISTRY  3  S.h. 

Chemistry  of  transition  metals,  their  compounds  and  complex  ions.  Lecture  — 
3  hours 

CH  614  INORGANIC  PREPARATIONS  3  S.h. 

Preparation  of  inorganic  compounds  expressing  different  techniques  of 
synthesis  Designed  for  those  students  who  have  chosen  to  do  inorganic  research 
but  have  never  had  a  prep  course.  One  lecture  per  week  and  six  hours  of  lab 

CH  615  CURRENT  TOPICS  IN  INORGANIC  CHEMISTRY  3  s.h 

Representative  elements,  chemistry  of  rare  earth  elements,  inorganic 
spectroscopy,  group  theory  or  any  other  special  areas  of  chemical  interest. 

ANALYTICAL 

CH  522  ADVANCED  INSTRUMENTAL  METHODS 

OF  ANALYSIS  3  s.h. 

A  survey  of  modern  instrumental  analysis  including  electrical, 
spectrophotometric,  x-ray,  gas  chromatography,  and  other  methods.  (Open  to 
MS  and  MA.  candidates  by  permission  only.) 


CH  620         ANALYTICAL  CHEMISTRY  (core  course) 

theoretical   principles  of  analytical   chemistry.   Lecture 


3sh 
3  hours. 


CH  621  ELECTROANALYTICAL  CHEMISTRY  3  s.h. 

Theoretical  and  practical  considerations  of  polarography,  potentiometric, 
amperometric,  coulometric,  and  conductometric  methods  of  chemical  analysis. 
Lecture  —  2  hours.  One  4-hour  lab  per  week. 

CH  622  SPECTROCHEMICAL  METHODS  OF  ANALYSIS  3  S.h. 

Application  of  the  emission  and  absorption  of  light  in  ultraviolet,  visible  and 
infrared  regions  to  problems  involving  inorganic  and  organic  molecularstructure, 
analysis,  equilibrium  and  reaction  rates  Lecture  —  2  hours.  One  4-hour  lab  per 
week 

CH  623  PHYSICAL  AND  CHEMICAL  METHODS 

OF  SEPARATION  3  S.h. 

Application  of  chromatographic  methods  to  the  quantitative  separation  and 


Program  Curricula  —  45 
Chemistry 


analysis  of  chemical  systems  Topics  will  include  gas.  column,  paper,  and  ion 
exchange  chromatographic  methods  and  other  methods  of  separation  as  time 
permits.  Lecture  —  2  hours.  One  4-hour  lab  per  week 


ORGANIC 

CH  630  ORGANIC  CHEMISTRY  (core  course)  3  s.h. 

Prmciples  of  physical  chemistry  will  be  applied  to  the  study  of  organic  reaction 
mechanisms   Lecture  —  3  hours. 

CH  631  POLYMER  CHEfWilSTRY  3sh 

A  study  of  the  chemistry  of  macromolecules,  both  natural  polymers  and 
synthetic  polymers,  including  mechanisms  of  polymerization.  Lecture  3  hours 

CH  632  STEREOCHEMISTRY  3  s.h. 

The  effect  of  spatial  arrangement  of  atoms  on  the  chemical  and  physical 
properties  of  molecules   Lecture  —  3  hours 

CH  635  CURRENT  TOPICS  IN  ORGANIC  CHEMISTRY  3sh 

With  selections  to  meet  the  needs  and  interests  of  the  students,  possible  topics 
may  include:  reaction  mechanisms,  molecular  spectroscopy,  stereo  chemistry, 
natural  products,  heterocyclics,  polymer  chemistry  and  organic  synthesis. 


PHYSICAL  CHEMISTRY 

CH  640  PHYSICAL  CHEMISTRY  (core  course)  3  s.h. 

A  basic  introduction  to  topics  covered  in  advanced  graduate  courses.  Lecture 
—  3  hours 

CH  641  STATISTICAL  THERMODYNAMICS  3  S.h. 

The  application  of  statistical  mechanics  to  chemical  systems    Lecture  —  3 
hours 

CH  642  CHEMICAL  KINETICS  3sh 

An  introduction  to  empirical  and  theoretical  chemical  kinetics   Lecture  —  3 
hours, 

CH  643  QUANTUM  CHEMISTRY  3  s.h. 

An  introduction  to  quantum  theory  and  its  application  to  atomic  and  molecular 
structure,  and  spectroscopy  Lecture  —  3  hours. 

CH  645  CURRENT  TOPICS  IN  PHYSICAL  CHEMISTRY  3  s.h 

With  selections  to  meet  the  needs  and  interests  of  the  student,  possible  topics 


may   include:  quantum   mechanics,   molecular  structure,  chemical 
thermodynamics,  statistical  mechanics  and  chemical  kinetics. 


BIOCHEMISTRY 

CH  546  BIOCHEMISTRY  3  s  h /sem 

Courses  covering  and  emphasizing  most  recent  developments  in  the  areas  of 
biochemistry  such  as  amino  acids,  carbohydrates,  lipids,  nucleic  acids,  proteins, 
enzymes,  metabolism  and  metabolic  control    Lecture  —  3  hours. 

CH  651  BIOCHEMISTRY  TOPICS  3  s.h. 

A  discussion  of  areas  such  as  carbohydrates,  lipids,  amino  acids,  proteins, 
nucleic  acides.  kinetics,  and  metabolism   Lecture  —  3  hours. 

CH  652  ENZYMES  3  s.h. 

A  study  of  enzymes  to  include  isolation,  kinetics,  classification,  specificity, 
mechanisms,  cofactors,  structure  and  formation.  Lecture  —  3  hours. 


46  —  Indiana  University  of  Pennsylvania 


COUNSELOR  EDUCATION 


Department  offerings  include  Master  of  Arts  and  Master  of 
Education  degree  programs  and  Commonwealth  approved 
programs  leading  to  certification  as  elementary  school 
counselors,  secondary  school  counselors,  and  supervisors  of 
guidance  services. 

DEGREE  PROGRAMS 

The  Master  of  Arts  degree  programs  (Counseling  Services; 
Student  Personnel  Services  in  Higher  Education)  are  designed 
for  students  seeking  preparation  leading  to  counseling  and 
counseling-related  employment  in  non-school  settings  and 
higher  education.  The  Master  of  Education  degree  program  is 
the  appropriate  base  for  students  seeking  preparation  leading 
to  certification  as  elementary  or  secondary  school  counselors. 

Program  selection  is  determined  by  the  interests, 
qualifications,  and  goal  purposes  of  the  applicant,  and  all 
degree  programs  require  the  completion  of  30  credit  hours  of 
coursework,  thesis  optional. 

CERTIFICATION  PROGRAMS 

Elementary  and  Secondary  School  Counselors  —  To  qualify 
for  institutional  endorsement  and  Commonwealth  certification 
in  these  programs,  the  student  must  complete  a  42  credit-hour, 
competency-based  program  to  include  field  experience  and  all 
requirements  for  the  Master  of  Education  degree. 

While  teaching  experience  is  not  an  absolute  requisite  for 
admission,  students  should  have  an  understanding  of 
educational  philosophy,  objectives,  and  practices.  They  should 
also  understand  the  basic  principles  of  psychology,  sociology. 


and  related  fields,  and  possess  sufficient  background  in 
mathematics  to  comprehend  the  statistical  materials  and 
methods  with  which  the  counselor  must  be  familiar.  Prospective 
students  should  include  introductory  courses  in  these  areas  in 
their  undergraduate  preparation. 

Supervisor  of  Guidance  Services  —  This  is  a  sixth  year, 
competency-based,  management  oriented  program  designed 
for  the  preparation  and  certification  of  guidance  services 
supervisors  in  grades  K-12.  The  applicant  must  be  a  certified 
school  counselor  with  the  master's  degree  and  have  at  least  one 
year  of  full-time  experience  as  a  school  counselor. 

STUDENT  ADVISORY 

Students  should  not  attempt  to  plan  their  own  programs.  A 
departmental  advisor,  assigned  to  each  student,  assists  with  the 
preparation  of  course  schedules  and  all  other  concerns  in  a 
manner  consistent  with  Graduate  School  and  Department 
policy. 

CONTENT  AREAS 

All  students  enrolled  in  Master's  level  programs  will  complete 
a  basic  core  of  courses  supported  by  suitable  electives. 

Courses  comprising  the  basic  core  will  consist  of  GD  515,  GD 
516,  GD  550,  CE  531,  and  CE  533  for  a  total  of  12-14  semester 
hours.  See  course  descriptions  under  appropriate  department 
programs. 

Master  of  Arts  in  Counseling  Services  program  majors  will 
complete  the  core,  plus  CE  537  and  CE  541,  and  10-1 2  semester 
hours  in  electives. 

Majors  in  the  Master  of  Arts  in  Student  Personnel  Services  in 
Higher  Education  program  will  complete  a  modified  core  to 


Program  Curricula 
Counselor  Education 


include  GD  515.  GD  516,  CE  537,  CE  541,  SPS 526,  SPS 527,  SPS 
528,  SPS  529,  and  7-9  semester  hours  in  electives. 

Students  seeking  certification  as  elementary  school 
counselors  will  complete  the  core  and  CE  525,  CE  526,  CE  527, 
CE  529,  CE  538,  CE  540,  CE  555  plus  one  course  in  Foundations 
of  Education  and  six  semester  hours  in  electives. 

Students  seeking  certification  as  secondary  school 
counselors  will  complete  the  core  and  CE  535,  CE  536,  CE  537, 
CE538,  CE539.  CE541.  CE  555  plus  one  course  in  Foundations 
of  Education  and  six  semester  hours  in  electives. 

Supervisor  of  guidance  services  program  majors  will 
complete  courses  BU  541,  CS  502,  CE  542,  CE  543,  CE  544,  CE 
545,  CE  546,  CE  550,  and  CE  551. 

Courses  outside  the  student's  major  may  serve  as  suitable 
electives,  but  only  with  the  approval  of  the  advisor  and  the 
course  instructor.  CE  556  (Independent  Study)  may  be 
scheduled  with  the  approval  of  the  faculty  advisor  and  the 
Department  Chairman.  For  additional  information  about 
individual  programs  contact  the  department  chairman. 


COMRSE  DESCRIPTIONS 

CE   531  PHILOSOPHY  AND  PRINCIPLES  OF  GUIDANCE  3  S.h. 

Overview  of  genesis  and  development  of  guidance  in  American  education, 
including  philosophical  concepts,  psychological  theories,  cultural  and  social 
influences,  and  current  practices 

CE   533  EVALUATION  TECHNIQUES  3  s  h. 

Basic  concepts  utilized  in  testing,  emphasizing  data  concerning  purposes  and 
types  of  tests,  test  administration,  test  scoring,  test  validity,  and  test  selection 
Prerequisites;  CE  531.  GD  516 


CE   535  CASE  STUDY  TECHNIQUE  a  s.h. 

Principles,  problems,  methods,  and  content  involved  in  understanding  the 

individual  student  and  his  developing  self-concept   Prerequisites:  CE  531.  533. 


CE  526  INFORMATION  SERVICE  (Elem) 


3  S.h. 


CE   536  INFORMATION  SERVICE  3  s.h. 

Emphasis  is  placed  upon  the  relationship  between  the  information  service  and 
other  guidance  services;  theones  related  to  decision  making;  use  of  information  in 
process  of  educational,  social,  and  vocational  development;  collection, 
evaluation,  and  uses  of  information;  and  programming  of  information  activities. 
Prerequisite:  CE  531 


CE  527  CONSULTATIVE  AND  COUNSELING  THEORY  (Elem) 


3sh 


CE   537  COUNSELING  AND  CONSULTATIVE  THEORY  3  s  h. 

Theories,  objectives,  principles,  and  practices  of  counseling  and  consulting 
with  individuals  are  covered  Interview  techniques  are  presented  for  maximum 
development  in  subsequent  practicum  experience.  Prerequisite:  CE  533 

CE   538  MANAGEMENT  OF  THE  GUIDANCE  SERVICES  3  s.h 

Emphasis  is  placed  upon  planning,  organizing,  coordinating,  directing,  and 
controlling  functions  of  management  as  applied  to  guidance  services  within 
framework  of  the  school's  philosophy  and  statement  of  objectives.  Prerequisites: 
CE  531.  533,  535,  536,  537.  539 


CE  529  GROUP  PROCEDURES  (Elem) 


3s.h. 


CE  539  GROUP  PROCEDURES  3  s  h 

Emphasis  will  be  placed  upon  nature  of  groups,  techniques  involved  in 
development  of  dynamics  of  group  behavior,  formation  and  operation  of  groups, 
organization  and  structure  of  groups,  and  influence  of  group  upon  the  individual 
as  they  relate  to  common  problems  Prerequisite:  CE  531 


CE  540  SUPERVISED  PRACTICUM  (Elem) 


3  8.h. 


CE  525  CASE  STUDY  TECHNIQUE  (Elem) 


3s.h. 


CE  541  SUPERVISED  PRACTICUM  3  S.h. 

Practicum  experience  in  counseling  techniques,  including  interviews, 
observations,  written  reports,  and  group  interaction  Students  work  with 
counselees  appropriate  to  their  level  of  preparation  and  goals  Emphasis  is  both 
developmental  and  problem-centered  Since  aspects  of  all  component  guidance 
services  are  included,  this  is  a  terminal  course  in  the  core  sequence 


48  —  Indiana  University  of  Pennsylvania 


CE  542         SCHOOL  SERVICES  3  s.h 

Designed  to  analyze  critically  written  statements  of  educational  philosophies 
and  objectives  of  selected  elementary  and  secondary  schools,  students  will 
prepare  a  written  statement  of  educational  philosophy  and  objectives  for  a  school 
in  which  he  is  or  has  been  employed  as  a  guide  for  the  critical  examination  of 
philosophies  and  objectives  for  school  services  —  instructional,  administration 
and  supervisory,  and  pupil  personnel. 

CE  543  PLANNING  PRINCIPLES  3sh 

Students  will  develop  written  statements  of  guidance  services  philosophy  and 
objectives  in  order  to  establish  program  elements  for  each  of  the  guidance 
services  which  will  be  analyzed  to  determine  personnel  needs,  facilities,  and 
materials  necessary,  in-service  program  requirements,  and  budgetary  demands 
Prerequisites:  BU  541.  CE  542. 

CE  544  ORGANIZING  PRINCIPLES  3  s.h. 

Techniques  to  relate  tasks  to  personnel  will  be  examined  to  develop  structural 
patterns  necessary  to  initiate  guidance  services  programs  in  districts  of  various 
sizes  and  compositions.  Prerequisite:  CE  543 

CE   545  HUMAN  RELATIONS  AND  COMMUNICATIONS  3sh 

Students  will  develop  skill  in  programming  various  guidance  services  for  the 
school  year  throughout  the  district.  Human  relations  principles  and  techniques  to 
elicit  cooperation  from  personnel  involved  and  skills  in  communicating  with 
personnel  participating  in  the  program  of  guidance  services  and  with  the  public 
will  be  developed 

CE   546  ENCOUNTER  &  SENSITIVITY  IN  COUNSELING  3  s  h 

Participants  will  explore  their  own  individuality  and  human  potential  as  they 
enter  into  authentic,  honest  and  trusting  relationships  within  the  context  of  a  small 
group  experience  encouraging  recognition  and  expression  of  feelings  as  an 
effective  way  of  understanding  one's  self  and  impact  on  others  Enrollment  is  with 
consent  of  instructor 

CE  550  SUPERVISION  OF  GUIDANCE  WORKERS  3sh 

A  practicum  designed  to  provide  allied  experience  in  supervision  of  school 
counselors,  elementary  and  secondary,  in  preparation  of  supervisors  of  guidance 
services  Primary  focus  is  on  supervision  of  counseling  service  content  and 
process,  but  components  of  all  guidance  services  are  included.  Enrollment  is  with 
consent  of  instructor. 

CE  551  EVALUATION  OF  GUIDANCE  SERVICES  3  s.h 

Students  will  acquire  skills  to  evaluate  program  of  guidance  services  as  it  is 


related  to  the  educational  objectives  and  guidance  services  objectives  of  the 
school  including  initiation  of  appropriate  research  and  preparation  and  reporting 
of  recommendations  based  upon  findings.  Prerequisite:  CE  544. 

ST   526  HISTORY  AND  ADMINISTRATION  OF  HIGHER 

EDUCATION  IN  THE  UNITED  STATES  3  s.h. 

Growth  and  trends  of  higher  education  in  the  United  States  with  emphasis  on 
twentieth  century:  Administrative  problems  and  educational  issues, 
characteristics  of  higher  education  in  economic  analysis  and  cost,  financing,  level 
of  investment  and  assessing  returns,  some  administrative  problems  as  related  to 
legal  aspects  of  higher  education  as  it  affects  University  staff,  public  and  students 
with  some  court  cases  reviewed  and  compared. 

ST   527  STUDENT  PERSONNEL  SERVICES  IN 

HIGHER  EDUCATION  3  s.h. 

An  overview  of  student  personnel  work  in  higher  education,  highlighting  its 
history,  purposes,  organization,  philosophy,  ethical  values,  current  and  past  social 
and  legal  issues  in  institutions  of  higher  learning,  including  various  student 
services  such  as  admissions  and  registration,  data  processing  and  scheduling, 
housing  and  food  services,  career  counseling  and  placement,  college  unions  and 
student  activities,  sources  of  financial  aid,  fraternities  and  sororities,  intramural 
athletics  and  other  programs. 

ST   528  INTERNSHIP  IN  STUDENT  PERSONNEL  SERVICES  3  s  h. 

Practical  experience  in  the  following  areas  of  student  personnel  service:  Dean 
of  Students,  Dean  of  Men,  Dean  of  Women,  Housing  Office,  Admissions, 
Registration.  Placement.  Financial  Aid,  Student  Union,  and  related  areas. 
Participants  will  include  representatives  from  the  cooperating  staff. 

ST   529  SEMINAR  IN  STUDENT  PERSONNEL 

ADMINISTRATION  3  s.h. 

Review  in  depth  the  problems  and  trends  in  various  areas  of  student  personnel 
service  Research  projects  are  required. 

ST   530  SEMINAR  ON  CURRENT  TRENDS  IN 

STUDENT  AFFAIRS  3  s  h. 

Current  trends  in  Student  Affairs  administration  including  new  legal  aspects, 
human  sexuality,  drug  scene,  minority  programs,  new  trends  in  counseling 
services,  changes  in  residence  hall  living,  changing  patterns  of  student  financial 
aid.  etc.  Each  student  enrolled  in  the  course  will  study  in  depth  two  areas  and 
complete  a  research  type  project  in  one. 


CRIMINOLOGY 


The  Department  of  Criminology  offers  a  program  of  studies 
leading  to  a  Master  of  Arts  Degree  in  Criminology.  Students  may 
choose  from  a  wide  variety  of  course  offerings  or  select 
specialized  areas  of  concentration  in  Corrections,  Criminal 
Justice,  or  Law  Enforcement.  In  addition,  students  may 
complete  elective  courses  in  fields  directly  related  to 
criminology.  The  program  is  designed  for  individuals  who  are 
currently  employed  within  the  criminal  justice  system  and 
students  who  are  interested  in  pursuing  careers  in  criminology 
and  related  disciplines.  The  department  also  offers  courses 
open  to  students  following  other  degree  programs  in  the 
Graduate  School.  Law  Enforcement  Educational  Program 
funds  may  be  available  dependent  upon  a  candidate's 
qualifications. 


MASTER  OF  ARTS  IN  CRIMINOLOGY 

Admission  to  the  Graduate  School 

students  interested  in  applying  for  admission  should  write  to 
the  Graduate  School,  Indiana  University  of  Pennsylvania, 
Indiana,  PA  15701,  for  information  regarding  application 
procedures  and  admission  requirements. 


Department  Admission  Requirements 

In  addition  to  meeting  the  requirements  for  admission  to  the 
Graduate  School,  a  student  intending  to  work  toward  a  Master 
of  Arts  in  Criminology  will  be  required  to  have  the  following 


Program  Curricula  —  49 
Counselor  Education 
Criminology 

prerequisite  professional  preparation: 

A.  Students  should  demonstrate  a  sound  understanding  of 
the  criminal  justice  system;  and 

B.  Students  should  have  practical  experience  within  the 
system  of  justice  or  have  pursued  an  undergraduate 
degree  in  criminology,  or  completed  graduate  or  under- 
graudate  studies  in  a  related  field.* 

'Where  the  Department  determines  that  a  deficiency  in  back- 
ground experiences  or  educational  requirements  exists,  a 
student  may  be  permitted  (with  permission  of  the  Director  of 
Graduate  Studies)  to  complete  additional  studies  to  eliminate 
the  deficiency. 


CURRICULUM  FOR  THE  MASTER  OF  ARTS 

IN  CRIMINOLOGY  DEGREE 

Students  may  choose  between  a  Thesis  or  Non  Thesis 
curricula  depending  upon  individual  preference  and  needs. 

I.  Thesis  Degree  Requirements  (30  s.h.) 

A.  Core  Courses  (11-13  s.h.) 

CR  501  Criminological  Theory  (3  s.h.) 

CR  598  Graduate  Readings  (3  s.h.) 

CR  502  Crim  Research  or 

GD  515  Elements  of  Research  (3  s.h.) 

GD  550  Thesis  (2-4  s.h.) 

B.  Criminology  Electives  (9-12  s.h.) 

Students  are  required  to  complete  a  minimum  of  9  s.h. 
of  criminology  graduate  courses  in  addition  to  the  core 
course  requirement. 


50  —  Indiana  University  of  Pennsylvania 


C.  Electives  (6-9  s.h.) 

Students  may  select  electives  from  any  of  the  approved 
graduate  level  courses. 

II.  Non-Thesis  Degree  Requirements  (36  s.h.) 
A.  Core  Courses  (6  s.h.) 
CR  501  Criminological  Theory  (3  s.h.) 

CR  598         Graduate  Readings  (3  s.h.) 

B.  Electives  (30  s.h.) 

15  s.h.  Criminology  courses 

15  s.h.  in  approved  graduate  level  courses 

ELECTIVES 

The  foiiowing  courses  have  been  approvea  as  acceptaple 
electives.  Where  a  student,  for  special  needs,  requires  courses 
other  than  those  listed,  special  permission  from  the  director 
must  be  obtained  prior  to  scheduling.  Students  must  be  able  to 
justify  the  necessity  of  scheduling  such  courses  and  their 
relation  to  criminology  and  the  student's  interest  or  vocation. 
Generally,  only  six  (6)  credits  may  be  accepted  under  this 
variance. 

GR  516  — 530 

PS  551  —  554  —  558  —  559 

PC  553  —  534  —  536  —  540  —  545  -  546 
SO/AN  562  —  563  —  564  —  565  —  590  —  593 
CE  531  —  533  —  537  —  545 

COURSE  DESCRIPTIONS 

CR  501  CRIMINOLOGIC*,L 'HEORY  ;$- 

An  intensive  review  o)  setectetj  criminological  Iheones.  wilh  empnasis  on  in- 


dpwarft  beihavior. 

C=^  502  INTRODUCmOHTOCWM'S: 

RESEARCfVSSSMc^Gr  rf 
AralysB  of  ff8S6Bvcti  nsAooc' 


CR  503         StMIWAn  ON  PCMJC  E 
kvMnatnro  iBctvwiues  of  po  : 
of 


CR  504         PBISONNB.  RCCRl 
M  LAW  eNFOnCEW  E ' 

TBctwiMiiies  of  ■Hn-pOWBT  fBC. 
irv-deptti  roview  of  poKco  ■ppBc&" 

CR  505         SPeOALTOPIC&L^' 
At  option  ofi 

prob4ems,  &9^  i 
specjfic  30Cttl  praUens  and/o' 
I  of  pofice  SBnivcBS- 


TOPICS  TO  BE  CONSIDERED: 

Seminar  on  Crime  in  American  Soctety 

-  -rz'c.z'  '2~  ='za:  :-  a  •.-  -  =  :_'=  =-_  exlenl  of  crime 
problem  in  United  Stales  v.  :-  :a-r  :_  a-ane-:  c-:c  star  sties  of 
criminality;  traditionai  w  :e  ::  a'  a-:  z'za~  zez  z  —  e;  and 
current  societal  response  ::  ::-:e-:c-a%  :'e-:s 

Seminar  on  the  Rote  of  Law  Enforcem'ent  in  a  Fre«  Society 

Detailed  review  of  government's  police  powers  cc_-  e:  a  :i 
critical  analysis  of  structure  and  function  of  maiior  investigaure 


and  law  enforcement  agencies  at  federal,  state,  and  local  level. 
Resource  utilization,  inter-departmental  cooperation,  and 
breakdown  of  police  isolation  stressed  with  collateral  emphasis 
on  unity  of  purpose  in  professional  law  enforcement. 

Seminar  on  Constitutional  Law:  Its  Effects  on  the 
Administration  of  Criminal  Justice 

Comprehensive  analysis  of  constitutional  foundations  of 
contemporary  jurisprudence;  major  thrust  of  seminar  being  a 
detailed  understanding  of  recent  Supreme  Court  decisions. 

Advance  Principles  of  Supervision 

An  action  course  designed  to  acquaint  potential  supervisor 
with  theoretical  and  practical  methods  of  problem  solving 
within  a  bureaucratic  structure;  accent  will  be  practical  and 
problematic  situations  involving  group  solutions  to  supervisory 
problems  through  role-playing  and  psychodrama. 

Advanced  Public  Safety  Administration 

Explores  major  elements  of  public  safety  administration; 
emphasis  on  the  feasibility  of  police  and  fire  unit  consolidation, 
safety  unit  coordination  at  major  disasters,  unity  of  command  in 
the  rendering  of  public  safety  services. 

Theory:  Arrest,  Search  and  Seizure 

Theory  of  arrest,  search  and  seizure:  its  constitutional  basis, 
its  practical  applicability,  and  its  actual  implementation. 
Relevant  Supreme  Court  Decisions  will  be  studied. 

Command:  Decision  Making  and  the  Police  Executive 

The  accent  will  be  on  police  executive  development  with  the 
elements  of  executive  decision  making  stressed.  Role  playing 


Program  Curricula  —  51 
Criminology 

and  psychodrama  will  be  utilized  to  stimulate  situations  and 
conditions  requiring  executive  level  deliberations. 

Organized  Crime 

Critical  evaluation  of  organized  crime  in  the  United  States; 
emphasis  on  nature,  structure,  and  social  function  of  La  Cosa 
Nostra.  Elements  of  police  intelligence  operation  reviewed  as  an 
adjunct  of  the  functional  analysis  of  organized  crime. 

Organization:  The  Police  Community  Relations  Unit 

Investigation  of  the  purpose,  function,  and  organization  of 
Police-Community  Relations  Unit  of  a  police  department. 
Emphasis  is  on  effective  public  relations  procedures,  alternative 
organizational  designs,  and  circumvention  of  both  police  and 
community  opposition  to  formulation  of  the  unit. 

Seminar  In  the  Control  of  Deviant  Group  Behavior 

Clinical  review  of  dynamics  of  intergroup  relations,  with 
emphasis  on  gang  and/or  mob  behavior.  Will  explore  latest 
sociological  theories  concerning  group  formation  and  control, 
and  stress  police  actions  in  crisis  situations. 

CR  510  SEMINAR  IN  COMMUNITY  COLLEGE  TEACHING  2sh 

Designed  to  prepare  community  college  instructors  through  an  emphasis  on 
the  objectives,  materials,  techniques,  and  evaluation  of  general  education 
programs  in  criminology   Prerequisites:  Criminology  ma|or  or  minor 

CR  511  PREDICTIVE  METHODS  OF  PROBATION 

AND  PAROLE  3  s.h. 

Gives  student  actual  practice  in  using  behavioral  prediction  devices  Each 
student  will  have  opportunity  to  develop  experimental  models  and  research  the 
results 

CR  512  LABORATORY  IN  BACKGROUND  ANALYSIS 

AND  PRE-SENTENCE  REPORT  WRITING  3  S.h. 

Will  provide  background  information  concerning  structure,  function,  and  use 


52  —  Indiana  University  of  Pennsylvania 


of  pre-sentence  investigation.  Gives  practical  training  in  compilation  and  analysis 
of  social  case  histories  Each  student,  under  direct  supervision,  will  develop, 
organize  and  write  several  pre-sentence  investigations 

CR  513  SEMINAR  ON  CRIME  AND  DELINQUENCY 

PREVENTION  3sh 

Exploration  of  most  effective  ways  of  preventing  crime  and  delinquency.  Will 
stress  remedial  social  action,  law  enforcement  and  correctional  procedures  and 
techniques  of  community  arousal  and  involvement. 

CR  514  DEVELOPMENT  OF  INSTITUTIONAL 

TREATMENT  SERVICES  3  s  h. 

In-depth  study  of  institutional  treatment  methods;  including  a  review  of  the 

most  successful  approaches  to  curbing  recidivism  problem    Will  investigate 

therapeutic  community  and  milieu  management  concepts  as  well  as  individual 

treatment  procedures. 

CR  515         SPECIAL  TOPICS/CORRECTIONS  3  s.h 

At  option  of  instructor,  course  will  provide  in-depth  review  of  significant 
correctional  problems,  eg  ,  interdepartmental  friction,  etc.;  may  also  be  utilized  to 
explore  specific  social  problems  and/or  deviant  behavior  which  has  an  influence 
on  administration  of  correctional  services.  May  be  taken  more  than  once 
depending  on  topic. 


TOPICS  TO  BE  CONSIDERED: 
A  Seminar  on  Corrections 

Intensive  review  and  evaluation  of  the  correctional  system 
and  its  integral  components  —  probation,  institutionalization 
and  parole. 

Correctional  Administration 

A  basic  delineation  of  current  trends  in  correctional 
administration;  will  emphasize  effective  techniques  of 
organization  and  management  in  correctional  services. 

Crime  and  Its  Social  Treatment 

Elaboration  of  crucial  elements  of  deviant  behavior  and 


review  of  broad  based  community  rehabilitation  and  treatment 
services;  will  analyze  utilization  of  self-help  groups,  therapeutic 
communities,  half-way  houses,  community  rehabilitation 
centers,  referral  agencies,  out  patient  psychiatric  services,  etc. 

Seminar  on  Psychological  Abnormality  and  the  Correctional 
Process 

Will  examine  relationship  between  psychological 
abnormality  and  commission  of  crimes  and/or  establishment  of 
criminal  careers.  Emphasis  on  severe  mental  disturbances. 

Inter-Agency  Cooperation  and  Resource  Development 

Accent  on  development  of  inter-agency  cooperation  and 
resource  utilization;  will  emphasize  major  referral  agencies  — 
public  and  private  —  and  familiarize  students  with  techniques  of 
resource  utilization  with  relation  to  rehabilitation  and  treatment 
of  the  offender. 

Interviewing  Techniques:  Correctional  Emphasis 

Students  learn  and.  under  expert  supervision,  practice 
advanced  techniques  of  correctional  interviewing.  Techniques 
to  be  stressed:  establishment  of  rapport,  utilization  of  empathy, 
elements  of  identification,  and  principles  of  catharsis  and 
ventilation. 

Group  Methods  In  Corrections 

Will  emphasize  para  professional  group  therapy  techniques 
which  are  adaptable  to  the  correctional  process.  This  topic  will 
be  developed  in  conjunction  with  the  Psychology  Department. 

CR  516  ADVANCED  SEMINAR  ON  PROBATION 

AND  PAROLE  3  S.h. 

Provides  a  thought  provoking  review  of  functional  relationships  between 


Program  Curricula  ■ 
Criminology 
Economics 


53 


various  branches  of  government  and  the  correctional  process,  and  a  thorough 
analysis  of  probation  and  parole  processes  and  their  ancillary  components 
Stresses  practical  problems  of  client  supervision,  resource  referral,  and 
termination  of  supervision  services. 

CR  530  INTERNSHIP  IN  CRIMINAL  JUSTICE  3-6-12  sh 

Each  student  placed  with  a  selected  criminal  justice  agency  to  participate 
actively  in  activities  of  the  unit  Student  may  earn  up  to  12  semester  hours  credit 
Students  required  to  submit  an  acceptable  paper  explaining  experiences  in  the 
internship  program   By  appointment  only. 

GD  550  THESIS  2  or  4  sh 

With  advice  and  consent  of  faculty  advisor,  the  student  will  —  prior  to 
graduation  —  participate  in  preparation  of  a  thesis  which  is  related  to  his  subject 
matter  concentration  at  the  graduate  level  Students  required  to  strictly  adhere  to 
scientific  method,  and  present  findings  in  a  suitable  form. 

CR  598  GRADUATE  READINGS  IN  CRIfvllNOLOGY  3  S.h. 

With  faculty  supervision,  students  will  read  at  least  six  major  criminological 
texts  and  participate  in  a  seminar  situation  for  the  purpose  of  discussing  the 
reading  materials,  CR  501 

CR  599  INDEPENDENT  STUDY  IN  CRII^INOLOQY  1-3  sh. 

The  student,  with  advice  and  approval  of  instructor,  reaches  a  significant 
problem  in  Criminology.  By  appointment.  Criminology  major  or  minor. 


ECONOMICS 

The  Department  of  Economics  does  not  currently  offer  a 
graduate  degree.  The  graduate  courses  offered  by  the 
Department  are  a  component  of  both  the  M.Ed,  and  M.A.  in 
Social  Science  degrees. 


COURSE  DESCRIPTIONS 


EC   501  FOUNDATIONS  OF  MODERN  ECONOMICS  3  S.h. 

Not  open  to  students  who  have  credits  of  C  or  better  in  undergraduate  EC 
121-122  sequence.  Survey  of  micro  and  macroeconomics  designed  for  student 
who  is  not  already  well-grounded  in  the  field. 


EC  520  HISTORY  OF  ECONOMIC  THOUGHT  3  s  h. 

Examination  of  social,  political,  intellectual,  and  economic  origins  of  work  of 
prominent  past  economists,  and  of  the  content  and  impact  of  their  work. 
Prerequisite:  EC  501  or  credits  of  Cor  better  in6sh  of  Principlesof  Economics  or 
permission  of  the  instructor. 

EC  525  MONETARY  ECONOMICS  3  s  h. 

Structure  and  function  of  monetary  institutions  including  the  Federal  Reserve 
System,  commercial  banks,  and  financial  intermediaries,  theory  of  monetary 
economy,  and  monetary  policy  Prerequisite:  EC  501.  or  credits  of  C  or  better  in  6 
s.h.  of  Principles  of  Economics  or  permission  of  the  instructor 

EC   530  LABOR  ECONOMICS  3  S.h, 

History,  structure,  and  operations  of  trade  unions  and  employer  organizations; 
major  Federal  labor  legislation:  collective  bargaining  theory;  wage  determination; 
current  labor  problems  Prerequisite  EC  501  or  credits  of  C  or  better  in  6  s  h  of 
Principles  of  Economics  or  permission  of  the  instructor 

EC  534  ECONOMICS  OF  CORPORATE  DECISIONS  3  s.h. 

Applies  economic  theory  to  corporate  decision  making  Topics  include 
corporate  objectives,  profit  maximization,  economic  measurement  and 
forecasting  Prerequisite:  EC  501  or  credits  of  C  or  better  in  6  s.h.  of  Principles  of 
Economics  or  permission  of  the  instructor 

EC   541  CONTEMPORARY  ECONOMIC  ISSUES  3  s  h. 

Problem  areas  of  domestic  economy  Primary  focus  in  each  semester  is 
determined  by  student-instructor  interest.  Prerequisite:  EC  501  or  credits  of  Cor 
better  in  6  s  h.  of  Principles  of  Economics  or  (permission  of  the  instructor. 

EC   545  INTERNATIONAL  ECONOMICS  3  S.h. 

Nature  of  world  economy,  international  trade,  international  investment. 
current  international  institutions,  and  foreign  economic  policy  of  the  United 
States  Prerequisite:  EC  501  or  credits  of  C  or  lietter  in  6  s.h.  of  Principles  of 
Economics  or  permission  of  the  instructor 

EC  550  COMPARATIVE  ECONOMIC  SYSTEMS  3  s  h. 

Basic  economic  issues  in  capitalism,  socialism,  communism,  and  fascism,  and 

their  relationships  to  political  and  social  problems.  Prerequisite:  EC  501  or  credits 

of  C  or  better  in  6  s.h  of  Principles  of  Economics  or  permission  of  the  instructor. 

EC  580  SEMINAR  3  s  h. 

Seminar  in  selected  economic  issues  or  problems  Prerequisite:  EC  501  or 
credits  of  C  or  better  in  6  s  h  of  Principles  of  Economics  or  permission  of  the 
instructor. 


54  —  Indiana  University  of  Pennsylvania 


EDUCATIONAL  PSYCHOLOGY 


Application  for  admission  to  the  department  programs  is 
made  to  the  Graduate  School  Office.  After  admission  to  the 
Graduate  School,  the  Candidate  must  secure  the  Departmental 
Application  Packet,  which  includes  further  information  from  the 
Chairman,  Department  of  Educational  Psychology.  Potential 
Candidates  will  be  interviewed  by  the  Program  Admissions 
Committee  after  the  departmental  application,  copies  of 
transcripts  from  the  Graduate  School  Office,  and  official 
Graduate  Record  Examination  scores,  including  Education  are 
received.  An  advisor  will  be  assigned  to  approved  Candidates 
and  no  course  work  may  be  scheduled  without  the  advisor's 
approval.  The  advisor  may  approve  alternate  courses  to  meet 
required  competencies. 

Admission  to  the  programs  will  be  based  on  evidence  of 
previous  scholarship  and/or  potential  for  academic  success, 
personal  and  professional  qualities  deemed  necessary  for 
adequate  functioning  as  a  specialist  in  education  and 
motivation  for  professional  excellence.  Continued  enrollment 
once  begun,  is  expected.  Exceptions  to  this  policy  must  be  filed 
in  writing  and  approved  by  the  student's  program  committee. 

Candidates  for  admission  to  Master's  degree  programs  must 
have  a  Bachelor's  Degree  from  an  accredited  institution. 
Candidates  for  admission  to  the  Post-Master's  certification 
program  must  have  a  Master's  degree  and  an  Instructional  or 
Specialist  certificate  from  an  accredited  institution  or  have 
approved  educational  experiences. 


MASTER  OF  EDUCATION  IN 
EDUCATIONAL  PSYCHOLOGY 


The  Master  of  Education  Degree  in  Educational  Psychology 
Program  (32-36  s.h.  depending  upon  choice  of  thesis  or  non- 
thesis  option)  has  been  designed  to  give  the  interested  student  a 
broad  theoretical  and  practical  background  in  the  areas  of 
education  and  psychology.  There  are  four  majors  in  this  degree. 

General  requirements  are:  All  students  will  take  the 
Professional  Development  Area  (total  of  9  s.h.).  Humanistic 
Studies  (3  s.h.),  select  one  FE  511,  512,  513,  514;  Behavioral 
Studies  (3  s.h.),  select  one  EP  504  or  578,  573,  576,  580,  CE  529 
or  539,  SE  531;  Research  (3  s.h),  GR  515  (Ed.  Psych,  section). 


Educational  Psychology  M.Ed.  Majors  (additional 
courses  all  by  advisor's  permission) 

Pre-school  Psychology  —  (23-27  s.h.)  is  designed  to  prepare 
the  interested  student  for  entrance  into  the  post-masters 
certification  program.  Professional  Specialization  courses  (6 
s.h.)  EP  518,  562,  Subject  Area  and/or  Elective  (17-21  s.h.)  EP 
504,  578,  576,  572,  573,  580,  550,  581,  AC  520,  ED  501,  PC  533, 
540,  SE  522,  539,  565,  CE  525  or  535,  SH  502,  535,  GD  550. 


Human  Development  and  Learning  —  (23-27  s.h.)  is 
designed  to  prepare  the  teacher  to  be  more  effective  in  the 
classroom  and  to  have  a  balanced  program  in  Educational 
Psychology.  Professional  Specialization  courses  (6  s.h.)  EP 
518,  504  or  578,  Subject  Area  and/or  Electives  (17-21  s.h.)  EP 
504,  578,  576,  572,  573,  580,  550,  581,  AC  520,  ED  501,  PC  533, 
540,  SE  522,  539,  565,  CE  525  or  535,  SH  502,  535,  GD  550. 


Program  Curricula  —  55 
Educational  Psychology 


Educational  Evaluation  and  Research  —  (23-27  s  h.)  Is 
designed  to  provide  a  broad  theoretical  and  practical 
background  in  Educational  Evaluation  and  Research. 
Professional  Specialization  (6  s.h.)  EP  518,  562,  Subject  Area 
and/or  Electives  (17-21  s.h.)  EP  504,  578,  576,  572,  573,  580,  581 , 
GD  516,  517,  550,  AC  520,  CO  502. 


Home  School  Visitor  (School  Social  Worker)  —  23-27  s.h.)  is 
designed  for  persons  seeking  the  competencies  for 
Pennsylvania  certification.  The  candidate  must  be 
knowledgeable  in  the  field  of  Educational  Psychology  as  well  as 
basic  social  work  theory  and  practice.  Supervised  experience 
within  school  and  community  agency  settings  are  integral 
components  of  the  program.  Professional  Specialization  (6s. h.) 
EP  552A,  581,  Subject  Area  and/or  Electives  (17-21  s.h.)  EP518, 
552,  562,  504,  578,  581,  572,  573,  576,  580,  AC  520,  GD  516,  GD 
550. 


Adult  Community  Education 

The  Master's  in  Adult  Community  Education  is  designed  to 
develop  qualified  professionals  for  the  growing  field  of  adult 
and  community  education.  It  serves  a  dual  purpose:  (1)  to 
provide  education  and  experience  which  will  enable thestudent 
to  acquire  competencies  to  become  a  practitioner  in  a  school- 
community  setting;  (2)  to  provide  a  solid  foundation  of  theory 
and  practice  which  will  enable  the  student  to  proceed  toward  a 
doctoral  degree. 

A  minimum  of  30  credits  with  an  optional  thesis  is  required. 
Courses  include:  AC  520,  521,  522,  523,  540,  GD  515,  550,  EP 
581,  Electives  —  EP  518,  504,  562,  576,  578.  These  and  others 


from  other  disciplines  may  be  taken  with  permission  of  the 
advisor. 

For  AC  course  descriptions  see  page  27. 

Certificate  of  Advanced  Study  in  School 
Psychology  Post-Master's  Degree  Program  —  30  s.h. 

A  Certificate  of  Advanced  Study  in  School  Psychology  may 
be  issued  to  those  students  who  have  completed  a  minimum  of 
60  graduate  hours,  30  of  which  should  be  approved  graduate 
hours  in  the  university  beyond  the  master's  degree,  and  who 
have  met  all  of  the  requirements  for  certification  as  a  school 
psychologist. 

The  School  Psychology  Program  is  designed  for  those 
individuals  who  are  seeking  certification  as  public  school 
psychologists  in  the  Commonwealth  of  Pennsylvania.  The 
objectives  of  the  program  are  to  train  competent  individuals 
who  will  demonstrate  (1)  an  ability  to  evaluate  and  prescribe,  (2) 
an  understanding  of  individual  and  group  dynamics,  (3)  an 
understanding  of  the  educational  system  and  learning 
processes,  and  (4)  an  ability  to  apply  all  acquired  competencies. 
There  is  required  a  comprehensive  exam,  practicums  and 
internship  experiences.  Certification  as  a  school  psychologist  is 
recommended  when  all  of  the  indicated  role  competencies  are 
demonstrated  by  the  candidate. 

The  Professional  Specialization  studies  courses  for  the 
program  for  21-24  s.h.  are  EP  512,  513,  EP  563  and  EP  550-EP 
551  (12-15  s.h.).  The  other  approved  courses  for  9  s.h.  to  meet 
competency  requirements  are  SE  531 ,  SE  566  or  EP  581 ,  and  PC 
534.  For  final  certification  other  courses  and/or  additional 
Internship  hours  may  be  required  by  the  School  Psychology 
Committee  to  satisfy  competency  requirements. 


56  —  Indiana  University  of  Pennsylvania 


COURSE  DESCRIPTIONS 


EP   504  ADVANCED  EDUCATIONAL  PSYCHOLOGY  3  s.h. 

An  upward  extension  of  Educational  Psychology  with  a  systematic  review  of 
current  researcn  and  learning  theory  with  emphasis  on  classroom  application. 


EP   563  PROJECTIVE  TECHNIQUES  3  s.h. 

An  introduction  to  various  projective  techniques  currently  used.  Prerequisite: 
For  approved  School  Psychologist  candidates. 


EP   512  INDIVIDUAL  EVALUATION  I  3  s.h. 

Individual  testing  and  professional  competency  in  Binet  and  related  scales  of 
intelligence  and  includes  techniques  of  report  writing,  professional  role  studies, 
and  communication  procedures.  Prerequisite:  For  approved  School  Psychologist 
candidates 


EP   572  PSYCHOLOGY  OF  CHILDHOOD  EDUCATION  3  s.h 

Studies  relationship  which  physical,  social,  emotional,  and  intellectual 
development  have  on  theory  and  practice  of  childhood  and  pre-adolescent 
education. 


EP   513  INDIVIDUAL  EVALUATION  II  3sh 

Individual  testing  and  professional  competency  in  the  Wechsler  Scales  and 
other  pertinent  tests.  Prerequisite:  EP  512  —  For  approved  School  Psychologist 
candidates. 


EP   518  INTERPRETATION  OF  EDUCATIONAL  AND 

PSYCHOLOGICAL  TESTS  3  s.h. 

Designed  to  provide  the  individual  with  information  necessary  to  understand, 
evaluate,  and  interpret  results  of  educational  and  psychological  tests  accurately 
and  meaningfully. 

EP   550  INTERNSHIP  I  3sh 

Supervised  experiences  in  Educational  Psychology.  Prerequisite:  For 
approved  candidates. 

EP   551  INTERNSHIP  II  3-12  s.h 

Clinical  and  field  experience  with  mentally  and  physically  handicapped  and 
emotionally  disturbed  children  Prerequisite:  For  approved  School  Psychologist 
candidates 

EP   552  INTERNSHIP  —  HOIVIE  AND  SCHOOL  VISITOR 

(SCHOOL  SOCIAL  WORKER)  3-9  s.h. 

Supervised  experiences  for  Home  and  School  Visitor  (School  Social  Worker) 
candidates.  Prerequisite:  For  approved  candidates 

EP   562  PSYCHOTHERAPY  AND  GROUP  DYNAfullCS  3sh 

A  systematic  study  of  major  techniques  of  counseling  and  psychotherapy,  and 
application  of  principles  of  group  dynamics  to  educational  settings. 


EP   573  PSYCHOLOGY  OF  ADOLESCENT  EDUCATION  3  s.h. 

Concerned  with  study  of  significant  characteristics  of  adolescence,  and 
understanding  the  role  of  cultural  influences  on  formation  of  behavior. 


EP   576  BEHAVIOR  PROBLEfViS  3  S.h. 

Explores  behavior  problems  encountered  in  classroom  situations  and  gives 
causes,  characteristics  and  some  remedial  techniques. 


EP   578  LEARNING  3  S.h. 

Explores   learning   theories  and  educational  application  in  working  with 
learning  problems  in  the  classroom 


EP   580  PUPIL  ADJUSTMENT  3  s.h. 

Considers  human  adjustment  and  mental  health  in  relation  to  causative  factors 
and  explores  dynamics  of  personal  and  interpersonal  relationships. 


EP   581  SPECIAL  TOPICS  IN  EDUCATIONAL 

PSYCHOLOGY  3  s.h. 

Designed  for  those  students  who  wish  to  do  independent  research  in  special 
areas.  Prerequisite:  department  chairman  permission. 


ELEMENTARY  EDUCATION 


The  Elementary  Education  Master's  curriculum  is  designed 
to  assist  the  graduate  student  to  broaden  or  strengthen  his 
background  in  academic  areas  and  in  professional  education. 
The  graduate  student  may  elect  one  of  several  specialized  fields 
for  study,  including  curricula  in  general  education,  early 
childhood  education,  and  reading.  If  courses  are  carefully 
selected  in  the  general  elementary  education  curriculum,  a 
concentration  in  areas  such  as  language  arts,  social  studies, 
mathematics  or  science  can  be  achieved.  A  graduate  student 
may  exercise  much  freedom  in  designing  his  program. 

At  the  Master  of  Education  level,  the  student  is  assigned  to  an 
advisor  as  soon  as  he  is  admitted  to  the  Graduate  School.  At  this 
time,  the  student  and  advisor  outline  a  tentative  graduate 
program.  (Note  that  GD  515,  Elements  of  Research,  should  be 
taken  during  the  first  12  hours  of  graduate  work.) 

Acceptance  into  the  Graduate  School  permits  a  student  to 
take  course  work  In  a  department.  If  a  student  wishes  to  become 
a  degree  candidate,  he  must  complete  the  Application  to 
Candidacy  form  and  forward  this  form  to  the  Graduate  School 
after  having  successfully  completed  six  hours  of  course  work  in 
the  department. 


Program  Curricula  —  57 
Educational  Psychology 
Elemer)tary  Education 

I.  Professional  Development  Area 

A.  Humanistic  studies  —  Three  semester  hours  are  required 
from  FE  511  through  FE  514. 

B.  Behavioral  studies  —  Three  semester  hours  are  required. 
Selection  of  courses  include  EP  504,  EP  573,  EP  576, 
EP  578,  EP  580;  CE  529,  CE  539;  or  SE  531. 

0.  Research  —  All  students  are  required  to  take  GD  515 
Elements  of  Research. 

II.  Specialization  Core  —  Students  must  take  6  s.h.  in  a 
specialization  core.  Recommended  courses  include  EL  531, 
EL  532,  EL  551,  EL  552. 

III.  Electives  —  Students  may  elect  21  s.h.  from  any  courses  with 
an  EL  prefix.  ED  500  and  ED  501  can  also  be  included  within 
this  subject  area. 

A.  Students  who  elect  a  non-thesis  option  must  take  3  s.h. 
from  one  of  the  following:  EL  580,  GR  516,  or  CO  502. 

Credit  for  Workshops  —  The  Elementary  Education 
Department  will  accept  a  maximum  of  6  hours  of  workshop 
credit  for  the  purpose  of  meeting  degree  requirements,  where 
appropriate,  in  any  graduate  program.  Credit  for  workshops, 
however,  must  be  approved  by  the  Coordinator  of  the  Master's 
Program  in  which  the  student  is  enrolled. 


MASTER  OF  EDUCATION  DEGREE  IN 
ELEMENTARY  EDUCATION 

Students  working  toward  a  Master's  degree  in  Elementary 
Education  should  complete  30  hours  of  work  (thesis  option)  for 
36  hours  of  work  (non-thesis  option)  from  among  the  following 
areas: 


GRADUATE  PROGRAM  IN  EARLY 

CHILDHOOD  EDUCATION 

Students  seeking  Instructional  Level  II  Certification  with  a 
specialization  in  Early  Childhood  Education  or  a  Master  of 
Education  Degree  in  Elementary  Education  specializing  in  Early 
Childhood   Education   must  complete  the  following 


58  —  Indiana  University  of  Pennsylvania 


requirements:  A  minimum  of  24  semester  hours  is  required  for 
the  Instructional  Level  II  Certificate  and  30  hours  minimum  for 
the  Master's  Degree  Program.  All  courses  scheduled  should 
have  the  approval  of  the  student's  advisor. 

In  the  event  that  a  committee  finds  the  student  to  be 
proficient  in  a  required  course  or  courses  in  the  Professional 
Studies  unit,  the  student  will  be  permitted  to  elect  another 
course  or  courses  in  the  Professional  Studies  unit.  Some 
students  may  have  to  schedule  additional  semester  hours  to 
reach  the  required  level  of  competency. 

Students  pursuing  a  Master's  degree  may  elect  a  two  or  a 
four-hour  thesis.  Those  students  electing  the  former  choice, 
must  also  schedule  EL  580  Seminar  in  Advanced  Research.  The 
student  may  also  elect  a  non-thesis  Master's  degree. 

Procedures  for  Admission 

An  applicant  must  first  be  admitted  to  the  Graduate  School  as 
a  qualified  student  and  must  have  an  elementary  education 
teaching  certificate.  He  then  obtains  the  Early  Childhood 
Education  Program  application  packet  from  the  Coordinator  of 
the  Early  Childhood  Education  Program,  Third  Floor,  Davis 
Hall,  completes  the  forms  and  returns  them  to  the  Coordinator's 
office  for  review.  Applicants  may  be  requested  to  report  for  an 
interview  with  the  faculty  responsible  for  teaching  the  early 
childhood  education  courses  and  will  be  notified  of  admission 
to  the  program.  Upon  admission  to  the  program,  the  student  will 
be  assigned  a  faculty  member  who  is  responsible  for  teaching  in 
the  program. 

I.  Professional  Development  Area  (9  s.h.) 
A.  Humanistic  Studies  —  Three  semester  hours  are  required 
from  FE  511  through  FE  514. 


B.  Behavioral  Studies  —  Three  semester  hours  are  required. 
Selection  of  courses  include  EP  504,  EP  573,  EP  576, 
EP  578*,  EP  580;  CE  529,  CE  539,  SE  531, 

C.  Research  —  All  students  are  required  to  take  GD  515 
Elements  of  Research 

II.  Specialization  core  (6  s.h.) 

Students  may  take  6  s.h.  in  a  specialization  core.  Recom- 
mended courses  include  EL  561*,  EL  553,  LR  540. 

III.  Subject  Area***  (21  s.h.) 

Students  may  elect  21  s.h.  from  the  following  courses: 
EL  550*,  EL  555*,  EL  560*,  EL  562*,  EL  548,  EL  547,  EL  580*. 
ED  500,  GR  550. 

•Required  for  Early  Childhood  Education  Program 
•Required  for  non-thesis  program  —  not  required  if  student 
chooses  thesis  option. 
*lf  thesis  option  is  selected,  minimum  is  1 5  s.h.  including  GR  550. 


THE  DOCTORATE  IN  ELEMENTARY  EDUCATION 

The  program  leading  to  the  Doctor  of  Education  degree  in 
Elementary  Education  is  designed  for  those  who  wish  to  teach 
at  the  college  or  university  level  or  who  desire  to  work  in  a 
teaching,  supervisory,  or  administrative  capacity. 

A  candidate  for  this  degree  is  expected  to  acquire  a  broad 
knowledge  of  various  aspects  of  education,  and  to  demonstrate 
through  the  completion  of  an  acceptable  dissertation  the  ability 
to  conduct  an  independent  investigation  of  a  topic  approved  by 
the  department. 


Program  Curricula  - 
Elementary  Education 


The  first  step  in  a  student's  program  is  to  seek  admission  to 
course  work  beyond  the  Master's  degree.  After  the  student  has 
completed  9  hours  and  prior  to  15  hours  of  advanced  work  at 
Indiana,  he  can  apply  for  candidacy.  To  become  a  candidate  a 
student  must  meet  the  requirements  of  the  Graduate  School  and 
the  department  of  Elementary  Education.  Applicants  are 
reviewed  on  the  basis  of  acceptable  scores  on  the  Graduate 
Record  Examination,  performance  in  course  work,  professional 
recommendations,  and  successfully  passing  a  written  and  an 
oral  examination  administered  by  the  department. 

After  admission  to  candidacy  the  student  will  be  assigned  to 
an  advisory  committee.  This  committee  will  assist  the  student  in 
preparing  a  final  plan  of  study.  The  comprehensive  examination 
will  be  scheduled  upon  the  recommendation  of  the  advisory 
committee  near  the  end  of  course  requirements  and  prior  to 
registering  for  GD  650  —  dissertation  credits.  This  examination 
will  be  both  written  and  oral  and  will  include  a  major  and  a 
second  concentration  field. 

No  specific  number  of  credits  entitles  a  student  to  the  degree, 
but  a  minimum  of  90  hours  of  credit  properly  distributed  must  be 
earned  beyond  the  Bachelor's  degree. 

Statistics  and  computer  science  are  required  to  complete  the 
research  area  of  study.  However,  foreign  language  may  be 
substituted  as  an  option. 

A  supervised  internship  and  a  period  of  residency  will  be 
required  of  all  candidates  for  this  degree.  Ordinarily  the 
internship  will  consist  of  working  for  a  semester  or  a  summer  in 
an  educational  experience  unlike  one  already  experienced  by 
the  candidate. 

A  complete  description  of  the  Doctor  of  Education  program 
in  Elementary  Education  can  be  obtained  from  the  Department 


of  Elementary  Education,  Davis  Hall. 


COURSE  DESCRIPTIONS 


EL    531  CURRICULUM  PROBLEMS  IN 

ELEMENTARY  EDUCATION  3  s.h. 

Students   will   develop   and   evaluate  aims  and   objectives  of  elementary 

education,  write  a  school  philosophy,  examine  contemporary  forms  of  curricular 

organization  and  determine  place  of  each  broad  subject  area  in  total  school 

program. 

EL    532  SYSTEMATIC  OBSERVATION  OF 

CLASSROOM  BEHAVIOR  3  S.h. 

Students  will  learn  how  to  code  classroom  verbal  interaction  through  actual 
demonstration,  video  tapes,  and  audio  recordings,  with  emphasis  on  various 
teaching  strategies,  monitoring  verbal  interaction,  and  supervisory  sessions. 
Designed  for  elementary  majors,  provisions  can  be  made  to  enroll  students  from 
other  departments. 

EL    541  SPECIAL  PROBLEMS  IN  ELEMENTARY 

SOCIAL  STUDIES  3  S.h. 

Specific  problems  with  curriculum,  teaching,  and  learning  experiences  and 
evaluation  are  stressed  Each  student  will  research  a  special  problem  or  area  of 
interest. 

EL    542  MATHEMATICS  IN  THE  ELEMENTARY  SCHOOL  3  S.h. 

Experiences  with  manipulative  materials,  games  and  puzzles,  activity  centers, 
and  lab  approach  to  mathematics.  Inexpensive  mathematics  lab  equipment  will  be 
constructed.  Sources  of  literature  and  materials  will  be  presented  and  used. 
Opportunities  will  be  given  to  write  activity  and  problem  cards  and  to  plan 
mathematics  activity  centers  Psychological  foundations  and  mathematics 
structure  will  be  used  as  referents  for  suggested  activities  and  curriculum  studies 

EL    543  RESOURCE  MATERIALS  IN  ELEMENTARY  SCIENCE  3  s.h 

An  introduction  of  underlying  philosophy  and  use  of  materials  of  several  of  the 
current  national  curriculum  programs  in  elementary  science  Emphasis  is  placed 
on  following  programs:  (1)  Science:  A  Process  Approach  (SAPA),  (2)  Elementary 
Science  Study  (ESS),  (3)  Science  Curriculum  Improvement  Study  (SCIS).  and  (4) 
Conceptually  Oriented  Program  in  Elementary  Science  (COPES),  mcluding 
micro-teaching  techniques  and  development  and  preparation  of  individualized 
self-instruction  modules  Students  are  required  to  work  with  various  program 
materials. 


60  —  Indiana  University  of  Pennsylvania 


EL  544    RECENT  TRENDS  IN  ELEMENTARY 

LANGUAGE  ARTS  3  s  h. 

Designed  to  help  students  to  direct  more  effective  communication  ttirougti 
study  of  problems,  recent  trends  and  contributions  of  researcti  in  ttie  broad  fields 
of  listening,  oral  and  written  communication. 

EL    545  EXPERIMENTAL  STUDIES  IN  ART  EDUCATION  3  s.h. 

Teachiers  will  undertake  art  experiences  in  various  media  as  they  are  adapted 
to  provision  of  art  experiences  for  the  child  Emphasis  will  be  placed  on  stages  of 
growth,  type  of  motivation,  and  ways  of  administering  stimuli  Perceptual 
awareness  and  understanding  and  appreciation  of  visual  art  forms  and  their 
importance  in  the  lives  of  people  in  our  own  and  other  cultures  will  be  developed 
along  with  study  of  the  exceptional  child  to  recognize  and  encourage  evidences  of 
art  potential  as  well  as  wholesome  self-expression 

EL    546  MODERN  PROCEDURES  &  SKILLS 

IN  ELEMENTARY  MUSIC  3  s.h. 

New  dimensions  in  thinking  about  elementary  music  for  children.  Emphasis  is 

placed  on  the  young  student  discovering  interesting  aspects  of  music  —  many 

sounds  around  him.  rhythm  through  movement,  use  of  percussive  and  simple 

method  instruments,  and  music  of  countries.  (Music  Staff) 

EL    547  RESOURCE  MATERIALS  IN 

CHILDREN'S  LITERATURE  3  s.h 

Evaluation  and  selection  of  literature  as  a  classroom  resource  for  teaching  and 
learning,  including  illustrations,  folklore,  poetery,  modern  and  traditional  fiction 
and  non-fiction 

EL    548  CREATIVITY  AND  THE  ELEMENTARY 

SCHOOL  CHILD  3  s.h. 

Ways  to  uncover  creative  abilities  in  children  and  techniques  to  direct  these 
energies  in  the  classroom  by  studying  the  roleof  the  teacher  as  developer  of  these 
abilities  Students  will  be  encouraged  to  develop  their  own  creative  abilities 

EL    550  THE  COMMUNITY  AND  THE  ELEMENTARY  SCHOOL  3  s.h. 

Development  and  maintenance  of  a  purposeful  program  of  communication 
between  the  elementary  school  and  the  community  through  study  of  selection, 
organization  and  functions  of  citizens  advisory  committees  and  cooperative  use  of 
various  community  services. 

EL    551  RECENT  INNOVATIONS  IN 

ELEMENTARY  EDUCATION  3sh 

Newer  trends  in  classroom  procedure,  equipment,  and  materials  as  well  as 


problems  involved  in  improvement  of  instruction  Whenever  possible  sessions  will 
be  held  to  demonstrate  and  use  recently  developed  materials  Individual  research 
and  field  trips  into  many  of  the  newer  programs  in  elementary  education 

EL    552  EVALUATING  THE  ELEMENTARY  SCHOOL  3  s  h. 

Criteria  for  evaluating  the  elementary  school,  its  curriculum,  professional  and 
non-professional  staff,  and  the  community  as  an  educational  agency,  along  with 
an  opportunity  to  use  the  evaluation  instrument  in  a  selected  school  distnct  in 
terms  of  established  educational  objectives 

EL    553  SUPERVISION  AND  THE  IMPROVEMENT  OF 

INSTRUCTION  IN  THE  ELEMENTARY  SCHOOL  3  s.h 

Purposes,  patterns,  processes,  and  products  of  the  supervision  of  instruction 

with  emphasis  on  the  supervisor  as  the  educational  leader  whose  concern  is 

improvement   of   instruction   through   the   on-going   growth  and   professional 

development  of  his  staff. 

EL    554  ADMINISTRATION  OF  THE  ELEMENTARY  SCHOOL  3  s.h 

Principles  and  techniques  of  elementary  school  administration  through  review 
of  qualities,  training  and  experience  background,  and  human  relationship 
qualities  Administrators  will  be  viewed  as  leaders  of  teachers,  children,  non- 
professional staff  and  the  community  to  develop  and  maintain  the  best  educational 
plant  possible. 

EL    555  RECENT  TRENDS  IN  HUMAN  DEVELOPMENT 

AND  LEARNING  3  s.h 

Concerned  with  recent  literature  and  experimental  works  in  field  of  learning. 
Studies  will  be  limited  to  pre  and  elementary  school  child.  Characteristics  of 
learner,  learning  situation  and  motivation  will  be  stressed. 

EL    556  SCHOOL  ADMINISTRATION  3  s.h 

Designed  as  basic  course  in  school  administration,  intended  to  serve  as  an 
introduction  to  principles  and  practices  of  school  administration  for  students  who 
aspire  to  a  supervisory  or  administrative  position  in  public  schools  Attention  on 
human  aspects  of  educational  administration 

EL    557  ELEMENTARY  SCHOOL  PERSONNEL 

ADMINISTRATION  3  S.h 

Designed  to  provide  background  for  potential  principles  and  supervisors  in 
matters  pertaining  to  functions  of  various  types  of  personnel  employed  in 
elementary  school.  Knowledge  of  organizational  practices  for  proper  and  effective 
utilization  of  personnel  and  recognition  of  administrator's  role  in  providing 
services  to  both  staff  and  pupils. 


Program  Curricula  - 
Elementary  Education 


EL    558  SCHOOL  LAW  AND  NEGOTIATIONS  3  S.h. 

An  understanding  of  legal  principles  as  they  pertain  to  functions  of  personnel 
in  public  school  system  and  to  persons  engaged  in  education  Study  of  statutory 
enactments,  review  of  court  actions  through  case  studies,  and  analysis  of 
collective  negotiation  laws  and  cases 

EL    560  EARLY  CHILDHOOD  STUDY  TECHNIQUES 

AND  ASSESSMENT  TOOLS  3sh 

Scientific  method  of  studying  children  between  ages  of  three  through  eight 
years,  inclusive  Through  studying  one  child  in  depth,  student  learns  to  observe, 
record,  and  analyze  pertinent  information  in  order  to  make  multiple  hypotheses, 
and  to  suggest  ways  to  help  children  toward  positive  self  development  Tests  tor 
assessment  of  the  young  child  in  areas  of  perceptions,  concept  development,  self- 
inventories,  general  intellectual  ability,  readiness,  and  academic  ability  Students 
must  select  and  have  one  child  available  as  subject  for  in-depth  study 

EL    561  EARLY  CHILDHOOD  PHILOSOPHY  & 

CURRICULUM  (MATERIALS  3  S.h. 

Introduces  students  to  philosophy  and  historical  background  of  pre-school 
through  primary  education  (ages  three  through  eight  years,  inclusive)  and  their 
influences  on  current  programs  and  research,  including  current  curnculum 
patterns  of  early  childhood  programs,  materials  available,  and  program  planning 
for  optimal  development  of  children 

EL    562  EARLY  CHILDHOOD  FIELD  STUDY  EXPERIENCES  3  s  h 

Direct  observation  and  participation  of  teaching  in  nursery-kindergarten, 
federal,  state,  or  local  supported  early  childhood  programs.  Seminar  sessions  will 
study  appropriate  programs  with  immediate  application  in  a  classroom 
Constructing  and  presenting  appropriate  learning  devices  and  audio-visual  aids  to 
meet  individual  differences  and  needs  of  children  in  the  classroom  Close 
supportive  relationships  with  parents  and  community  will  be  stressed 

EL    577  SUPERVISED  INTERNSHIP  3-6  sh 

Students  selected  for  this  program  receive  continuing  individualized  guidance 
and  supervision  from  an  intern  consultant  during  the  semester  Registration  only 
by  permission  of  Graduate  Committee 

EL    578  SEMINAR  IN  ELEMENTARY  EDUCATION  INTERNSHIP       3-6  s.h 

Consultants  who  are  specialists  in  their  fields  will  be  invited  to  discuss  with 
interns  problems  related  to  their  intern  teaching  or  work  experience.  Registration 
only  by  permission  of  Graduate  Commission 


EL    580  SEMINAR  IN  ADVANCED  RESEARCH  1-3  sh 

Enrollment  will  be  by  special  application  only  and  will  be  limited  to  advanced 
post-master's  students  Most  work  will  be  on  an  individual  or  small  seminar  basis 
with  staff  and  will  be  concerned  with  readings,  research,  and  evaluation  of 
proposed  research 

EL    599  INDEPENDENT  STUDY  IN  ELEMENTARY  EDUCATION       1-3  Sh. 

Students  will  select  one  or  more  topics  which  are  of  critical  importance  in 

elementary  education  and  will  meet  staff  members  for  independent  reading,  study, 

analysis,  and  evaluation  Registration  only  by  permission  of  Graduate  Committee. 


62  —  Indiana  University  of  Pennsylvania 


ENGLISH 


MASTER  OF  ARTS  AND  MASTER  OF  EDUCATION 

A  candidate  for  a  Master's  degree  in  English  may  choose  a 
program  leading  to  either  the  Master  of  Education  orthe  Master 
of  Arts.  The  choice  will  depend  on  the  background  of  the 
candidate  and  his  purpose  in  pursuing  graduate  study.  Both 
programs  share  a  common  aim  of  increasing  the  candidate's 
knowledge.of  English  language  and  literature  and  introducing 
him  to  the  discipline  of  advanced  study.  In  addition,  the  Master 
of  Education  degree  aims  at  preparing  teachers  for  public 
schools. 

After  a  student  is  admitted  to  the  graduate  school  the 
Director  of  Doctoral  Studies  will  consult  with  him  about  the 
scheduling  of  courses.  He  should  apply  for  candidacy  before  12 
credits  have  been  earned. 

I.  Research  Options 

The  writing  of  a  thesis  is  optional  for  both  the  M.A.  and  the 
M.Ed,  degree.  The  English  department  values  writing  and 
research;  however,  a  candidate's  decision  concerning  the  thesis 
should  be  made  on  the  basis  of  his  purposes  in  obtaining  the 
degree  and  the  extent  to  which  training  in  research  will  enhance 
both  his  professional  and  his  personal  goals.  Under  special 
circumstances  and  upon  request  from  the  Graduate  School,  a 
thesis  may  be  written  for  additional  credit  after  the  student  has 
already  completed  the  Master's  degree  without  a  thesis. 

II.  Master  of  Arts  In  English 

The  M.A.  degree  either  with  or  without  a  thesis  requires  a 


minimum  of  30  credits  beyond  the  bachelor's  degree.  The 
candidate  who  chooses  not  to  write  a  thesis  will  take  all  30 
credits  in  course  work.  Depending  upon  the  nature  of  the  thesis, 
the  candidate  who  chooses  to  do  research  will  take  either  3  or  6 
credit  hours  of  the  minimum  30  as  thesis  credits  and  the 
remainder  in  course  work. 

Required  of  all  M.A.  candidates  are  (1)  EN  580  and  (2)  a 
proficiency  in  a  single  language  in  addition  to  English.  The 
language  requirement  may  be  satisfied  by  acceptable 
undergraduate  credit  of  12  hours,  by  examination  through  the 
Foreign  Languages  Department  at  lUP,  or  by  the  Graduate 
School  Foreign  Language  Test  through  the  Educational  Testing 
Service,  Princeton. 

The  M.A.  candidate  may,  if  he  chooses,  apply  a  maximum  of  6 
hours  credit  in  a  related  field  (e.g.  history,  philosophy, 
psychology)  toward  satisfying  his  total  course  requirements.  All 
hours  remaining  from  the  minimum  30  hours  requirement  will 
be  satisfied  by  courses  listed  in  the  catalogue  EN  500  through 
EN  599. 

III.  Master  of  Education 

The  candidate  for  the  M.Ed,  has  the  same  thesis  options  as 
the  candidate  for  the  M.A.  The  M.Ed,  candidate  must  satisfy  the 
following  requirements:  (1)  A  Pennsylvania  Teacher's 
Certificate  in  English  or  its  equivalent  from  another  state  (2) 
Three  credit  hours  in  Humanistic  Studies:  any  course  from  FE 
511  through  FE  514  (3)  Three  credit  hours  in  Behavioral  Studies: 
EP  504,  EP  573,  EP  576,  EP  578,  EP  580,  CE  529,  CE  539,  or  SE 
531  (4)  Three  hours  in  Research:  GR  515  (5)  Six  hours 
Specialization  core:  EN  503  and  EN  593;  and  (6)  Three  hours  in 
bibliographical  studies:  EN  580. 

Depending  upon  his  choice  of  thesis  options,  the  candidate 


Program  Curricula  ■ 
English 


will  complete  his  30  hour  minimum  requirement  by  taking  from  6 
to  12  hours  of  electives,  chosen  from  courses  EN  500  through 
EN  599. 

There  is  no  foreign  language  requirement  for  the  M.Ed. 

DOCTOR  OF  PHILOSOPHY  PROGRAMS 

There  are  two  distinct  doctoral  programs  in  English,  one  in 
English  and  American  literature,  and  the  other  in  English 
Education  designed  for  English  teachers  in  the  community 
college.  Both  programs  lead  to  a  Doctor  of  Philosophy  in 
English. 
I.  Doctor  of  Philosophy  In  English  and  American  Literature 

The  program  leading  to  the  Doctor  of  Philosophy  in  English 
and  American  literature  is  designed  for  those  who  wish  to  teach 
at  the  four-year  college  or  university  level.  A  candidate  for  this 
degree  is  expected  to  acquire  a  broad  knowledge  in  limited 
areas  of  study  and  to  show  through  the  completion  of  an 
acceptable  dissertation  the  ability  to  conduct  an  independent 
investigation  of  a  topic  approved  by  the  department.  To  become 
a  candidate  the  applicant  must  meet  all  the  Graduate  School 
requirements  for  candidacy,  as  well  as  the  special  requirements 
of  the  English  department.  Admission  to  course  work  beyond 
the  Master's  degree  does  not  constitute  admission  to  candidacy 
for  the  Ph.D.  program.  No  specific  number  of  course  credits 
entitles  a  student  to  the  degree,  but  a  minimum  of  60  semester 
hours  of  credit,  exclusive  of  research  credits,  must  be  earned 
beyond  the  Bachelor's  degree.  Applications  for  candidacy  will 
be  reviewed  by  a  departmental  committee  after  eight  hours  of 
graduate  credit  have  been  earned  beyond  the  Master's  degree 
and  before  16  hours  have  been  completed.  In  determining 
whether  or  not  an  applicant  should  be  accepted  as  a  candidate 
for  the  degree  of  Doctor  of  Philosophy,  the  committee  will 


consider  his  scores  on  the  Graduate  Record  Examination,  his 
performance  in  course  work,  and,  whenever  applicable,  his 
performance  as  a  teaching-intern. 

On  application  for  candidacy,  the  candidate  will  be  assigned 
to  a  dissertation  committee  who  will  help  the  candidate  prepare 
a  plan  of  study  for  a  comprehensive  examination,  both  written 
and  oral,  which  will  be  taken  on  the  recommendation  of  the 
dissertation  committee  near  the  end  of  course  requirements  and 
before  registering  for  GD  650,  dissertation  credits. 

The  foreign  language  requirements  for  Ph.D.  candidates  in 
English  must  be  completed  before  the  comprehensive 
examination.  For  those  candidates  who  do  not  satisfy  this 
requirement  by  course  work,  the  Education  Testing  Service 
administers  examinations  in  French,  German,  Russian  and 
Spanish.  All  other  language  examinations  (and  in  special  cases 
those  in  French,  German,  Russian,  and  Spanish)  are 
administered  by  the  Foreign  Languages  Departments  of  the 
University.  The  candidate's  dissertation  committee  will  make 
the  final  decision  about  what  languages  to  accept  and  how 
much  proficiency  to  require. 

On  approval  of  the  dissertation  committee,  a  candidate  may 
take  as  many  as  15  graduate  hours  of  course  work  in  a  minor 
field  in  support  of  his  major  research  interest. 

Candidates  must  demonstrate  the  capacity  to  teach 
effectively,  either  in  the  departmental  teacher-internship 
program,  or  through  other  acceptable  teaching  experience. 
English  is  required  of  all  candidates. 

A  complete  description  of  the  Ph.D.  program  in  English  and 
American   literature  can   be  obtained  from  the  English 
Department  or  from  the  Graduate  School. 
II.  Doctor  of  Philosophy  In  English  Education 

The  program  which  leads  to  the  Doctor  of  Philosophy  in 


64  —  Indiana  University  of  Pennsylvania 


English  Education  is  designed  for  teaching  English  in  the 
community  college.  The  pre-service  candidate  for  this  degree  is 
expected  to  acquire  a  thorough  understanding  of  the 
community  college  as  an  institution  and  to  demonstrate,  largely 
through  his  semester's  internship  at  a  community  college,  his 
ability  to  teach  effectively. 

The  in-service  candidate  for  this  degree  may  have  the 
internship  waived  after  a  description  and  evaluation  of  his 
teaching  experiences  have  been  accepted. 

Upon  admission  to  the  program,  the  candidate  will  be 
assigned  to  a  Program/Evaluation  Committee  which  will,  in 
consultation  with  the  candidate,  work  out  a  program  of  study. 
The  Program/Evaluation  Committee  will  review  also  the 
candidate's  application  for  candidacy,  which  must  be  submitted 
after  eight  hours  of  graduate  credit  have  been  earned  and  before 
16  hours  have  been  completed.  Another  function  of  the 
Program/Evaluation  Committee  will  be  to  prepare  a 
comprehensive  examination,  written  and  oral,  for  each 
candidate. 

Although  there  are  some  general  course  and  research 
requirements  for  this  degree,  they  may  be  waived  by  the 
student's  Program/Evaluation  Committee  if  they  believe  he  has 
already  acquired  the  information  or  specific  competencies 
which  these  courses  are  designed  to  communicate  or  develop. 
These  general  course  requirements  are  as  follows:  EN  589;  EN 
592;  EN  503;  EN  591;  nine  hours  of  elective  credits  in 
psychology,  sociology,  learning  resources,  etc.;  a  dissertation 
related  to  English  education;  a  semester's  internship  at  a 
community  college. 

A  complete  description  of  this  degree  program  can  be 
obtained  from  the  English  Department  or  Graduate  Office. 


COURSE  DESCRIPTIONS 


EN   500  HISTORY  OF  THE  ENGLISH  LANGUAGE  3  s.h. 

Development  of  phonology,  syntax  and  lexicon  as  well  as  rhetorical  theories, 
from  Old  English  through  Modern  English. 

EN   501  Af^ERICAN  ENGLISH  GRAMf^AR  3  s,h. 

Phonology,  morphology  and  syntax  of  present-day  English,  various 
approaches  to  analysis  of  English  Grammar,  and  detailed  consideration  of 
problems  of  dialect  and  appropriateness. 

EN   502  THE  PSYCHOLOGY  OF  LANGUAGE  3  S  h 

An  introduction  to  psycholinguistics  for  the  English  specialist,  treating 
language  as  a  code,  acquisition  of  language,  and  patterns  of  normal  and  aberrant 
human  language  behavior. 

EN   503  LINGUISTICS  AND  THE  ENGLISH  TEACHER  3sh 

Effect  of  modern  linguistic  theory  on  teaching  of  English,  with  special 
emphasis  on  reading,  composition,  stylistic  analysis,  and  dialect  interference 

EN   504  SEMINAR  IN  LINGUISTICS  3  s,h. 

Concentrates  on  a  specific  aspect  of  linguistics  (e.g.  sociolinguistics)  to 
provide  stimulus  for  independent  study 

EN   510  SPECIAL  TOPICS  IN  LANGUAGE 

AND  LITERATURE  3  s.h 

Allows  students  to  pursue  subjects  such  as  textual  criticism,  prosody,  and 
computers  and  literature  not  covered  in  detail  in  existing  courses. 

EN   511  MAJOR  WRITERS  3  s.h. 

Concentrates  on  one  or  two  major  writers  of  American  or  British  literature, 
such  as  Twain.  James.  Wordsworth,  Keats,  etc 

EN   512  THE  AMERICAN  RENAISSANCE  3sh 

Works  of  major  writers  in  mid-nmeteenth  century  America 

EN   513  NATURALISM  AND  REALISM  IN 

AMERICAN  FICTION  3  s.h. 

EN   514  MODERN  AMERICAN  FICTION  3sh 

Special  studies  in  such  figures  as  Dreiser.  Anderson.  Fitzgerald,  Lewis,  Dos 
Passes,  and  Wolfe. 


Program  Curricula  —  65 
English 


EN  515  TWENTIETH  CENTURY  AMERICAN  DRAMA  3sh 

EN   516  SEMINAR  IN  AMERICAN  LITERATURE  TO  1870  3  S  h 

Major  writers  m  Puritan  period,  early  republic,  and  other  phases  up  to  and 
including  the  Civil  War 

EN  517  SEMINAR  IN  MODERN  AMERICAN  LITERATURE 

(from  1870)  3  s  h. 

Study   of   particular   author  or   group   of   authors:    literary  genre,    literary 
movennent;  restricted  period  of  time,  etc 

EN   561  CHAUCER  3  S.h. 

Major  works  of  Geoffrey  Chaucer  are  studied  as  literature  with  emphasis  upon 
pronunciation,  versification,  language,  and  textual  problems 

EN   566  SHAKESPEARE  3  s  h 

In  addition  to  the  plays  and  the  scholarship  on  them,  study  of  the  historical  and 
theatrical  influences  that  affected  Shakespeare. 

EN   570  MILTON  3  S.h. 

Major   prose  and   poetry  of  John   Milton   and  the  religious  and   political 
controversies  reflected  in  Milton's  work 

EN   571  SEVENTEENTH  CENTURY  PROSE  AND  POETRY  3  s  h 

Major  writers  from  the  death  of  Elizabeth  to  1660.  excluding  Shakespeare  and 
Milton 

EN   572  EIGHTEENTH  CENTURY  PROSE  AND  POETRY  3sh 

Major  figures  such  as  Dryden.  Pope,  Swift.  Johnson.  Defoe.  Fielding,  Sterne. 
Smollett.  Burke,  and  Godwin 

EN   573  ROMANTIC  PROSE  AND  POETRY  3  s  h 

Works  of  the  major  poets  and  essayists  from  1798  to  1832 

EN   574  VICTORIAN  PROSE  AND  POETRY  3  s  h 

Examines  major  social,  political,  economic,  and  religious  issues  in  the  works  of 
the  leading  poets  and  prose  writers  from  1832  to  1890 

EN   575  SEMINAR  IN  BRITISH  LITERATURE  TO  1500  3  s  h. 

Intensive  study  of  some  major  works  of  Old  or  Middle  English. 

EN   576  SEMINAR  IN  BRITISH  LITERATURE  — 

RENAISSANCE  (1500  to  1660)  3  s  h 

Investigation  of  an  area  of  English  Renaissance  that  is  not  cu.rently  treated  in 


course  work. 

EN   577  SEMINAR  IN  SHAKESPEARE  3  s.h. 

Emphasis  on  individual  study  and  research  in  pnmary  and  secondary  sources. 

EN   578  SEMINAR  IN  THE  BRITISH  NOVEL  3sh 

Focuses  on  novels  of  a  given  century;  a  thematic  focus  that  ignores  time 

divisions  is  sometimes  used 

EN   579  SEMINAR  IN  BRITISH  DRAMA  3  S  h. 

Ranges  from  medieval  to  modern  drama;  a  thematic  focus  may  sometimes  be 
used. 

EN   580  BIBLIOGRAPHICAL  METHODS  IN  ENGLISH  3  s.h. 

Practical  training  in  special  methods  and  materials  of  research  in  English. 
Required  of  all  majors  in  English  except  those  taking  the  Ph  D  in  English 
Education  Should  be  taken  early  in  the  program 

EN   581  LITERARY  BRITAIN  3  or  6  s.h. 

A  three-  or  six-week's  tour  of  major  sites  important  to  English  literature. 
Always  includes  London,  Stratford,  and  Cambridge 

EN   582  CLASSICAL  LITERATURE  3  S.h. 

Ranges  from  drama  to  lyrics  and  epic  poetry  in  translation. 

EN   583  MODERN  EUROPEAN  FICTION  3  s.h. 

Major  fiction  writers  of  the  twentieth  century  exclusive  of  British  and 
American 

EN   584  MODERN  POETRY  3  s  h. 

Study  of  Modern  British  or  American  or  European  poetry,  or  any  combination 

of  them, 

EN   585  CRITICISM  3  S.h. 

Major  statements  of  critical  theory  from  Aristotle  onward.  Aims  are  both 
historical  and  aesthetic 

EN   586  BLACK  LITERATURE  IN  AMERICA  3  S.h. 

Chronological  study  of  Black  American  writing  for  students  who  have  had  little 
introduction  to  Black  literature   Emphasis  on  twentieth  century 

EN   587  LITERATURE  AND  THE  FILM  3  s.h. 

Explores  relationship  between  film  and  literature  and  the  influences  that  each 
has  had  on  the  other 


66  —  Indiana  University  of  Pennsylvania 


EN  588         WORKSHOP  IN  PLAY  PRODUCTION  (Summers  only)  6  s.h 

Various  styles  of  production  and  of  principles  of  directing  in  preparation  of 
plays  for  a  high  school  audience  The  summer  theater  is  used  as  a  lab  for 
observation  and  participation.  One  day  of  lecture  and  library  work,  four  days  of 
lab. 

EN   589  ORIENTATION  AND  FIELD  EXPERIENCE  IN  THE 

COMMUNITY  COLLEGE  3  S  h 

Examines  the  community  college  from  historical  and  philosophical 

perspectives.   Includes  observations  of   classes   and  interviews  with  staff  at 

community  colleges    Specifically  for  students  preparing  for  careers  in  the 

community  college.  To  be  taken  early  in  the  program. 

EN   591  MULTI-MEDIA  AND  THE  TEACHING  OF  ENGLISH  3sh 

Instructs  students  in  methods  of  using  media  in  teaching  of  language, 
composition,  and  literature,  as  well  as  the  design  and  production  of  media 
materials. 


FOREIGN  LANGUAGES 


EN   592  SEMINAR  IN  TEACHING  BASIC 

COMMUNICATION  SKILLS 
Instructs   students    in   teaching   of   reading   or 
Reading/writing  taught  in  alternate  semesters. 


3-6  s.h. 
of   writing   to  adults 


EN   593  SEMINAR  IN  TEACHING  ENGLISH  IN 

THE  SECONDARY  SCHOOL  3  s  h 

Explores  recent  developments  in  teaching  of  language,  composition,  and 
literature 

EN   598  INTERNSHIP  3-12  sh 

Practical  experience  in  the  student's  area  of  interest,  working  under 
professional  supervision  on  the  job  Special  permission  only,  dependent  upon 
needs  of  student's  program  as  well  as  personal  and  academic  qualifications 

EN   599  INDEPENDENT  STUDY  1-3  S.h. 

Study  in  depth  of  topics  not  available  through  regular  course  work  Student 
works  with  supervising  professor  on  carefully  planned,  student-initiated  project 
Prior  approval  necessary 


GERMAN 


The  programs  leading  to  the  M.A.  and  M.Ed,  degrees  in 
German  have  a  number  of  goals  in  common  and  overlap  in 
several  areas.  Both  programs  seek  to  improve  the  candidate's 
proficiency  in  German  and  to  increase  his  knowledge  of 
German  culture  and  civilization.  While  sharing  common  aims, 
each  program  is  flexible  enough  to  be  tailored  to  the  individual 
candidate's  purposes  and  desires  for  pursuing  graduate  study. 

A  minimum  of  30  semester  hours  of  graduate  work  is 
required,  including  two  semester  hours  of  Elements  of  Research 
(GD  515)  for  the  M.Ed.  The  thesis  is  optional  (0-6  credits).  The 
remainder  of  the  courses  is  to  be  taken  in  areas  directly  related 
to  the  student's  main  field  of  study.  All  candidates  for  advanced 
degrees  in  German  will  also  demonstrate  theirachievement  and 
proficiency  by  successfully  passing  comprehensive  oral  and 
written  examinations  on  all  graduate  work  in  German 
completed  at  lUP. 

Candidates  for  the  Master  of  Arts  degree  must  earn  a 
minimum  of  18  semester  hours  of  credit  in  German  courses  (GM 
510  through  GM  553)  and  provide  evidence  of  proficiency  in  a 
second  foreign  language.  Candidates  for  the  Master  of 
Education  degree  must  earn  a  minimum  of  15  semester  hours  in 
German  courses  and  successfully  complete  one  course  in  the 
area  of  Foundations  of  Education. 


NOTE:  Special  Topics  in  Language  and  Literature,  and  Major  Writers,  as  well  as 
all  seminars,  may  be  scheduled  more  than  once,  because  subject  matter 
will  change  with  each  offering  of  the  course  More  complete  course 
descriptions  available  from  the  department. 


Duisburg  program:  lUP  students  can  take  up  to  10  credits  at 
the  University  of  Duisburg  in  the  Federal  Republic  of  Germany 
for  a  modest  $75/semester. 


COURSE  DESCRIPTIONS 


GM510  HISTORY  OF  THE  GERMAN  LANGUAGE  3  credits 

History  and  development  of  German  language,  with  special  emphasis  on 

relationships  with  English   Analysis  of  annals  in  Gothic.  Old  High  German,  and 

Middle  High  German  using  methods  of  historical  and  contemporary  linguistics. 


GM511  ADVANCED  COMPOSITION  &  STYLISTICS  3  credits 

Development  of  abilities  in  German  composition  and  stylistics  which  will  lead 
to  greater  facility  and  accuracy  in  writing  German. 


GM512  ADVANCED  ORAL  PRACTICE  3  credits 

Designed  to  achieve  fluency  and  accuracy  in  spoken  German  by  using  various 
media  to  provide  framework  for  guided  discussions  of  current  topics. 


Program  Curricula  —  67 

English 
Foreign  Languages 


SPANISH 


The  Spanish  Division  of  the  Depatlment  of  Foreign  Lan- 
guages offers  programs  of  study  leading  to  either  the  Master  of 
Arts  or  the  Master  of  Education  degree  in  Spanish  Language 
and  Literature.  The  M.A.  degree  is  recommended  to  those  who 
plan  to  pursue  studies  towards  the  Ph.D.  degree.  The  M.Ed, 
degree  in  Spanish  is  designed  especially  for  those  who  plan  a 
career  as  secondary  school  teachers  or  those  already  employed 
as  teachers  in  a  school  system.  Geared  to  both  full  and  part-time 
students,  since  its  inception  in  1966,  the  program  has  served 
more  than  100  graduate  students. 


GM513         GERMAN  PHONETICS  3  credits 

Analysis  of  physiological  and  linguistic  factors  of  spoken  German.  Practiceon 
critical  areas  of  German  pronunciation  and  intonation,  with  special  emphasis  on 
potential  interferences  between  German  and  English 


GM  530  SEMINAR  ON  GERMAN  CULTURE  3  credits 

In-depth  study  of  German  culture  from  either  an  historical,  fine  arts 
perspective  or  from  an  anthropological,  sociological  point  of  view.  Independent 
research  with  oral  and/or  written  reports  required 


GM540  SEMINAR  ON  GERMAN  LITERATURE  3  credits 

In-depth  study  of  particular  author,  or  genre  requiring  independent  research. 

Seminar  topics  to  vary  on  a  rotating  basis,  depending  on  staff  and  student  interest 


GM  553  ADVANCED  METHODOLOGY  3  credits 

Demonstrations  and  discussions  of  current  teaching  strategies  to  provide 
teachers  of  German  with  greater  expertise  in  dealing  with  problem  in  motivation, 
articulation,  and  other  pedagogical  concerns  Topics  to  vary  from  time  to  time, 
depending  on  background  and  experience  of  participants  involved. 


REQUIREMENTS  FOR  THE  MASTER  OF  ARTS 

DEGREE  IN  SPANISH  LANGUAGE 

AND  LITERATURE 

Candidates  for  the  MA.  degree  in  Spanish  must  successfully 
complete  a  minimum  of  30  semester  hours  of  which  at  least  24 
s.h.  are  to  represent  the  area  of  concentration  (Spanish)  as  well 
as  a  minimum  of  four  different  literary  epochs  chosen  from 
courses  in  Peninsular  and/or  Spanish  American  literature. 
Required  courses  for  the  M.A.  degree  are:  SP  500  or  SP  501  and 
SP  506.  Thesis  is  optional;  if  the  candidate  chooses  the  "No 
Thesis"  option,  he/she  must  complete  33s.h.  with  a  minimum  of 
27  s.h.  in  the  area  of  concentration.  For  admission  to  degree 
candidacy  the  student  must  demonstrate  a  reading  knowledge 
of  a  second  foreign  language  acceptable  to  the  department. 


68  —  Indiana  University  of  Pennsylvania 


REQUIREMENTS  FOR  THE  MASTER  OF 
EDUCATION  DEGREE  IN  SPANISH  LANGUAGE 
AND  LITERATURE 

Candidates  for  the  M.Ed,  degree  in  Spanish  are  required  to 
successfully  complete  30  semester  hours  with  distribution  as 
follows:  A  minimum  of  15  s.h.  in  Spanish  area  studies  which 
must  represent  courses  chosen  from  at  least  three  (3)  different 
literary  epochs  in  Peninsular  and/or  Spanish  American 
Literatures.  One  (1)  course  in  Foundations  of  Education  (3  s.h.) 
to  be  selected  from  among:  FE  511-514.  One  course  (3  s.h.)  to 
be  chosen  among  the  following  Behavioral  Studies:  EP504,  EP 
573,  EP576,  EP  578,  EP  580,  CE  529,  CE539or  CE  531.  GR  515 
Elements  of  Research  is  required  of  all  students  in  the  N/I.Ed. 
Program.  Two  (2)  courses  or  6  s.h.  from  among  the  following:  FE 
515,  LR500,  SP505.  Required  courses  in  Spanish  are:  SP500or 
SP  501  and  SP  506.  If  the  student  chooses  the  "No  Thesis" 
option,  he/she  must  then  complete  1 8  s.h.  in  Spanish  or  a  total  of 
33  s.h.  For  admission  to  degree  candidacy  the  student  must 
demonstrate  a  satisfactory  reading  knowledge  of  a  second 
foreign  language  acceptable  to  the  department. 


CURRICULUM  FOR  THE  M.A.  AND  M.ED. 

DEGREES  IN  SPANISH  LANGUAGE 

AND  LITERATURE 

I.  Spanish  Language  and  Literature  (Area  of  Concentration) 
Courses  SP  500  through  SP  599  provide  subject  matter 
content  in  the  area  of  specialization  for  both  the  Master  of 
Arts  and  the  Master  of  Education  degrees.  M.A.  candidates 
are  to  complete  24  to  30  s.h.  and  M.Ed,  candidates  a  mini- 


mum of  15  to  18  s.h.  chosen  from  these  courses  some  of 
which  represent  required  courses.  FL  525  Valladolid  Pro- 
gram for  which  6  graduate  s.h.  credit  will  be  allotted  is 
optional  provided  that  the  candidate  has  not  elected  the 
Valladolid  program  as  an  undergraduate. 

II.  Related  Studies 
A  limited  number  of  s.h.  graduate  credit  may  be  elected  from 
related  areas  of  study  with  departmental  approval. 


COURSE  DESCRIPTIONS 

FL    521  LANGUAGE  AND  SOCIETY  3  s.h. 

Salient  facts  of  language  and  its  fundamental  role  in  development  and 
continuity  of  society  and  culture,  including  language  families  and  their 
characteristics,  factors  of  linguistic  change  and  development,  reciprocal 
influences  of  culture  and  language,  linguistic  borrowing,  psycholinguistics,  and 
systems  of  writing.  (Open  to  majors  and  non-majors.) 

FL    525  FOREIGN  STUDY  -  VALLADOLID  (Optional)  6  S.h. 

Intensive  study  of  Spanish  language  and  culture  at  the  University  of  Valladolid. 

Spam,  from  approximately  February  1  to  July  1 .  For  detailed  description  consult 

the  lUP  publication  "The  Pennsylvania  —  Valladolid  Study  in  Spain  Program  " 

SP  480  FOREIGN  STUDY  —  JALAPA  (Optional) 

Intensive  study  of  Spanish  language  and  Mexican  culture  at  the  University  of 
Veracruz  in  Jalapa.  Mexico,  from  approximately  July  7  to  August  20.  Credits 
subject  to  approval  of  the  Director  of  the  Program. 

Hispanic  Graduate  Studies 

Series  500-506:  Philology,  Stylistics,  Grammar  and  Methodology 

SP   500  HISTORY  OF  THE  SPANISH  LANGUAGE  3  S.h. 

Traces  phonological,  morphological,  lexical  and  syntactical  evolution  of 
Castilian  dialect  from  its  origins  in  Vulgar  Latin  through  its  development, 
perfection  and  ultimate  recognition  as  the  official  language  of  Spain  and  Spanish 
America.  Places  Castilian  linguistically  with  relation  to  other  Romance  Languages 
and  considers  features  peculiar  to  Spanish  of  Latin  America. 


Program  Curricula  —  69 
Foreign  Languages 


SP   501  ADVANCED  GRAMMAR,  COMPOSITION 

AND  CONVERSATION  3  s.h. 

Advanced  grammar,  composition  and  oral  fluency  intended  to  substantially 

improve  understanding  of  Spanish  grammar  and  syntax,  increase  vocabulary  and 

command  of  language,  and  to  provide  opportunity  for  acquisition  of  poise  and 

ease  of  self-expression 

SP   505  METHODOLOGY  OF  FOREIGN 

LANGUAGE  TEACHING  3  s  h. 

Improvement    of    teaching    skills   and   an    increased    understanding    and 

awareness  of  implications  of  current  research  to  foreign  language  teaching  and 

learning  theory  as  well  as  development  of  strategies  for  testing  and  evaluation  of 

student  learning  and  exploration  of  curricular  innovations. 

SP   506  METHODS  OF  RESEARCH,  CRITICISM. 

AND  STYLISTICS  3sh 

Acquaints  students  with  tools  of  research  in  the  field:  MLA  style  sheet, 
histories  of  literature,  historical  grammars,  dictionaries,  literary  criticisms, 
recognized  collections  of  literary  texts,  critical  editionsand  monograph  studies  as 
well  as  various  scholarly  journals  devoted  to  romance  philology  and  literatures 
Introduction  to  history  of  Spanish  literary  criticism  and  to  stylistics  as  a  tool  of 
literary  analysis  applied  to  representative  works  of  various  epoch  styles. 


Spanish  Peninsular  Literature 


Series  510-550 

SP   510  MEDIEVAL  SPANISH  LITERATURE  3  s.h. 

Reading  and  discussion  of  various  medieval  genres:  epic  poetry  (Juglaria  and 
clerecia);  lyric  and  didactic  poetry;  prose  (Alfonso  X  and  selections  from  the 
Cronica  general,  the  Partidas.  the  Canligas,  etc.;  Juan  Manuel  and  the  apologue); 
Danza  general  de  la  Muerte.  the  debate  and  the  medieval  drama. 

SP   515  PHOTO-RENAISSANCE  LETTERS  AND 

MASTERPIECES  3  s.h 

Critical  appreciation  of  transitional  literary  forms  of  XV  century  Spain:  poetry 
and  the  Cancioneros  and  the  Romancero;  prose  (history,  biography  and  satiric- 
didactic  literature,  apologues)  Special  emphasis  on  Libra  de  buen  amor  and  La 
Celestina. 

SP   520  RENAISSANCE  AND  HUMANISM  3  s.h 

Consideration   of  cultural   contributions  of  Spanish   Christian   Humanism 


together  with  a  careful  study  of  Renaissance  lyric  poetry  (Italianate  and  traditional 
veins):  the  epic;  the  novel  (in  its  various  forms);  Pre-Lopesque  theater;  the 
dialogue;  ascetic  and  mystical  prose  and  poetry;  history. 

SP   525  THE  SPANISH  BAROQUE  3  S.h. 

An  insight  into  typical  Baroque  themes,  motifs  and  stylistic  devices  through 

analysis  and  interpretation  of  important  works  of  XVII  century  authors   Poetry 

(lyric  and  epic);  prose  (novel  and  novella);  literary  criticism  and  polemics;  drama. 

SP  526  GOLDEN  AGE  DRAMA  3  s.h. 

Readings  and  interpretations  of  major  dramatists  (Lope  and  Calderon)  and 
examination  of  XVII  century  drama,  its  peculiar  national  character,  and  its 
relationship  to  contemporary  society  and  culture. 

SP   530  NEOCLASSICISM  AND  ROMANTICISM  3  s.h 

Compares  and  contrasts  cultural  and  ideological  expression  of  XVIII  century 
Spain  —  both  French  cultural  influence  and  popular  reaction  to  the  trend  —  as 
manifested  in  the  prose  (polemic,  erudite,  narrative  and  philosophic),  poetry  and 
theater  of  the  period  to  artist  and  literary  aesthetics  of  the  first  half  of  XIX  century 
Spain  as  reflected  in  poetry,  novel,  drama  and  literary  preceptive  of  her  imported 
Romanticism  together  with  an  appreciation  of  the  late  romantic  Becquer 

SP   535  COSTUMBRISM,  REALISM  AND  NATURALISM  3  s.h. 

Studies  and  analysis  of  "Articulos  de  costumbres"  and  especially  several 
trends  in  the  novel  of  latter  half  of  the  XIX  century  in  Spain.  (Fernan  Caballero. 
Alarcon.  Valera,  Pereda,  Palacio  Valdes.  Pardo  Bazan.  Blasco  Ibanez,  Clarin  and 
Perez  Galdos). 

SP   540  GENERATION  OF  1898  3  s.h. 

A  critical  excursion  into  minds  of  the  late  XIX  and  early  XX  century  novelists 
and  thinkers  and  their  works.  Emphasis  on  novels  and  essays  of  Unamuno, 
Ganivet.  Azorin.  Baroja,  Valle-lnclan,  Ortega  y  Gasset  and  Perez  de  Ayala. 

SP   545  MODERNISM.  CONTEMPORARY  AND 

POST-CONTEMPORARY  POETRY  3  s.h. 

Study  and  analysis  of  lyric  poetry  in  Spain  from  Modernism  and  its  evolution  to 
present 

SP   550  SPANISH  LITERATURE  OF  THE  XX  CENTURY  3  s  h 

Trends  in  Spanish  Novel  after  Civil  War:  A)  1940-1961:  Tramendismo  and 
testimonial  novel;  Social  Realism  and  Objectivism  B)  1962  to  present:  reaction 
against  Social  Realism  and  Objectivism:  new  tendancies  C)  short  story  0)  study 
and  interpretation  of  Spanish  theater  from  generation  of  1898  to  present. 


70  —  Indiana  University  of  Pennsylvania 


Spanish  American  Literature  and  Culture 

Series  555-595 

SP   555  PRE-COLUMBIAN  LITERATURE  AND  SPANISH 

AMERICAN  CIVILIZATION  3  s.h. 

Literature,  art  myth  and  thought  o(  Indian  civilizations  of  Latin  America  with 

emphasis  on  Aztecs.  Mayas  and  Incas  as  well  as  history  and  culture  of  Spanish 

America,  Spanish  American  character,  traditions  and  ideology  from  its  origins  to 

the  present. 

SP  560  COLONIAL  PERIOD  3  s  h 

Representative  chroniclers,  poets  and  dramatists  from  the  letters  of  Columbus 
to  end  of  the  XVI  century  together  with  a  study  of  various  literary  genres  during  the 
XVII  and  XVIII  centuries  in  Spanish  America  with  special  emphasis  on  Baroque 
and  Neoclassical  trends 

SP   565  ROMANTICISM  AND  GAUCHESQUE  LITERATURE  3  s  h 

A  detailed  study  of  the  Romantic  period,  its  European  influences  and  unique 
characteristics  of  Romanticism  in  Spanish  America  with  representative  poets, 
novelists  and  essayists  read  against  the  XIX  century  historical  background. 
Development  of  Gauchesque  genre  in  Argentina  and  its  characteristics, 
interrelated  with  the  geographical,  historical  and  social  background  with 
emphasis  on  Gauchesque  poetry 

SP   570  MODERNISM  3  s.h. 

Modernistic  movement  of  Spanish  American  literature  history,  and  its  relation 
to  certain  European  artistic  trends  and  movements  Aesthetic  principles  of 
modernism  together  with  its  renovation  in  themes,  vocabulary,  syntax  and 
versification  will  be  seen  as  reflected  in  the  criticism  and  works  of  the  movement's 
outstanding  authors. 

SP   575  POST-MODERNISM  &  AVANTE-GARDE  POETRY  3  s.h 

A  study  of  the  reaction  against  modernism  as  characterized  by  new  tendencies 
of  post  modernistic  poetry,  followed  by  an  analysis  of  historical  and  socio-cultural 
situation  of  "avante-garde"  movements  Discussion  of  characteristics  of  works  of 
major  Spanish  American  "avant-garde  "  poets 

SP   580  REGIONALISTIC  NOVEL  3  s.h. 

A  study  of  the  "maestros"  of  Spanish  American  regionalism  of  the  early  XX 
century,  including  novelists  Gallegos,  Rivera,  Azuela,  Guiraldes,  Icaza,  Alger'a, 
etc 

SP   585  XX  CENTURY  SPANISH  AMERICAN  LITERATURE  3sh 

Literary  expressions  in  Spanish  America  from  end  of  the  XIX  century  to 
present. 


SP   590  CONTEMPORARY  NOVEL  AND  SHORT  STORY  3  s  h 

Major  contemporary  novelists  and  short-story  writers  (Borges,  Onetti, 
Cortazer,  Carpentier,  Rulfo,  Garcia  Ma'rquez,  etc  ).  with  an  examination  of  their 
major  themes,  techniques  and  stylistic  features. 

SP   595  THE  SPANISH  AMERICAN  ESSAY  3  S.h. 

Development  of  literary  and  ideological  essay  from  the  last  two  decades  of  the 

XIX  century  to  present  with  stress  on  contemporary  period.  Essays  will  be  read 

both  as  a  literary  genre  and  as  a  vehicle  of  ideas  against  the  historical  background. 


SP   581  SPECIAL  TOPICS 

Study  of  an  author,  genre,  epoch  or  literary  movement. 


INDEPENDENT  STUDY 


3  s.h. 


FOUNDATIONS  OF  EDUCATION 

The  Foundations  of  Education  Department  seeks  to  expose 
its  Students  to  a  systematic  inqultY  into  educational  theories 
and  practices  through  a  philosophical,  sociological,  historical, 
and  comparative  analysis.  Foundations  study  generates  criteria 
for  judgment  and  helps  to  formulate  a  Gestalt  of  various 
subjects.  It  also  helps  to  develop  an  integral  and  cross-sectional 
view  of  education,  while  augmenting  the  construction, 
clarification,  and  evaluation  of  educational  goals  necessary  for 
development  of  effective  methods  of  instruction.  Furthermore,  it 
broadens  perspectives  and  deepens  analyses  of  policies  and 
programs  which  help  educational  personnel  find  meaning  and 
value  in  all  educational  activities. 

COURSE  DESCRIPTIONS 

FE    511  HISTORICAL  FOUNDATIONS  OF  EDUCATION  2  S.h. 

study  of  historical  development  of  American  education.  European  influences 

on  philosophies  and  practices  of  American  schools  will  serve  as  a  background. 


Emphasis  on  development  of  education  in  America  as  influenced  by  various 
individuals  and  schools  of  thought  Historical  trends  will  be  related  to  current 
problems  and  practices  in  education. 

FE    512  PHILOSOPHICAL  FOUNDATIONS  OF  EDUCATION  2sh 

Analysis  and  evaluation  of  basic  philosophies  and  their  impacts  upon 
education  Nature,  value,  means  and  ends  of  education  and  some  other 
fundamental  phases  of  schooling  will  be  thoroughly  examined  Stress  on 
essentials  enhancing  an  individual  working  philosophy  of  education;  basic  ideas 
heightening  a  sound  philosophy  for  American  schools 

FE    513  SOCIAL  FOUNDATIONS  OF  EDUCATION  2sh 

Social  and  cultural  forces  which  influence  education.  Particular  stress  on 
current  problems  as  they  relate  to  entire  educational  system  and  to  curricular 
problems  and  practices  In  today's  schools 

FE    514  COIVIPARATIVE  FOUNDATIONS  OF  EDUCATION  2sh 

Educational  theories  and  practices  in  different  nations  will  be  studied. 
Educational  purposes,  curriculum,  methods,  administration,  school  system, 
teacher  education,  and  other  educational  features  in  America  and  those  in  other 
nations,  will  be  analyzed,  evaluated  and  compared 

FE    515  DECISION-fvlAKING  INCURRICULUIVIDEVELOPIVIENT  3  S.h 

Analysis  of  philosophical,  sociological,  and  psychological  basis  for  creation  of 
curricular  patterns,  K-14.  Includes  utilization  of  technological  devices,  critical 
examination  of  basic  concepts  underlying  determination  of  objectives,  selection 
and  organization  of  subject  matter  and  of  learning  experiences  In  general  Current 
curriculum  research  will  be  analyzed,  as  will  existing  instructional  materials  and 
programs. 

FE    516  PROFESSIONAL  NEGOTIATIONS  IN  EDUCATION  3sh 

Study  dimension  of  professional  negotiations  process  in  educational  sector. 
Instructional  tools  will  be  case  studies,  lecture-discussion  and  reading 
assignments  Guidelines  of  public  policy  affecting  public  employer-employee 
relations  will  also  be  evaluated  and  analyzed. 

FE    595  INTERNATIONAL  EDUCATION  STUDIES  PROGRAM  3sh 

A  travel-seminar  conducted  in  a  foreign  country  and  designed  to  afford 
educators  and  students  of  education  the  opportunity  to  investigate  teaching- 
learning  process  in  cultural  settings  other  than  their  own  Particular  attention  to 
such  current  educational  issues  as  theories  of  curriculum  development, 
methodology,  teacher  education,  and  changing  value  systems 


FE    599  INDEPENDENT  STUDY 


1-6  s.h. 


Program  Curricula  —  71 
Foreign  Languages 
Foundations  of  Education 
Geography  &  Regional  Planning 

GEOGRAPHY  AND  REGIONAL  PLANNING 

The  pursuit  of  a  Master's  Degree  with  a  major  in  Geography 
presupposes  an  undergraduate  geography  major.  The 
department  will  accept  applicants  with  limited  background  in 
geography  provided  deficiencies  be  remedied  through  extra 
course  work. 

The  Department  invites  students  with  a  limited  geography 
background  to  extend  their  general  education  through 
enrollment  in  geography  courses.  Students  in  Elementary, 
Social  Science,  Science,  or  Business  may  find  Geography 
courses  closely  related  to  their  fields. 

The  degree  sought  will  depend  upon  the  personal  objectives 
of  the  individual.  The  Master  of  Education  (M.Ed.)  degree  is 
professional  and  oriented  to  teaching. 

The  Master  of  Arts  and  Master  of  Science  degrees  are 
designed  with  knowledge  of  subject  matter  as  the  objective. 
Although  these  degrees  are  complete  programs,  they  also  are 
designed  as  preparation  for  further  graduate  study.  The  Master 
of  Arts  and  Master  of  Science  degree  differ  both  in  their 
programs  and  in  the  background  required. 

The  Master  of  Arts  degree  is  for  the  student  interested  in  the 
human,  economic,  and  regional  development  of  earth  space. 

The  Master  of  Science  degree  is  for  the  student  with  a 
mathematics  and  science  background  who  is  interested  in  the 
study  of  the  physical  factors  in  environment. 

The  student  will,  in  consultation  with  the  Department, 
determine  whether  or  not  a  thesis  will  be  a  required  activity  of 
his  or  her  degree  program. 

When  a  thesis  is  to  be  considered  as  a  part  of  the  degree 
program,  a  minimum  of  30  graduate  credits  will  be  required. 

When  a  thesis  is  not  to  be  considered  as  part  of  the  degree 


72  —  Indiana  University  of  Pennsylvania 


program,  the  student  will  complete  a  minimum  of  36 acceptable 
graduate  credits. 

Requirements  for  M.A.  and  M.S.  Degrees  (30-36  cr.) 

I.  Core:  (12  cr.)  Consisting  of  the  following  courses;  GE579or 
590,  GE  591,  592,  and  594. 

II.  Concentration:  Includes  12  to  18  cr.  in  Geography, 
Planning  and  related  disciplines.  The  number  of  credits  that 
may  be  taken  in  related  disciplines  will  be  determined  on  an 
Individual  basis  by  the  Departmental  Graduate  Studies 
Committee. 

III.  Research  and  Independent  Study:  (2to6cr.)  Consists  of  the 
following  options:  Thesis  (2-6  cr.);  one  Independent  Study 
Seminar  plus  Internship  (6  cr.);  two  Independent  Study 
Seminars  (6  cr.) 

Requirements  for  M.Ed.  Degree 

I.  Professional  Development  Area:  (9  cr.) 

A.  Humanistic  Studies  (3  cr.  from  the  following  list);  FE511, 
FE512,  FE513,  FE  514. 

B.  Behavioral  Studies  (3  cr.  from  the  following  list):  EP  504, 
EP  573,  EP  576,  EP  578,  EP  580,  CE  529,  CE  539,  SE  531. 

C.  Research  (3  cr.  required  of  all  students):  GR  515 

II.  Specialization  Core:  (6  cr.  from  the  following  list):  FE  515, 
LR  500,  GE  510,  GE  551. 

III.  Subject  Area  and/or  Thesis  (15  cr.  from  the  following  list): 
GE  51 1 ,  512,  513,  514,  523,  524,  525  to  540  inclusive,  541 ,  542. 
552,  553,  579,  588,  590,  591,  594,  595,  and  599. 


COURSE  DESCRIPTIONS 


GE  510  COMMUNITY  COLLEGE  TEACHING  2  s.h. 

Considers  goals  and  objectives  of  general  education,  discipline,  various 
course  organizations,  materials,  methods  and  teaching  techniques.  Supervised 
classroom  teaching  is  required. 

GE  512  SETTLEMENT  GEOGRAPHY  2-3  s.h. 

Study  of  settlement  patterns  and  processes:  origins,  diffusion,  classification, 
pioneer,  settlement  planning,  and  agricultural  colonization. 

GE  513  POPULATION  GEOGRAPHY  2-3  sh. 

Study  of  variations  in  numbers,  characteristics  and  dynamics  of  human 
population,  models  and  theoretical  constructs  relevant  to  demographic  structures 
and  processes  in  a  spatial  context. 

GE  514  QUANTITATIVE  TECHNIQUES  IN  GEOGRAPHY 

&  REGIONAL  PLANNING  2-3  s.h. 

Descriptive  and  inferential  statistical  techniques  applied  to  spatial  distribution 
and  spatial  association  of  physical  and  cultural  phenomena  and  testing  of  spatial 
theoretical  constructs. 

GE  520  PHYSICAL  GEOGRAPHY  2-3  s.h. 

Study  of  development,  classification,  distribution  and  interpretation  of: 
landforms.  climates,  soils,  natural  vegetation,  underground  resources,  and  water 
resources 

GE  521  ADVANCED  HUMAN  GEOGRAPHY  (non-majors)  2-3  s.h. 

A  refresher  course  in  geography  for  the  non-geography  majors.  Both 
systematic  and  regional  studies  will  be  made  to  acquaint  the  student  with  modern 
geography  methods  and  techniques. 

GE  522  AEROSPACE  SCIENCE  (non-majors)  2-3  s.h. 

Workshop  conducted  with  visiting  aerospace  authorities  on:  space, 
environment:  history  of  flight;  flight  problems;  satellites;  space  probes;  space 
exploration;  etc  Airflights  available. 

GE  523  URBAN  GEOGRAPHY  2-3  s.h. 

An  analysis  of  city  types,  patterns  and  functions  as  influenced  by  geographic 

conditions  and  other  factors  City  planning  techniques  and  field  study  are  utilized. 

GE  524  CULTURAL  GEOGRAPHY  2  s.h. 

A  study  of  literature  and  methods  of  cultural  geography.  Topics  include 


Program  Curricula  ■ 
Geography  and  Regional  Planning 


population,  settlements,  tiuman  ecology,  culture  areas,  and  related  features. 

GE  525-540  GEOGRAPHY  REGIONAL  SEMINAR  ea   2-6  sh 

Each  region  is  examined  in  detail  for  soil,  topography,  climate,  vegetation, 
population,  and  interrelationships  evolved    Only  two  are  allowed  toward  M.A. 
degree.  The  following  are  offered  from  time  to  time: 
GE  525  AFRICA.  SOUTH  OF  SAHARA 

GE  526  INDIA.  PAKISTAN.  AND  INDO-CHINESE  PENINSULA 

GE  527  MEXICO.  MIDDLE  AMERICA  AND  WEST  INDIAN  ISLANDS 

GE  528  SOUTH  AMERICA 

GE  530  USSR 

GE  531  NORTHWESTERN  EUROPE 

GE  534  CHINA,  KOREA,  AND  JAPAN 

GE  535  AUSTRALIA  AND  PACIFIC  ISLANDS 

GE  540  GEOGRAPHY  OF  PENNSYLVANIA 

GE  541  AGRICULTURAL  GEOGRAPHY  2-3  sh. 

Specific  problems  will  be  studied  in  view  of  both  the  countries  involved  and 
world  environment.  Stress  will  be  placed  upon  individual  study  and  research  as 
well  as  classroom  lecture. 

GE  551  PROFESSIONAL  PROBLEMS  IN 

GEOGRAPHIC  EDUCATION  2-3  sh. 

Classroom  problems  and  discussion  centered  about  "New  Viewpoints  in 

Geography."  Individual  reports,  group  discussion  and  research  will  be  included. 

GE  552  CONSERVATION    ENVIRONMENTAL  ANALYSIS  2-3  sh 

Problems  of  exploitation  and  utilization  of  world  resources,  i.e.:  agriculture, 
mineral,  forest,  fish,  food  distribution,  population  growth,  regional  planning, 
factory  location  and  energy  conservation  measures 

GE  553  POLITICAL  GEOGRAPHY  2-3  sh 

Geographic  factors  and  conditions  are  analyzed  as  they  relate  to  character  and 
function  of  states.  Political  institutions  are  evaluated  in  light  of  geographic 
conditions. 

GE  554  CONTEMPORARY  ISSUES  IN 

GEOGRAPHY/PLANNING  2-3  sh. 

Topics  may  include:  Geography  of  Disease,  Urban  Environment,  Geography 
of  Egyptian-Israeli  conflict. 


GE  555  INTRODUCTION  TO  PLANNING  2-3  sh. 

Designed  to  give  a  basic  introduction  to  the  present  field  of  planning  whether  it 
be  on  ,a  city,  metropolitan,  regional,  county  or  other  areal  configuration. 
Examination  is  made  of  the  following  major  segments:  Intergovernmental  Context 
and  Legislative  Basis  for  Operating.  The  "Comprehensive  Plan"  what  it  is  and  why 
one  is  needed;  Plan  implementation  —  Renewal,  subdivision  regulations,  zoning, 
and  programming  community  developments;  The  Planning  Agency  —  operations, 
organization,  administration  and  funding. 

GE  556  PLANNING;  BASIC  STUDIES  AND  ANALYSIS  2-3  sh. 

Research,  analytical  design  and  plan-making  techniques  in  urban  and  regional 
planning  Examines  basic  items  necessary  to  prepare  urban  and  regional 
comprehensive  plans   Prerequisite:  GE  555  or  equivalent. 

GE  557  PLANNING:  DEVELOPMENT.  PRINCIPLES.  THEORY  2-3  sh. 

Examines  process  of  city  planning  during  ancient,  medieval,  renaissance 

periods,  and  a  review  of  early  planning  in  America,  as  well  as  present  city  planning. 

GE  558  PLANNING:  DESIGN  2-3  s  h. 

Offers  students  opportunity  to  work  with  various  concepts  of  city  and 
subdivision  design  utilizing  the  effects  of  topography,  natural  resources,  and  other 
physical  elements.  Prerequisite:  GE  555  or  equivalent 

GE  560  URBAN  PLANNING  SEMINAR  2-3  sh. 

Will  vary  in  content  according  to  students  enrolled  and  their  interest. 
Prerequisite:  GE  556  or  equivalent 

GE  561  URBAN  PLAN  IMPLEMENTATION  2-3  sh. 

Considers  zoning,  improvement  programs,  housing  codes,  building  codes, 
methodology  and  application  of  administrative  procedures,  Federal  and  Local 
Urban  Renewal  Programs,  site  selection,  program  administration  Prerequisite: 
GE  556  or  equivalent 

GE  573  CLIMATOLOGY  2-3  s  h. 

Dynamic  and  physical  aspects  of  climatology  Topics  covered:  heat  and  water 
budget;  principles  of  climatic  classification;  Koppen,  Thornwaite;  paleoclimates; 
regional  climates  of  continents;  microclimates 

GE  579  CARTOGRAPHY  2-3  s.h. 

Develops  ability  to  map  and  diagram  place  location,  area  distribution,  and 
statistical  data  in  thesis  or  professional  papers  Special  maps,  charts,  and 
diagrams  will  be  considered  as  required  by  students. 


74  —  Indiana  University  of  Pennsylvania 


GE  588  PHYSIOGRAPHY  (UNITED  STATES)  2-3  s.h. 

Presents  a  detailed  study  of  origin,  classification,  and  structure  of  mountains, 
plains,  coast  lines,  rivers,  lakes  and  subsequent  modification  by  glaciers,  stream 
erosion,  wind  abrasion,  tides  and  ocean  waves 


GE  590  MAP  AND  PHOTOGRAPHIC  INTERPRETATION  2-3  s.h. 

Designed  to  develop  skill  in  extracting  information  and  to  synthesize  data  from 
maps  and  aerial  photographs  into  geographic  relationships  related  to  geology, 
economy,  land  use.  transportation,  or  strategic  use 


GE  591  THOUGHT  AND  PHILOSOPHY  IN  GEOGRAPHY 

AND  PLANNING  2-3  s.h. 

Seminar  in   history  of  the  discipline,  great  ideas  of  geography,   leading 
professionals,  and  unresolved  issues 


GE  592  ELEMENTS  OF  RESEARCH  IN  GEOGRAPHY 

AND  PLANNING  2-3  s.h. 

Elements  and  techniques  of  scientific  research,  as  applied  to  geography 
problems,  are  studied.  A  proposal  thesis  topic  is  developed. 


GE  594  FIELD  TECHNIQUES  IN  GEOGRAPHY  2-3  sh 

Field  techniques  are  discussed  and  evaluated.  Field  tools  and  techniques  are 
used  in  the  study  of  a  specific  area.  Emphasis  is  upon  skill  and  interpretation  of 
areal  patterns  of  geographic  phenomena. 


GE  595  REGIONAL  FIELD  STUDIES  2-3  s.h. 

Field  observation  and  analysis  of  geographical  relationships  which  exist 
between  various  physical  and  cultural  phenomena.  The  student  must  secure 
department  permission  prior  to  field  work 


GE  596  SUPERVISED  INTERNSHIP  EXPERIENCE  0-2  sh 

Supervised  work  experience  at  the  graduate  level.  Open  only  to  students  who 
have  completed  eight  credits  of  graduate  work. 


GE  599  INDEPENDENT  STUDY 

Independent  Research  and  Study  under  faculty  direction,  by  application  only. 


GEOSCIENCE 


The  geoscience  department  embraces  several  areas  of  study 
related  to  the  earth,  its  structure,  and  Its  environment; 
specifically  astronomy,  geology,  meteorology,  and 
oceanography.  The  department  participates  in  the  Marine 
Science  Consortium  operated  jointly  with  nine  other 
Pennsylvania  institutions  at  Wallops  Island,  Virginia.  Graduate 
courses  offered  by  the  Consortium  have  the  same  acceptance 
as  those  taken  on  campus.  Courses  taken  under  descriptions  in 
the  Indiana  University  of  Pennsylvania  catalog,  with  tuition  paid 
to  Indiana,  are  treated  as  in-resident  courses  but  those  taken 
under  other  descriptions  are  subject  to  the  same  limitations  of 
all  transferred  credits.  The  department  offers  an  M.A,  degree  in 
Geoscience. 

CURRICULUM  FOR  MASTER  OF 

ARTS  DEGREE  IN  GEOSCIENCE 

I.  Qualifications  of  Entering  Student  (A  or  B) 

A.  Bachelors  degree  in  Education. 

Minimum  undergraduate  requirements  would  include  a 
total  of  16  credit  hours  of  science  and  mathematics.  The 
mathematics  shall  include  a  calculus  course. 

B.  Bachelors  degree  with  science  or  mathematics  concen- 
trate. Undergraduate  education  course  deficiencies  will 
have  to  be  filled  for  those  anticipating  a  teaching  career. 

C.  Any  undergraduate  deficiencies  must  be  completed. 

II.  Required  background  courses  (21  hours):  GS  502,  561,  562, 
571,  572,  541  and  542. 
Each  of  the  above  disciplines  may  be  satisfied  by  one  of  the 


following: 

1.  7-9  week  summer  institute  approved  by  the  advisor 
and  restricted  to  one  of  the  above  disciplines. 

2.  One  year  undergraduate  training  in  one  of  the  subject 
areas. 

3.  One  year  graduate  training  in  the  subject  area  at 
another  university. 

4.3-6   credit    background   courses    in   Geoscience 
Department. 

III.  Requirements  in  addition  to  background  courses. 

A.  GD  515  (3cr.) 

B.  GD  540  (4  cr.)  (Committee  thesis  required) 

C.  Seminar  (1  cr.)  (Requirement  only  if  the  course  is 
offered  during  the  time  the  student  is  enrolled  in  graduate 
school) 

D.  Electives 

A  minimum  of  9  credits  are  required  from  IV.  Department 
consent  required  for  any  course  work  taken  by  M.A. 
Geoscience  degree  candidates. 

IV.  Geoscience  Department  offerings: 

A.  Oceanography 

1.  Courses  available  at  the  Consortium,  Marine  Science 
500,  3  cr. 

B.  Astronomy 

1.  Astronomy,  one  level  above  core 

2.  GS  550 

C.  Geology:  GS  505,  GS  507,  GL  511,  GL  519,  GL  520, 
GL  521,  GL  522,  GL  524,  GL  525,  GL  526,  GL  527,  GL  530, 
GL  535. 


Program  Curricula  —  75 
Geography  and  Regional  Planning 
Geoscience 

D.  GS  581,  GS599 

Summary 

Background  Courses 

Oceanography 
Meteorology 
Astronomy 
Geology 

6cr. 
6cr. 
6cr. 
3  cr. 

SUB  TOTAL            0- 

-21  cr. 

Additional  Required  Courses 

Seminar 

1  cr. 

Elements  of  Research 

3  cr. 

Thesis 

4cr. 

SUB  TOTAL 

Elective  Courses 
SUB  TOTAL  9-22  cr. 

TOTAL 
COURSE  DESCRIPTIONS 


8  cr. 


30  cr.  minimum  requirement 


GS  502  PRINCIPLES  OF  GEOLOGY  3sh 

Intensive  study  of  geological  principles  and  processes,  including  forces  at 
work  within  tfie  earth  and  upon  its  surface  and  the  resultant  changes  through  time 
of  the  lithosphere  and  biosphere 

GS  505  EARTH  MATERIALS  3  s  h. 

Study  of  concentration  of  elements  which  make  up  the  earth,  formation  of 
stable  compounds  called  minerals  from  the  available  elements  and  aggregation  of 
minerals  to  form  rocks 

GS  507  LIFE  OF  THE  GEOLOGIC  PAST  3  s.h. 

Designed  to  acquaint  students  with  basic  morphologic  features  of  invertebrate 
fossils  and  an  understanding  of  their  relative  abundance  and  importance  in  the 
geologic  past. 


76  —  Indiana  University  of  Pennsylvania 


GL  511  SEDIMENTARY  PETROLOGY  3  s  h. 

Determination  and  interpretation  of  grain  size  parameters;  an  introduction  to 
clays  and  clay  mineralogy;  tiand  lens  and  petrographic  microscope  study  of 
marine  phosphorites,  carbonates,  siliceous  sediments,  heavy  minerals,  and 
sandstones  with  emphasis  on  interpreting  ancient  depositional  environments 

GL   512  STRATIGRAPHY  3sh 

Study  of  layered  rocks  with  emphasis  on  the  guiding  principles  of  stratigraphy, 
the  evaluation  of  unconformities,  the  principles  and  problems  of  correlation,  and 
selected  stratigraphy  problems. 

GL  519         CRYSTALLOGRAPHY  3  s.h. 

Designed  for  the  geologist,  chemist,  and  physicist.  Minerals  are  studied 
utilizing  common  field  and  X-ray  notation.  External  and  internal  morphology  is 
examined.  Stereographic  projection  techniques  are  applied  Prerequisites; 
Fundamentals  of  Mathematics,  plus  Mineralogy  or  Physical  Chemistry,  or 
permission  of  instructor. 

GL  520  PENNSYLVANIA  GEOLOGY  3  s  h 

Diversity  and  abundance  of  geologic  phenomenon  within  the  state  will  be  used 
to  apply  basic  geologic  concepts  of  time,  rock  types  and  structures  and 
geomorphic  processes  Extensive  field  trips  will  be  an  integral  part. 

GL  521  MINERALOGY  3  S.h. 

Workshop  in  study  and  identification  of  minerals,  theory  of  mineral  formation 
and  structure,  and  mineral  relationships.  Simple  chemical  and  physical 
techniques  will  be  used  for  mineral  identification.  Prerequisite:  Physical  Geology 
or  General  Chemistry. 


GL  522  PETROLOGY  3  s.h. 

Study  of  rock  phyla  and  their  chemical  and  spatial  relationships  in  the  earth. 
Special  attention  to  the  genesis,  mineral  composition,  and  classification  of  rock 
types.  Ecology  of  igneous,  sedimentary,  and  metamorphic  rocks  is  studied  in 
detail.  Prerequisite:  Mineralogy. 


GL   525  EARTH  DEFORMATION  I  3  cr. 

Study  of  deformation  structures  including  folds,  joints,  faults,  foliation  and 

lineation.  Includes  lab  and  field  work  with  Brunton  compass,  geologic  maps,  cross 

sections,  and  report  writing. 

GL  526  EARTH  DEFORMATION  II  3  cr. 

Continuation  of  Earth  Deformation  I.  Includes:  techniques  of  geologic  field 
work  such  as  measuring  sections,  use  of  aerial  photographs,  and  a  field  project 
involving  compilation  of  a  geologic  map,  cross  sections,  and  geologic  report. 

GL  527  GEOMORPHOLOGY  3  S.h. 

Landforms  and  processes  and  principles  that  govern  both  their  origin  and  their 
subsequent  development   Prerequisite;  Structural  Geology. 

GL   530  PALEONTOLOGY  3  s.h. 

A  morphological  study  of  major  invertebrate  life  forms  of  geologic  past  and 

their  distribution  in  space  and  time.  Prerequisite:  Historical  Geology  or  Zoology. 

GL   535  ECONOMIC  MINERAL  DEPOSITS  3  s.h. 

Study  of  earth's  metallic  and  non-metallic  mineral  resources  with  regard  to 
processes  of  formation,  methods  of  extraction  (mining  and  drilling  methods), 
methods  of  treatment,  uses,  and  economic  and  environmental  factors. 

GS  541  THE  SOLAR  SYSTEM  3  s  h. 

Characteristics  and  behavior  of  planets  and  their  satellites,  asteroids,  meteors, 
comets,  and  other  phenomena  of  the  solar  system.  One  of  the  major  topics  will  be 
to  investigate  and  criticize  several  of  the  theories  of  its  origin.  It  will  require  some 
treatment  of  celestial  mechanics  but  will  not  require  a  background  of  calculus. 

GS  542  THE  SIDEREAL  UNIVERSE  3  s  h. 

Characteristics  and  classification  of  the  stars,  their  assemblage  in  groups  and 
galaxies  and  their  evolution.  Techniques  of  gathering  data  are  examined  to  gain  an 
understanding  of  the  role  of  the  telescope,  spectroscope  and  photometer  in 
astronomical  research  Lab  exercises  and  night  observations  are  a  part  of  the 
course.  Credit  will  be  given  only  to  those  for  whom  the  course  represents  an  area 
of  study  for  which  credit  has  not  previously  been  recorded. 


GL  524  GLACIAL  GEOLOGY  3  s  h 

Study  of  phenomenon  of  glaciation,  including  study  of  glacial  movement, 
glacial  deposits,  and  an  investigation  of  possible  causes  of  glaciation  A  working 
acquaintance  with  glacial  land  forms  is  provided  by  means  of  field  trips  to 
glaciated  region  of  N  W.  Pennsylvania. 


GS  550  OPERATION  OF  THE  PLANETARIUM  1-2  s.h. 

Designed  to  acquaint  student  with  the  operation  and  use  of  the  Spitz 
Planetarium  A  satisfactory  instructional  program  or  show  for  a  public  group  will 
demonstrate  accomplishment  of  course  objectives.  Prerequisites:  One  year 
astronomy  or  equivalent. 


Program  Curricula  ■ 
Geoscience 
Health  and  Physical  Education 
History 


GS  561-562  OCEANOGRAPHY  I  AND  II  3-6  s.h. 

An  introduction  to  physical,  chemical,  biological  and  geological  nature  of  the 
ocean  Oceanography  I  is  a  prerequisite  to  Oceanography  II  Both  courses  require 
a  five-day  field  trip  to  lUP's  Marine  Station  at  Lewes.  Delaware.  Lectures,  readings, 
term  paper,  lab  and  field  trip 

GS  571-572  H^ETEOROLOGY  I  AND  II  3-6  S.h. 

Basic  and  advance  considerations  of  physical  processes  of  the  atmosphere. 
Lectures,  readings,  term  paper,  lab 

GS  581  SPECIAL  TOPICS  1-3  s.h. 

As  student  demand  and  circumstances  may  dictate,  special  graduate  courses 
may  be  offered  by  any  member  of  the  geoscience  graduate  faculty. 

GS  599  INDEPENDENT  STUDY  1-4  s.h. 

Students  may  initiate  research  of  their  own  choosing  or  assist  in  faculty 
research  projects. 


HEALTH  AND  PHYSICAL  EDUCATION 


HP  521  ADVANCED  SEI^INAR  IN  HEALTH  AND  SAFETY  2  s.h. 

Provides  students  with  current  health  and  safety  information  and  defines  its 
relation  to  needs  of  the  school  child,  home,  community,  and  school.  Application  of 
health  and  safety  instruction  to  modern  principles  of  education,  and  materials  to 
plan  and  implement  an  effective  health  and  safety  instructional  program.  Geared 
toward  particular  health  and  safety  problems  of  students  enrolled. 

Credit  may  be  used  in  general  studies  area  of  elementary  curriculum  and. 
subject  to  the  approval  of  the  department  chairman  or  program  advisor,  as  an 
elective  in  all  other  programs 

HP  530  WORKSHOP  IN  COMfVlUNITY  SCHOOL 

HEALTH  EDUCATION  2  s.h. 

School,  community  and  public  health  as  related  to  interests  of  Workshop 
participants  Areas  studies  include  mental  health,  nutrition,  dental  health,  physical 
education,  health  services,  environmental  health,  changing  health  patterns  and 
health  statistics  Teaching  methods,  special  projects,  consultations,  visitations, 
discussions  and  sources  of  information  and  materials  will  be  considered 

Credit  may  be  used  in  general  studies  area  of  elementary  curriculum  and. 
subject  to  the  approval  of  department  chairman  or  program  advisor,  as  an  elective 
in  all  other  programs. 


HISTORY 


The  Master  of  Arts  Degree  in  History  is  designed  to  give 
students  both  breadth  and  depth  in  that  academic  discipline.  As 
a  terminal  degree  it  prepares  teachers  for  the  secondary  schools 
and  community  colleges.  Students  seeking  scholarships  and 
fellowship  opportunities  for  work  elsewhere  beyond  the 
master's  degree  should  consult  the  Director  of  Graduate 
Studies  within  the  department,  Dr.  Irwin  Marcus.  All  programs 
of  study  are  to  be  approved  by  him,  or  the  departmental 
chairperson. 

It  is  imperative  that  graduate  students  schedule  SS  510, 
Research  Methodologies  in  the  Social  Sciences  or  GD  515, 
Elements  of  Research,  early  in  their  graduate  program. 


CURRICULUM  FOR  MASTER  OF 

ARTS  DEGREE  IN  HISTORY 

Students  working  toward  the  Master  of  Arts  degree  in  History 
will  complete  a  minimum  of  30  semester  hours  of  work  in 
accordance  with  the  following  divisions. 

Courses  HI  501  through  HI  593  will  provide  the  subject  matter 
concentration  for  the  program.  Candidates  will  choose  15-24 
hours  depending  on  the  options  elected  for  research  and  related 
studies.  In  research,  students  must  meet  a  6-9  hour  requirement 
which  includes  methodology  competency,  a  thesis,  and 
seminar(s).  Independent  study  may  be  scheduled  (0-5  s.h.)  with 
no  more  than  7  hours  for  thesis  and  independent  study 
combined.  Work  in  related  field  (0-6  s.h.)  is  available  to 
Interested  students  who  receive  the  permission  of  the 
chairperson  or  the  graduate  advisor. 


78  —  Indiana  University  of  Pennsylvania 


COURSE  DESCRIPTIONS 


HI    501  HISTORY  OF  GREECE  3  s.h. 

Will  analyze  major  political,  social,  and  economic  developments  in  ancient 
Greek  civilization  from  Bronze  Age  to  death  of  Alexander 

HI     502  HISTORY  OF  ROME  3  s.h. 

Will  trace  Roman  history  from  early  Republic  down  to  fall  of  Empire.  Roman 
political  theory  will  be  particulary  emphasized. 

HI     503  MEDIEVAL  EUROPE  I.  400-900  3  S.h. 

History  of  early  Medieval  Europe,  from  decline  of  Rome  to  beginnings  of  High 
Middle  Ages:  emphasis  on  political,  social,  economic,  religious,  and  intellectual 
developments. 

HI     503  MEDIEVAL  EUROPE  II.  900-1350  3  s.h. 

History  of  late  Medieval  Europe,  from  High  Middle  Ages  to  Renaissance 
period:  emphasis  on  political,  social,  economic,  religious,  and  intellectual 
developments. 

HI     505  RENAISSANCE  AND  REFORMATION  3  s.h 

History  of  Europe  from  ca.  1250:  rise  of  commercial  city.  Kings,  and  pressures 
on  Christian  Church  to  1600,  Some  consideration  of  technology  and  voyages. 

HI     506  EARLY  MODERN  EUROPE  3  s.h. 

Greatness  of  France  under  Louis  XIV;  Sweden:  Thirty  Years'  War.  Emergence 
of  modern  society:  French  Revolution 

HI     507  HISTORY  OF  EUROPE.  1815-1914  3  s.h. 

Study  of  Europe  in  nineteenth  century,  with  emphasis  on  the  emergence  of 
major  thought  patterns,  Romanticism.  Nationalism.  Socialism,  and  Positivism. 

HI     508  20TH  CENTURY  EUROPE  3  S.h. 

Political,  economic,  and  diplomatic  trends  in  Europe  since  1900,  with  major 
emphasis  on  causes  and  results  of  war,  and  search  for  security. 

HI     510  COMMUNITY  COLLEGE  TEACHING  INTERNSHIP  2-3  Sh. 

Designed  especially  to  prepare  community  college  instructors  through  an 

emphasis   on    objectives,    materials,    techniques   and   evaluation    of   general 

education  programs  in  history.  Summer  only.  Before  programming,  see  advisor. 


HI     511  READINGS  IN  HISTORY  3  s.h. 

Directed  reading  of  significant  historical  materials,  focused  on  a  general  topic. 

HI     512  READINGS  IN  HISTORY  3  s.h. 

Directed  reading  of  significant  historical  materials,  focused  on  a  general 
topic. 

HI     520  HISTORY  OF  ENGLAND  TO  1688  3  s.h. 

Survey  of  growth  of  English  nation,  with  emphasis  on  political,  social,  and 
economic  developments  leading  to  17th  century  conflict  between  Crown  and 
Parliament. 

HI     521  HISTORY  OF  ENGLAND.  1688  -  PRESENT  3  S.h. 

Survey  of  growth  of  England  as  a  democratic  constitutional  monarchy. 
Attention  directed  to  industrial  revolution,  and  to  imperial  expansion  and 
England's  role  in  20th  century  world. 


HI     521  HISTORY  SEMINAR 

Area  research  in  the  discipline,  culminating  in  a  formal  paper. 


2-3  s.h. 


HI     522  FRENCH  REVOLUTION  AND  NAPOELON  3  s.h. 

Brief  sketch  of  medieval  France  and  development  of  monarchy;  concentration 
on  Old  Regime.  Revolution,  and  Empire,  with  emphasis  on  politics,  diplomacy,  and 
economics.  Readings  and  brief  papers. 

HI     523  MODERN  FRANCE  3  S.h 

Investigation  of  political,  cultural,  economic,  and  social  developments  since 
1815  Discussions  and  readings. 

HI     524  HISTORY  OF  GERMANY  TO  1848  3  s.h. 

Study  of  evolution  of  German  nation  from  its  prehistoric  origins,  emphasizing 
medieval  and  early  modern  phases  to  1848. 

HI     525  HISTORY  OF  GERMANY.  1849-1970  3  s.h. 

Study  of  development  of  modern  Germany  from  the  Revolution  to  1848. 
including  imperial  republican  and  totalitarian  phases,  to  post-War  formation  of 
East  and  West  Germany 

HI     526  HISTORY  OF  RUSSIA  3  s.h. 

General   survey  of   Russian   history,   culture,   and   institutions.   Special 

consideration  given  to  study  of  historical  forces  formative  of  Revolution  of  1917. 

HI     527  HISTORY  OF  SOVIET  RUSSIA  3  S.h. 

General  survey  of  contemporary  Soviet  history,  culture,  and  institutions. 


Program  Curricula  - 
History 


Special  consideration  given  to  study  of  communist  theory  and  its  place  in  current 
Russian  historiography. 

HI     532  US-BRITISH  COMMONWEALTH  RELATIONS  3sh 

Aspects  of  United  States  and  Commonwealth  backgrounds  and  policies  that 
aid  mutual  understanding  and  internal  accord  in  modern  world 

HI     540  COLONIAL  AMERICA  3  s  h 

Survey  of  original  thirteen  states  from  their  inception  as  colonies  within  the 
British  empire  to  1 763,  the  eve  of  independence  Attention  given  to  their  political 
development:  economic  position  within  the  empire;  relations  with  Indians:  and 
evolution  of  their  social,  educational  and  religious  life. 

HI     542  THE  AMERICAN  REVOLUTION  3sh 

Study  of  history  of  United  Stales  from  beginnings  of  revolutionary  crisis  in 
1763  through  adoption  of  the  constitution  and  the  administration  of  John  Adams 
Special  emphasis  is  given  the  causes  and  civil  war  aspects  of  the  revolution,  and 
the  constitutional-political  development  of  the  new  nation 

HI     543  CIVIL  WAR  AND  RECONSTRUCTION  3sh 

Study  of  failure  of  Amencan  democracy  to  cope  with  issues  of  mid-nineteenth 
century,  followed  by  political,  economic,  military,  and  social  developments  during 
War  and  reconciliation  of  North  and  South 

HI     544  HISTORY  OF  U.S.,  1876-1900  3  s.h 

Stresses  reaction  of  various  segments  of  heterogeneous  population  to  rapid 
industrialization,  urbanization,  and  corporation  of  American  life  and  emergence  of 
US  as  a  world  power:  special  attention  to  formation  of  new  institutions. 

HI     545  HISTORY  OF  U.S..  1900-1929  3sh 

Emphasis  on  political,  social,  economic,  and  diplomatic  developments  in 
American  history  between  1900  and  1929 

HI     550  HISTORY  OF  LATIN  AMERICA:  COLONIAL  PERIOD, 

1450-1820  3sh 

Study  of  life  of  people,  Indian  cultures,  conquest  by  Spaniards  and 
Portuguese,  government  during  Colonial  Period,  and  Wars  of  Independence 

HI     551  HISTORY  OF  LATIN  AMERICA:  NATIONAL  PERIOD, 

1820-PRESENT  3  s  h 

Study  of  history  of  nations  which  have  emerged  since  independence: 
emphasis  on  economic,  political,  cultural,  and  social  developments  of  these 
nations,  as  well  as  relations  of  these  nations  to  others  in  the  Hemisphere. 


HI     560  HISTORY  OF  PENNSYLVANIA  3  s  h. 

Emphasizes  the  cultural,  economic,  political,  and  social  development  of  our 
state  in  its  various  periods  from  colonial  to  today  Special  attention  given  to 
diversity  of  Pennsylvania's  people,  their  institutions,  and  problems. 

HI     561  DIPLOMATIC  US   HISTORY.  1775-1900  3sh 

Traces  Foreign  Relations  of  United  States  from  Independence  to  emergence 
as  a  world  power  Topics  concentrate  on  themes  of  commercial  relations,  political 
isolation,  expansion,  and  debate  over  imperialism 

HI     562  DIPLOMATIC  US   HISTORY.  1900-PRESENT  3  s.h. 

Treats  primarily  our  20th  century  involvement  in  world  affairs  and  domestic 
debate  over  that  involvement  Special  emphasis  will  be  placed  on  role  of  interest 
groups  and  increasing  power  of  Executive  Department  over  Foreign  Affairs. 

HI     563  SOCIAL  AND  INTELLECTUAL  HISTORY  OF  US   TO 

1875  3  s.h. 

Selected  topics  in  early  American  intellectual  and  cultural  growth,  with 
emphasis  on  Puritanism,  Enlightenment,  Cultural  Nationalism,  and  Romatic 
Movement 

HI     564  SOCIAL  AND  INTELLECTUAL  HISTORY  OF 

US   SINCE  1875  3  s,h. 

Selected  treatment  of  historical  development  of  modern  American  movements 
in  social  and  political  thought,  religion,  philosophy,  fine  arts,  and  literature. 

HI     565  HISTORY OFBLACKAMERICASINCE  EMANCIPATION  3  s.h. 

Description  and  analysis  of  role  of  blacks  in  history  of  United  States  since  the 
Civil  War.  emphasis  on  key  leaders,  major  organizations,  leading  movements  and 
crucial  ideologies  of  blacks  in  modern  America. 


HI     566  AMERICAN  LABOR  MOVEMENT  3  s.h. 

Investigation  of  growth  of  American  labor  movement  from  nineteenth  century 
to  the  present:  emphasis  on  the  role  of  Knights  of  Labor.  American  Federation  of 
Labor,  Industrial  Organizations  Study  of  the  working  class  in  its  working  and 
living  settings. 

HI     567  ECONOMIC  HISTORY  OF  US  3  S.h. 

Historical  development  of  economic  institutions  in  American  life  since 
Independence:  emphasis  on  farming,  labor,  transportation,  banking  and 
manufacturing. 


80  —  Indiana  University  of  Pennsylvania 


HI     568  US.  URBAN  HISTORY  3  S.h. 

A  survey  of  American  cities  from  tfieir  beginnings  to  present  empfiasizing 
relationship  or  urban  history  to  social  science  theory,  and  stages  and  process  of 
city  development. 

HI     580  HISTORY  OF  ISLAMIC  CIVILIZATION  3  s.h. 

An  approach  to  learning  about  a  non-Western  culture;  Mohammad,  Arabs, 
Muslims  as  creators  of  a  great  civilization  from  rise  of  Islam  to  1800;  emphasis  on 
cultural  institutions  and  their  interrelationships  within  Middle  East. 

HI     581  MODERN  MIDDLE  EAST  3  s.h. 

Survey  of  changes  that  have  taken  place  in  Middle  East  and  in  Islam  since 
eiohteenth  century  and  of  contemporary  problems  in  that  region. 

HI     582  HISTORY  OF  FAR  EAST  3  s.h. 

History  of  China  and  Japan  from  ancient  times.  Buddhism,  medieval  Japan, 
Chinese  Communism,  industrialization  Some  consideration  of  peripheral  Asia 
from  1500. 

HI    590         HISTORY  OF  WOMEN  3  S.h. 

Explores  religious,  legal,  political,  and  mythic  dimensions  of  women  in  society 
from  ancient  to  modern  times,  including  Eastern,  Western  and  American 
experiences. 


HI     591  FILM  AS  HISTORY  3  S.h. 

This  course  deals  with  cinema  as  social,  cultural  and  intellectual  history  from 
its  origins  to  the  present  day 


HI    599  INDEPENDENT  STUDY  3  S.h. 

This  course  involves  directed  reading  or  research  for  qualified  students.  We 
encourage  experimental  projects  and  personalized  learning  Prerequisite: 
permission  of  faculty  member. 


HI     621  HISTORY  SEMINAR 

Area  research  in  the  discipline,  culminating  in  a  formal  paper 


HI     622  HISTORY  SEMINAR 

Area  Research  in  the  discipline  culminating  in  a  formal  paper 


HOME  ECONOMICS  EDUCATION 

The  Graduate  Program  in  Home  Economics  Education  leads 
to  a  Master  of  Education  Degree.  The  program  is  designed  for 
Students  who  wish  to  take  advanced  work  beyond  the 
bachelor's  degree  and  to  become  better  qualified  for  home 
economics  education  positions. 

For  admission  into  this  curriculum  a  student  must  have 
completed  a  baccalaureate  degree  in  home  economics  with 
major  in  home  economics  education  or  with  a  minimum  of  35 
semester  hours  of  home  ecnomics,  19  semester  hours  in 
education,  including  home  economics  education  and  student 
teaching,  and  a  minimum  of  3  semester  hours  in  educational 
psychology  The  degree  must  be  from  an  approved  institution. 

Food  Service  majors  who  have  a  B.S.  degree  from  an 
approved  institution  may  be  admitted  to  this  program. 
Graduates  from  this  program  with  a  Food  Service  and  Nutrition 
background  will  not  be  qualified  to  teach  in  the  public  schools 
nor  will  this  degree  help  them  to  meet  state  certification 
requirements  for  teaching  Home  Economics.  However, 
students  can  become  better  qualified  for  leadership  positions  in 
their  area  of  specialization. 

Each  student  admitted  to  the  Graduate  School  will  be 
assigned  a  faculty  advisor  by  the  Chairman  of  the  Department. 
This  advisor  will  help  the  student  plan  a  program  of  study.  Any 
deviation  from  the  degree  requirements  shall  have  the  written 
approval  of  the  advisor  and  the  Department  Chairman. 

Thesis  is  optional  for  all  students.  The  decision  to  select  the 
thesis  or  the  non-thesis  option  will  be  made  by  the  student  in 
consultation  with  his/her  advisor  and  department  chairperson 


prior  to  the  time  the  student  is  admitted  to  candidacy  for  the 
degree. 


THESIS  OPTION 

Candidate  will  complete  30  hours  of  approved  course  work 
plus  a  two  or  four  credit  thesis.  The  selection  of  and  the  proposal 
for  research  shall  be  approved  by  the  advisor  and  other 
members  of  his/her  Graduate  Committee.  The  research  shall  be 
carried  on  by  the  candidate  under  the  direction  of  the  research 
advisor  and/or  committee  members. 


NON-THESIS  OPTION 

In  lieu  of  thesis,  candidate  must  complete  33  hours  of 
approved  course  work  and  two  extensive  research  papers.  One 
research  paper  will  be  required  in  HE  571V  and  the  other 
research  paper  will  be  in  another  Home  Economics  course 
selected  by  the  candidate  and  approved  by  the  advisor  and 
department  chairperson. 


CURRICULUM  FOR  THE  MASTER  OF 
EDUCATION  DEGREE 

Students  working  for  this  degree  will  complete  30  or  33 
semester  hours  of  course  work  in  accordance  with  the  following 
divisions: 
I.  Professional  Development  Area  (9  s.h.) 
A.  Humanistic    Studies   —   Three   semester   hours   to   be 
selected  from  FE  111  through  514. 


Program  Curricula  —  81 
History 
Home  Economics  Education 

B.  Behavioral  Studies  —  Three  semester  hours  to  be 
selected  from  EP  504,  573,  576,  578  or  580;  or  from  CE  529, 
539  or  SE  531. 

C.  Research  —  Three  semester  hours.  GR  515  is  required. 

II.  Specialization  Core  (6  s.h.) 

HE  571V  and  HE  576V  are  required. 

III.  Thesis  {0-4  s.h.) 

(See  description  of  Thesis  and  Non-Thesis  Options  on  this 
page.) 

IV.  Home  Economics  Education  (6-9  s.h.) 

Students  completing  a  thesis  are  required  to  select  six  or 
more  semester  hours  from  courses  HE  570V  through  HE  599. 

Students  not  completing  a  thesis  are  required  to  select 
nine  or  more  semester  hours  from  courses  HE  570V  through 
HE  599. 

HE  572V  is  required  of  any  student  who  has  not  completed 
HE  472V  or  equivalent. 

V.  Subject  Matter  Concentration  (9  s.h.) 

Courses  are  to  be  selected  from  courses  HE  521  through 
HE  561.  Two  subject  matter  options  are  available. 
OPTION  1:  Courses  should  be  selected  from  two  or  more 

subject  areas  of  home  economics. 
OPTION  2:  If  a  subject  concentration  is  desired,  all  courses 
should  be  selected  from  one  subject  area  of 
home  economics.  A  statement  regarding  the 
subject  matter  concentration  will  appear  on  the 
student's  transcript. 

The  three  courses  HE  510V.  HE  512  or  HE  574V  may  be 


82  —  Indiana  University  of  Pennsylvania 


counted  as  Home  Economics  Education  or  as  Subject 
Matter  concentration  depending  upon  focus  of  course. 

Dual  level  courses  taken  on  tfie  undergraduate  level 
cannot  be  repeated  on  the  graduate  level  for  graduate 
degree  credit. 

A  maximum  of  six  (6)  tour  credits  may  apply  toward 
degree  requirements,  but  only  one  to  four  (1-4)  credit  hours 
may  be  applied  in  any  one  subject  matter  area.  A  maximum 
of  four  credits  may  be  applied  for  any  tour. 

COURSE  DESCRIPTIONS 

GENERAL  COURSES 

General  courses  may  be  used  to  meet  the  requirements  for 
subject  matter  or  home  economics  education  depending  upon 
the  focus. 

HE  510V       WORKSHOP  IN  HOME  ECONOMICS  1-6  sh 

Provides  opportunities  for  experienced  educational  personnel  to  concentrate 
their  study  on  common  professional  problems. 

HE   512  TOUR  IN  HOME  ECONOMICS  1-6  sh 

Aspects  of  home  economics  are  studied  in  relation  to  the  culture  of  areas 
toured  Some  tours  which  have  been  offered  are:  European  Tour  in  Foods; 
European  Tour  in  Clothing.  Textiles  and  Furnishings:  Oriental  Tour  in  Family  Life: 
Foods  Tour  —  US  A  Consult  brochures,  summer  session  catalogs  or  chairperson 
for  specific  offerings 


HE  574V       SEMINAR  IN  HOME  ECONOMICS 
Seminars  in  selected  topics 


HUMAN  DEVELOPMENT  AND  THE  FAMILY 


1-3  sh. 


HE  521  PROBLEMS  IN  FAMILY  LIVING  3  s.h. 

Emphasis  is  placed  on  solving  problems  created  by  social  change.  New 

knowledge  from  science,  medicine,  sociology,  economics,  art  and  psychology  is 


utilized  to  improve  family  living.  Problems  concerned  with  food,  clothing,  shelter, 
management,  and  family  relationships  are  investigated. 

HE  523  FIELD  WORK  IN  FAMILY  LIFE  OR  IN 

HUMAN  DEVELOPMENT  3  sh 

Designed  to  study  individual  and  family  interaction.  Methods  of  working  with 
various  types  of  families  through  an  analysis  of  research,  scientific  literature,  and 
community  programs  are  studied  Advanced  graduate  students  plan  and 
participate  in  laboratory-type  work  with  individual  families.  (Permission  of 
instructor  for  non-majors.) 

HE   526  TECHNIQUES  OF  PARENT  EDUCATION  3  sh. 

Focuses  on  scope  and  aims  of  parent  education  movement.  Methods  of 
helping  families  become  more  effective  in  their  parent-child  relationships  are 
examined- 

CLOTHING  AND  TEXTILES 

HE  530  CLOTHING  AND  HUMAN  BEHAVIOR  3  sh 

Understanding  factors  affecting  clothing  decisions  of  differing  individuals  and 
families.  Cultural,  social,  psychological  and  economic  influences  are  considered 
Concepts  from  anthropology,  sociology,  psychology  and  economics  are  explored 
in  studying  the  relation  of  clothing  to  human  behavior 

HE  531  CREATIVE  CLOTHING  3sh 

Factors  that  influence  clothing  design  and  sources  of  design  inspiration  are 
investigated.  Lines,  shapes,  colors  and  textures  are  studied  in  the  creation  of 
clothing  to  fit  the  human  body  Effects  of  fabric  finishes,  drapability,  and 
dimensional  stability  on  design  are  explored   Two  major  projects  required 

HE  532  RECENT  DEVELOPMENTS  IN  TEXTILES  3  s  h. 

Designed  to  acquaint  the  student  with  new  developments  in  textiles  as  they 
affect  the  consumer.  Emphasis  on  understanding  factors  involved  in  selection, 
use,  and  care  of  new  fibers,  fabrics,  and  finishes 

FOODS  AND  NUTRITION 

HE   540  ADVANCED  HUMAN  NUTRITION  3  s  h. 

Nutritional  needs  and  problems  occurnng  at  different  stages  in  the  life  cycle 
are  studied:  pregnancy,  infancy,  early  childhood,  adolescence,  aging. 

HE   541  CULTURAL  ASPECTS  OF  GOURMET  FOODS  3  sh 

Investigation,  analysis,  and  interpretation  of  the  art  and  science  of  cooking  as 

influenced  by  historical,  racial,  religious  and  social  customs.  Both  foreign  and 


Program  Curricula 
Home  Economics  Education 


domestic  gourmet  cookery  are  studied  Including  some  food  preparation. 

HE   542  CONTEMPORARY  ISSUES  IN  FOODS  &  NUTRITION  3  s  h. 

Current  intormalion  on  food  and  nutrition  is  evaluated  for  its  reliability. 

HOME  MANAGEMENT  AND  FAMILY  ECONOMICS 

HE  555  CONSUMER  ECONOMICS  3  S.h. 

Problems  in  consumer  expenditures  with  emphasis  given  to  effects  of  current 
economic  and  social  forces   Individual  mvesligations  are  required 

HE  556  PROBLEMS  IN  FAMILY  FINANCE  3  s  h 

Advanced  problems  in  personal  and  family  finance  Individual  investigations  in 
current  situations  are  required 

HOUSING  AND  INTERIOR  DESIGN 

HE   560  PROBLEMS  IN  HOUSING  &  INTERIOR  DESIGN  3  s.h 

Influences  which  contribute  to  design  of  modern  home  and  its  furnishings  and 
housing  needs  are  studied  in  relation  to  stages  in  family-life  cycle. 

HE  561  HOUSEHOLD  EQUIPMENT  AND  APPLIANCES  3  s  h. 

In-depth  study  of  household  equipment  in  relation  to  energy  and  its 
distribution  and  consumption  throughout  the  network  systems  of  the  house. 
Individual  problems  required 


HE   572V        EVALUATION  IN  HOME  ECONOMICS  3  s.h 

Study  of  nature  and  scope  of  evaluation  in  contemporary  home  economics 
programs  using  a  variety  of  evaluative  methods  and  techniques  designed  to 
measure  a  comprehensive  range  of  home  economics  educational  objectives 
Special  attention  to  use  and  construction  of  teacher-made  tests  and  evaluative 
devices 

HE  573V        SUPERVISION  AND  ADMINISTRATION 

IN  HOME  ECONOMICS  3sh 

Deals  with   principles,   methods,   and  techniques  of  supervision  in  home 

economics    Special  attention  to  basic  concepts  in  supervision  such  as  human 

relations,  communication  process,  decision-making,  leadership  strategies,  and 

role  of  action-research  in  improving  school  practices 

HE   575V        HOME  ECONOMICS  IN  HIGHER  EDUCATION  3sh 

Contemporary  programs  at  college  level  are  evaluated  in  terms  of  major 
issues,  trends,  and  problems  in  higher  education  and  professional  home 
economics  with  emphasis  on  problems  of  curriculum  development,  effective 
teaching,  guidance,  and  evaluation 

HE   576V       ADVANCED  METHODS  OF  TEACHING  HOME 

ECONOMICS  3  s.h. 

Newer  trends  in  classroom  procedure,  equipment  and  materials  as  well  as 

problems  involved  in  the  improvement  of  instruction  will  be  studied  Implications 

and  implementation  of  current  trends  and  issues  critical  to  the  future  of  home 

economics  education  are  emphasized 


EDUCATION  COURSE  DESCRIPTIONS 

HE  570V        HOME  ECONOMICS  IN  AMERICAN  EDUCATION  3  s.h. 

Present  status  of  home  economics  is  reviewed  in  terms  of  the  profession's 
history  and  philosophy  Role  and  contribution  of  home  economics  in  relation  to 
total  educational  program  at  the  elementary,  secondary,  post-secondary  levels. 
Trends  and  issues  critical  to  future  of  home  economics 

HE   571V       CURRICULUM  DEVELOPMENT 

IN  HOME  ECONOMICS  3  s.h 

Vanous  tasks  and  processes  of  curriculum  development  with  special  attention 
on  making  realistic  curriculum  decisions  and  using  innovative  procedures  in 
developing  home  economics  curriculum 


HE  577V        SPECIAL  PROBLEMS  IN  HOME  ECONOMICS  3  s  h 

Specific  problems  with  curriculum,  teaching,  learning  experiences  and 
evaluation  are  stressed  Each  student  will  research  a  special  problem  or  area  of 
interest 

HE   578V        RESEARCH  IN  HOME  ECONOMICS  EDUCATION  3sh 

Methodology  is  introduced  and  studied  in  terms  of  research  problems  Reports 
by  home  economics,  behavioral  science,  and  education  researchers  are  analyzed 
and  evaluated.  Designed  to  assist  the  student  in  defining  a  thesis.  Students  should 
complete  HE  571V  before  scheduling  this  course 

HE  599  INDEPENDENT  STUDY  IN  HOME  ECONOMICS  1-6  s  h. 

Student  will  pursue  an  independent  study  under  the  guidance  of  a  faculty 
member  in  an  area  of  home  economics  not  previously  studied  in  the  student's 
regular  courses  and  for  which  the  student  and  advisor  identify  a  need 


84  —  Indiana  University  ol  Pennsylvania 


'COMMUNICATIONS  MEDIA 


GRADUATE  PROGRAMS  IN  MEDIA 

In  the  department  of  Learning  Resources  and  Mass  Media  the 
student  may  choose  from  the  following  programs: 
I.  Master  of  Education  in  Instructional  Media 
II.  Instructional  Media  Specialist  Certificate 
III.  Advanced  professional  training   in  the  field  of  Learning 

Resources  and  Mass  Media  either  in  conjunction  with  or 

separate  from  the  pursuit  of  a  graduate  degree  in  some  other 

academic  discipline. 

Within  these  programs  students  may  wish  to  develop  a 
concentration  of  studies  in  such  specialties  as  Learning 
Resources  Center-Librarian,  Instructional  Materials  Center 
Director,  Materials  Production,  Instructional  Television  and 
Instructional  Development.  As  such,  they  will  do  intensive  work 
in  photography,  cinematography,  graphic  production,  radio, 
television,  design  and  development,  media  management  or 
such  combinations  of  these  areas  as  they  may  work  out  with 
their  advisor. 

By  careful  structuring  of  their  program  it  is  possible  for 
students  to  obtain  the  M.Ed,  degree  and  the  Instructional  Media 
Specialist  Certification  concurrently.  Usually  this  will  require 
slightly  more  than  the  semester  hours  of  minimum  credits 
required  for  the  M.Ed.,  but  students  find  it  to  their  advantage  to 
fulfill  the  requirements  for  both  programs.  This  certificate  is 
issued  by  the  Pennsylvania  Department  of  Education.  Obtain 
application  form  from  the  departmental  secretary. 

'Department  name  changed  from  Learning  Resources  and  Mass  Media 
effective  fall  1977. 


COURSE  CONCENTRATION  BLOCKS 

All  departmental  offerings  are  distributed  within  the 
following  course  concentration  blocks.  Graduate  media  majors 
are  required  to  take  some  preparation  in  each  block.  The 
program  descriptions  which  follow  the  outline  below  describe 
requirements  in  detail. 

Students  are  encouraged  to  visit  their  advisor  and  course 
instructor  at  frequent  intervals,  especially  during  schedule 
planning  stage  prior  to  pre-registration. 

BLOCK  A.  Foundations  and  Research:  LR  500  (see  advisor), 
LR  501,  LR  510,  LR  515  and  GD  550. 

BLOCK  B.  Media  Management:  LR  530,  LR  560,  LR  569. 

BLOCK  C.  Media  Production:  LR  504,  LR  540,  LR  543,  LR  544, 
LR  545,  LR  547,  LR  549,  LR  550,  LR  552  or  LR  571. 

BLOCK  D.  Media  and  Instructional  Development:  LR  502, 
LR  503,  LR  509,  LR  548,  LR  561. 

AND,  LR  580,  1-3  credits  per  each  study  or  project. 

PROGRAM  REQUIREMENTS 

Master  of  Education  in  Instructional  Media 

Admission  Requirements 

In  addition  to  being  admitted  to  the  Graduate  School,  the 
student  must  have  taken  the  GRE  (aptitude  test  only).  Students 
wishing  to  transfer  from  another  graduate  program  at  Indiana  to 
this  program  must  have  at  least  a  B  average  in  graduate  courses 
taken  here.  After  completion  of  at  least  six  semester  hours  and 
before  12  semester  hours,  the  student  will  make  formal 
application  to  the  Graduate  School  and  to  the  departmental 
graduate  committee  for  admission  to  candidacy  for  a  masters 


Program  Curricula  ■ 
Communications  Media 


degree.  The  candidate  must  have  at  least  a  B  average  in 
graduate  courses  taken  at  Indiana  including  either  the  course 
PC  536,  or  EP  504  or  EP  578,  and  at  least  two  courses  from  the 
Learning  Resources  Curriculum.  He  may  then  be  asked  to 
appear  before  the  departmental  Graduate  Committee. 
Master  of  Education  in  Media  Program  Outline 
I.  Professional  Development  area  (9  s.h.) 

A.  Humanistic  Studies  (3  s.h.)  one  of  FE  511,  512,  513,  514 

B.  Behavioral  Studies  (3  s.h.)  one  of  EP  504,  573,  576,  578, 
580  or  CE  529,  CE  539,  SE  531  or  PC  536. 

C.  Research  (3  s.h.)  GR  515 

II.  Specialization  Core  (6  s.h.)  LP  500  and  503 
III.  Subject  Area 

A.  LR  569  Internship  (2  s.h.  minimum)  required  of  all  media 
majors. 

B.  Student  elected  concentrations.  Dependent  upon  option 
(see  below)  selected,  student  will  take  12-18$. h.  of  media 
courses  specializing  in  one  block  or  taking  a  variety  of 
courses  from  Media  Management,  Media  Production  or 
Media  and  Instructional  Development  Blocks. 

C.  Options 

1.  Thesis  —  30  s.h.  including  all  of  I,  Hand  III  A  above,  plus 
thesis. 

2.  Project  —  30  s.h.  including  all  of  I,  II  and  III  A  above, 
plus  project. 

3.  Show  —  33 s.h.  including  all  of  I,  II  and  III  Aabove,  plus 
a  show. 

4.  Course  work  —  36  s.h.  including  all  of  I,  II  and  III  A 
above  plus  18  s.h.  media  courses. 


Certification  as  an  Instructionai  Media  Specialist 

The  specialist  certificate  in  Instructional  Media  may  be 
awarded  to  students  who  hold  a  permanent  college  certificate 
valid  for  elementary  or  secondary  education  and  who  complete 
24  semester  hours  of  graduate  work  in  the  curriculum  of 
Learning  Resources  and  Mass  Media: 

LR  500,  503, 530, 560  and  569  plus  LR  electives  for  a  total  of  24 
hours  are  required  for  certification. 

Students  not  in  the  education  profession  may  wish  to  pursue 
a  similar  program  of  studies  as  preparation  for  careers  as 
trainers  in  business,  industry  and  government  (BIG). 

Graduate  school  admission  does  not  automatically  insure 
acceptance  into  the  certificate  program.  Successful  applicants 
will  present  evidence  of  (1)  the  intellectual  ability  to  do 
acceptable  graduate  work,  (2)  satisfactory  scores  on  either  the 
GRE  or  the  Miller's  Analogy  Test,  and  (3)  professional 
background.  The  departmental  graduate  faculty  will  make  the 
necessary  determinations. 

Graduate  students  from  other  disciplines  may  wish  to  take 
advanced  professional  training  in  the  field  of  Learning 
Resources  and  Mass  Media. 


COURSE  DESCRIPTIONS 

LR    500  SEMINAR  IN  LEARNING  RESOURCES  3  s  h. 

Major  emphasis  on  differences  in  learning  materials,  learners  and  teacfiing 
methods.  The  student  will  do  literary  research  for  a  better  understanding  of  how 
learning  resources  are  related  to  learning  process  in  our  society   (Staff) 

LR    501  THE  CLASSROOM  USE  OF  MOTION  PICTURES  3  s  h. 

Develops  a   basis  for  critical  evaluation   of  films  for  various  educational 

purposes  Emphasis  on  an  understanding  of  production  techniques,  stereotypes, 

prejudices,  and  misconceptions  which  influence  the  quality  of  educatior^al  films. 


86  —  Indiana  University  of  Pennsylvania 


and  upon  the  methods  of  selection,  acquisition,  evaluation  and  distribution  of 
films.  (Maclsaac.  Mattox) 

LR    502  PROGRAfVll^ING  SYSTEMATIC  INSTRUCTION  3  s.h. 

Will  cover  historical  development  theory  and  philosophy,  audio  instructional 
equipment,  programmed  texts,  theories,  of  programming,  types  of  programs 
available,  analysis  and  evaluation  of  research   (Sargent) 

LR    503  DESIGN  &  WRITING  FOR  MEDIA  PRODUCTIONS  3  s  h 

Provides  an  introduction  to  script  writing  for  films  and  filmstrips  Various  styles 
and  techniques  of  writing  will  be  analyzed  and  each  student  will  be  expected  to 
experiment  with  the  techniques  presented-  Emphasis  on  writing  and  criticism,  in 
class,  of  student  script,  (Mattox,  Maclsaac) 

LR    504  FOUNDATIONS  OF  BROADCASTING  3sh 

An  examination  of  the  historical,  legal,  and  economical  aspects  of  modern 
broadcasting  Extensive  readings  in  fundamental  theory  and  a  study  of  current 
station  and  network  practices,  educational  as  well  as  commercial.  (Lesneskie) 

LR    509  PROGRAMMING  MULTI  MEDIA  MATERIALS  3sh 

An  advanced  production  course  utilizing  instructional  development  process  to 

mediate  an  instructional  sequence   Students  will  act  as  consultants  in  planning 

and  production  of  a  multi-media  learning  package.  Prerequisite:  LR  561.  (Juliette) 

LR   510  RESEARCH  METHODOLOGY  IN  MEDIA  3s  h 

Research  methodologies  and  reports  are  studied  and  research  proposals  and 
reports  are  written.  Types  of  research  designs  include  historical,  descriptive, 
inferential  and  quasi-experimental.  Project  designs  and  reports  in  the  area  of 
instructional/learning  media  production  are  studied  separately  from  the  four 
conventional  types  listed  above.  (Mattox) 

LR    515  ROLE  OF  LEARNING  RESOURCES  3sh 

Examines  role  of  perception  as  it  pertains  to  sensory  experiences  and  inner 
cognitive  processes  in  relationship  to  maturation,  goals  and  drives,  and 
environment  Seeks  to  relate  psychological  processes  to  learning  resources,  with 
emphasis  on  newer  media   (Lavenburg) 


LR    540  PREPARATION  OF  LEARNING  RESOURCES  3  s.h. 

Introduction  to  preparation  of  a  wide  variety  of  classroom  materials,  in  which 
building  coordinators,  as  well  as  others,  can  assist  teachers  —  letterings,  coloring, 
mounting,  bulleting  boards,  feltboards.  and  preparation  of  pictures,  maps, 
posters,  charts,  and  graphs  for  projected  and  non-projected  use.  (Klinginsmith) 

LR    543  SLIDE  AND  FILMSTRIP  PRODUCTION  3  s  h. 

Emphasizes  techniques  of  color  and  b/w  slide  preparation,  duplication,  titling 
and  binding:  techniques  necessary  to  produce  color  filmstrips  on  a  commercial 
basis,  and  students  will  participate  in  making  of  a  filmstrip  through  all  stages,  from 
script  to  screen.  Techniques  for  making  home-made  filmstrips  will  also  be 
explored.  Each  student  must  furnish  his  own  35mm  camera,  and  an  acceptable 
exposure  meter   Prerequisite:  LR  571  Photographic  Fundamentals.  (Maclsaac) 

LR    544  BEGINNING  CINEMATOGRAPHY  3  s  h. 

Emphasis  on  effective  use  of  motion  picture  camera  and  editing  tools  to  make 
useful,  locally  produced  teaching  films.  No  previous  experience  is  necessary,  but 
the  student  should  own  or  have  access  to  an  8mm  or  16mm  camera,  and  an 
acceptable  exposure  meter.  (Maclsaac) 

LR    545  ADVANCED  MOTION  PICTURE  PRODUCTION  3  s  h. 

Production  planning  for  motion  pictures,  directing,  advanced  picture  and 
sound  editing  techniques,  and  use  of  sound  recording  and  lab  facilities.  In  addition 
to  live  action  cinematography,  titling,  animation,  and  special  effects  photography 
will  be  investigated   Prerequisite:  LR  544   (Maclsaac) 

LR    547  ANIMATION  3  s.h. 

Introduces  a  variety  of  motion  picture  animation  techniques  and  offers 
practical  experience  in  planning  and  carrying  out  production  of  animated 
sequences  Experimentation  with  filmograph,  cut-out,  puppet,  and  full  eel 
animation.  Practice  in  designing,  drawing,  tracing,  inking,  and  painting  eels; 
preparation  of  blackboards,  use  of  eel  boards:  animation  camera,  and  stand; 
preparation  of  story  boards  and  cue  sheets;  integration  of  visual  and  sound. 
Prerequisite:  LR  544.  (Mac  Isaac) 


LR    530  CLASSIFICATION  AND  CATALOGING 

OF  LEARNING  RESOURCES  3  s.h 

Principles  of  classifying  and  cataloging  learning  resources  such  as  motion 

pictures,  video  tapes,  filmstrips,  slides,  transparencies,  disk  and  tape  recordings, 

microfilm,  microcard  and  microfiche,  flat  pictures,  etc.  For  learning  resources 

administrators  and  librarians.  (Sargent) 


LR    548  WRITING  FOR  RADIO  AND  TELEVISION  3  s.h. 

For  teachers,  school  administrators,  and  non-school  persons  interested  in 
public  service,  non-professional,  or  educational  broadcasting.  Presents  theory 
and  practice  in  planning,  writing,  and  producing  various  kinds  of  programs  for 
listeners  in  and  out  of  schools  Educational  and/or  radio  experience  is  desirable 
but  not  required.  (Lesneskie) 


Program  Curricula  ■ 
Commurtications  Media 


LR    549  TELEVISrON  PRODUCTION  AND  DIRECTION  3  s  h 

An  intensive  lab  course  using  closed  circuit  facilities  designed  to  develop  skills 
in  program  production  and  direction  Theory  and  practice  of  production  is 
examined  with  each  student  expected  to  produde  a  television  program  during  the 
course  (Lesneskie) 

LR    550  ADVANCED  AUDIO  RECORDING  TECHNIQUES  3sh 

Theory  and  practice  of  recording  sound  for  motion  pictures,  video  tapes,  audio 
tapes,  sound  filmstnps.  etc  Will  use  sound  on  sound  and  other  special  recording 
techniques.  (Maclsaac) 

LR   552  ADVANCED  TELEVISION  PRODUCTION  3  s  h 

For  advanced  graduate  student  with  prior  training  and  experience  in  television 
Advanced  television  production  techniques,  set  design,  lighting,  remote  video 
taping,  special  effects,  and  production  of  a  professional  quality  documentary. 
Prerequisite:  LR  549  (Lesneskie) 

LR   560  MANAGEMENT  OF  LEARNING 

RESOURCES  PROGRAMS  3  S.h. 

Considers  the  problems  in  setting  up  and  managing  an  integrated  program, 
including  production,  selection,  utilization,  and  management  of  Learning 
Resources  Centers:  and  problems  of  finance  and  organization  of  the  different 
services:  relationships  among  school  systems,  colleges,  and  community  and  adult 
groups:  and  evaluation  standards  for  various  services.  (Sargent) 

LR    561  INSTRUCTIONAL  DESIGN  AND 

INSTRUCTIONAL  DEVELOPMENT  3  s  h 

Theory  lor  advanced  graduate  students  where  they  will  develop  competence 
in  instructional  design,  systems,  approach  to  instructional  decision  making, 
defining  purposes,  organizing  content,  selecting  learning  methods  and  identirying 
technological  developments  to  meet  multiple  needs  of  individuals  and  society 
Prerequisites:  LR  515  and  Educational  Psychology  (see  instructor)   (Lavenburg) 

LR    569  INTERNSHIP  PROGRAM  OF  LEARNING 

RESOURCES  SPECIALISTS  2-6  s  h 

A  candidate  would  work  in  a  carefully  planned  variety  of  roles  in  a 
comprehensive  regional  learning  resources  center  or  similar  situation,  television 
broadcasting  or  closed-circuit  facility,  motion  picture  production  agency, 
programmed  learning  development  organization,  learning  resources  workshop 
program,  little  theater  group,  major  museum  or  approved  equivalent,  under 
competent  university  and  agency  supervision,  and  would  be  rated  by  both  the 
cooperating  agency  and  the  University.  (Staff) 


LR    571  PHOTOGRAPHIC  FUNDAMENTALS  3  s.h. 

Emphasis  on  use  of  still  picture  camera  and  the  darkroom  for  instructional 
purposes,  the  making  of  b/w  negatives.  35mm  slides,  copywork,  developing  b/w 
and  color  film,  and  b/w  contact  pnnting  and  enlarging  Each  student  must  furnish 
his  own  35mm  camera  and  an  acceptable  exposure  meter  No  previous 
photographic  experience  is  necessary   (Maclsaac,  Matlox) 

LR    572  ADVANCED  PHOTOGRAPHY  I  3  s  h. 

Students  in  Advanced  Photography  I  will  be  expected  to  develop  their  camera 
and  print-making  skills  to  the  degree  that  they  can  produce  solon-quality 
photographic  prints  Students  will  understand  the  photographic  processes 
utilized  in  producing  a  high  quality  negative  and  print  to  the  extent  that  they  can 
manipulate  those  processes  to  communicate  an  intended  message  with  their 
photographs  Emphasis  will  be  placed  on  camera  and  print  control  as  well  as 
composition  and  negative  and  print  manipulation.  Prerequisites:  LR  571  and 
permission  of  the  instructor  (Juliette) 

LR    573  ADVANCED  PHOTOGRAPHY  II 

In  Advanced  Photography  II.  a  student  will  pursue  on  an  individual  basis  those 
photographic  skills  which  he  wants  to  develop  to  a  high  proficiency  Topics  to  be 
covered  in  lecture  include  high-contrast  photography,  silk  screen  photography, 
tone  line,  bas  relief,  posterization,  etch  bleach,  photo  sketching,  print  screening, 
color  print  and  slide  making,  lighting  techniques  and  flash  photography  as  well  as 
other  topics  that  might  be  pertinent  to  meeting  a  student's  objectives. 
Prerequisites:  LR  571  and  permission  of  the  Instructor.  (Juliette) 

LR    599  GRADUATE  INDEPENDENT  STUDY  1-3  Sh. 

The  student  may  elect,  with  approval  of  his  advisor,  to  do  several  different 
independent  study  projects  University  facilities  and  equipment  are  provided  but 
student  must  supply  his  own  materials  and  pay  for  processing  and  production 
costs  Prerequisite:  Successful  completion  of  the  basic  courses  in  the  medium 
selected,  and  professors  approval    (Staff) 


88  —  Indiana  University  ot  Pennsylvania 


MATHEMATICS 


The  Mathematics  Department  offers  the  Master  of  Education 
degree  with  major  in  mathematics  and  the  Master  of  Science 
degree. 

The  Master  of  Education  program  is  specifically  designed  for 
secondary  mathematics  teachers.  Its  purpose  is  to  provide  an 
opportunity  for  the  student  to  increase  his  knowledge  of 
mathematics  and  to  become  aware  of  research  and  innovations 
in  mathematics  education. 

The  course  requirements  for  the  Master  of  Science  program 
are  quite  flexible  and  include  an  option  of  six  hours  in  an  area 
related  to  mathematics.  This  flexibility  allows  the  program  to 
serve  many  purposes,  including  appropriate  choices  for 
secondary  mathematics  teachers,  for  persons  preparing  for 
employment  in  areas  of  applied  mathematics,  and  for  students 
who  will  pursue  further  graduate  work  in  mathematics. 

Each  graduate  student  will  be  assigned  an  academic  advisor 
to  aid  in  selecting  the  most  appropriate  program.  Approval  of 
the  advisor  is  required  for  all  courses  leading  to  the  Master's 
degree. 

MASTER  OF  EDUCATION  DEGREE 

A  minimum  of  30  semester  hours  is  required  for  the  Masterof 
Education  degree.  Courses  taken  must  satisfy  the  following 
requirements. 

1.  Exactly  one  course  (3  s.h.)  from  FE  511-514 

2.  Exactly  one  course  (3  s.h.)  from  EP  504,  EP  573,  EP  576, 
EP  578.  EP  580,  CE  529,  CE  539,  SE  531 

3.  GR  515,  Elements  of  Research  (3  s.h.) 


4.  Exactly  6  s.h.  from  MA  510,  MA  51 1,  MA  540,  MA  542.  With 
special  permission  from  the  advisor,  EM  521  and  EM  522 
are  acceptable  for  this  requirement. 

5.  A  minimum  of  15  semester  hours  of  mathematics  content 
courses.  All  three-hour  graduate  mathematics  courses  are 
considered  content  courses  with  the  single  exception  of 
MA  600.  MA  531  and  MA  559  are  required  unless 
comparable  courses  have  been  completed  at  the  under- 
graduate level. 

MASTER  OF  SCIENCE  DEGREE 

Every  candidate  for  the  Master  of  Science  Degree  in 
Mathematics  must  complete  at  least  30  semester  hours  of 
graduate  work.  These  courses  must  satisfy  the  following 
criteria: 

1.  The  course  MA  600,  Methods  of  Research  in  Mathematics 
is  required  of  all  students. 

2.  The  two  courses  MA  559,  Introduction  to  Abstract  Algebra 
and  MA  531,  Advanced  Calculus  I,  are  required  unless 
comparable  courses  have  been  completed  at  the  under- 
graduate level. 

3.  Each  student  must  complete  27  hours  of  content  courses 
in  mathematics  or  21  hours  of  content  courses  in  mathe- 
matics and  6  hours  in  a  related  area.  In  either  case,  the 
choice  of  courses  in  both  mathematics  and  in  the  related 
area  must  be  made  with  the  approval  of  the  advisor. 

COURSE  DESCRIPTIONS 

MA  510  THE  TEACHING  OF  JUNIOR  HIGH 

SCHOOL  MATHEMATICS  2  s.h. 

Explores  problems  of  teaching  mathematics  at  junior  high  school  level. 


Program  Curricula  - 
Mathematics 


Emphasis  on  a  discovery,  laboratory-oriented  approach  to  teaching.  Prerequisite; 
Permission  ot  the  instructor 

MA  51 1  THE  TEACHING  OF  SENIOR  HIGH 

SCHOOL  MATHEMATICS  2  s.h. 

National  and  international  forces  shaping  today's  mathematics  programs, 
curriculum  development  and  research,  an  of  generating  interest,  formation  of 
concepts,  proof,  problem  solving,  generalization,  and  evaluation  Special 
attention  to  teaching  of  topics  from  algebra  and  calculus,  and  to  modern  approach 
of  leaching  geometry  and  trigonometry  Prerequisite  Permission  of  the  instructor 

MA  522  THEORY  OF  PROBABILITY  3  s  h 

Probability  theory  necessary  for  an  understanding  of  mathematical  statistics  is 
developed:  applications  of  the  theory  are  given,  with  emphasis  on  binomial, 
Poisson.  and  normal  distributions  Distributions  of  sums  and  a  central  limit 
theorem  are  developed   Three  hours  lecture  per  week. 

MA  524  MATHEMATICAL  STATISTICS  I  3sh 

Multivariate  distributions,  properties  of  the  moment  generating  function, 
change  of  variable  technique.  Chi-square  distribution,  estimation,  confidence 
intervals,  testing  hypotheses,  contingency  tables,  goodness  of  fit  Many  practical 
applications  Use  of  calculating  machines  where  appropriate  Three  hours  lecture 
per  week 

MA  525  MATHEMATICAL  STATISTICS  II  3s  h 

Correlation  and  regression  from  applied  and  theoretical  points  of  view, 
bivariate  normal  distribution,  small  sample  theory  Student's  t  and  F  distributions, 
analysis  of  variance,  nonparamelric  methods  Many  practical  applications.  Use  of 
calculating  machines  or  computers  where  appropriate  Three  hours  lecture  per 
week 

MA  531-532  ADVANCED  CALCULUS  I.  II  3.  3  s  h 

A  ngorous  investigation  of  continuity,  differentiation,  and  integration  on  real 
p-dimensional  space  The  Riemann-Stieltges  integral,  infinite  series,  and  infinite 
series  of  functions  are  also  studies   Prerequisite   Permission  of  the  advisor 

MA  533-534  COMPLEX  ANALYSIS  I.  II  3.  3  s  h 

Introduces  fundamental  concepts  of  complex  analysis  and  includes  following 
topics  complex  numbers,  functions,  sequences,  analytic  functions,  elementary 
functions,  complex  integration,  power  series,  Laurent  series,  singular  points, 
calculus  of  residues,  infinite  product  and  partial  traction  expansion,  conformal 
mapping,  and  analytic  continuation    Prerequisite   MA  531  or  its  equivalent 


MA  535-536  REAL  ANALYSIS  I.  II  3,  3  S.h. 

Classical  theory  of  functions  of  a  real  variable  and  of  measure  and  integration 
theory   Prerequisite:  MA  531  or  its  equivalent 

MA  537  DIFFERENTIAL  EQUATIONS  3sh 

The  existence  theorems  of  ordinary  differential  equations  are  proved  and 
extended  to  higher  dimensional  spaces.  Numerical  methods  are  used  to  produce 
approximate  solutions  Singular  points  for  autonomous  differential  equations  are 
studied   Prerequisite:  MA  531.  or  its  equivalent. 


MA  540  HISTORY  OF  MATHEMATICS  2  s.h. 

Men  and  ideas  that  have  shaped  the  course  of  events  in  mathematics  are 
examined  Major  attention  is  given  to  developing  activities  for  secondary  school 
mathematics  classroom  which  incorporate  the  historical  viewpoint 

MA  542  CURRICULUM  &  SUPERVISION  IN  MATHEMATICS  2  S.h. 

Basic  principles  underlying  an  effective  mathematics  curriculum  are  examined 

from  both  a  theoretical  and  an  experimental  viewpoint.  Role  of  supervisor  as  a 

source  of  stimulation,  leadership,  and  expertise  in  teaching  of  mathematics  is 

investigated. 

MA  558  NUMBER  THEORY  3  S.h. 

Elementary    properties    of    divisibility,    congruences.    Chinese    remainder 

theorem,  primitive  roots  and  indices,  quadratic  reciprocity,  Diphantine  equations, 

and  number  theoretic  functions  Prerequisites:  Differential  and  Integral  Calculus. 

MA  559  INTRODUCTION  TO  ABSTRACT  ALGEBRA  3  s.h. 

Basic  algebraic  structures  such  as  groups,  nngs.  integral  domains,  and  fields. 
Designed  to  develop  the  students  ability  to  construct  formal  proofs  and  to  work 
within  an  abstract  axiomatic  system.  Prerequisite:  Permission  of  the  advisor. 

MA  561-562  ABSTRACT  ALGEBRA  I.  II  3.  3  s  h. 

Primary  emphasis  on  development  of  polynomial  rings,  factorization,  and  field 

extension  leading  up  to  Galois  Theory   Additional  topics  in  group  theory,  ring 

theory,  and  study  of  modules  are  included  Prerequisite  MA  559  or  its  equivalent. 


MA  563  LINEAR  ALGEBRA  3  s  h. 

Theory  of  vector  spaces  and  linear  transformations  and  applications  to  linear 
equations,  determinants,  and  characteristic  roots  are  studied  Prerequisites  MA 
559  or  its  equivalent  or  undergraduate  linear  algebra 


90  —  Indiana  University  of  Pennsylvania 


MA  571  PROJECTIVE  GEOMETRY  3  s.h. 

An  introduction  to  Klein's  formulation  of  geometry  of  tfie  invariant  theory  of  a 
given  set  under  a  given  group  of  transformations  and  develops  projective  spaces 
of  1  and  2  dimensions  and  conies  and  quadratic  forms.  Prerequisites: 
Undergraduate  courses  in  linear  algebra  and  geometry 

MA  572  AFFINE  GEOMETRY  3  s  h 

Examines  affine  and  metric  geometries  based  on  an  axiom  system  stated  in 
terms  of  linear  algebra,  which  leads  to  important  theorems  of  classical  geometry. 
Prerequisites:  Undergraduate  courses  in  linear  and  abstract  algebra 

MA  573  TOPOLOGY  3  s.h. 

Basic  topological  concepts,  including  some  topological  invariants. 
Relationships  between  topology  and  other  disciplines  of  mathematics  are 
discussed.  Prerequisites:  MA  531  or  its  equivalent. 

MA  575  FOUNDATIONS  OF  MATHEMATICS  I  3  s.h. 

Designed  to  acquaint  the  student  with  logical  techniques  used  in  proof  and  set 
theory  Topics  include  symbolic  logic,  rules  and  inference,  validity  of  arguments, 
algebra  of  sets,  cardinal  numbers,  the  well-ordering  property,  and  the  Axiom  of 
Choice. 

MA  576  FOUNDATIONS  OF  MATHEMATICS  II  3  s  h 

Properties  of  axiom  systems  including  consistency,  independence,  and 
completeness  for  propositional  calculus  and  first-order  predicate  calculus. 
Prerequisites:  MA  575  and  at  least  six  semester  hours  of  graduate  level 
mathematics 

MA  590-593  TOPIC  SEMINARS  IN  MATHEMATICS  3  s.h. 

Special  topics  which  go  beyond  the  scope  of  regularly  offered  courses. 
Offered  on  basis  of  student  interest  and  availble  staff.  The  student  may  take  more 
than  one  Topic  Seminar  with  the  written  approval  of  the  advisor.  Prerequisite: 
Consent  of  the  instructor. 


MA  600  METHODS  OF  RESARCH  IN  MATHEMATICS  2  s  h. 

Review  of  literature  and  recent  research  in  mathematics.  Emphasis  is  on  the 
use  of  periodicals  and  other  library  resources.  Each  student  will  complete  an 
independent  study  of  an  approved  topic,  including  a  written  report. 

MA  690  INDEPENDENT  STUDY  IN  MATHEMATICS  3  s.h. 

Under  the  guidance  of  a  faculty  member,  a  student  may  study  some  area  of 
mathematics  not  in  the  regular  courses. 


SC  573-574  COMPUTATIONS  IN  PHYSICS  &  CHEMISTRY  4  s.h. 

Designed  to  help  the  teacher  of  physics  and  chemistry,  who  has  a  limited 
background  in  mathematics,  to  become  more  skillful  in  solution  of  problems 
usually  encountered  in  physics  and  chemistry  courses.  It  should  also  provide  him 
with  a  more  adequate  background  to  deal  with  problems  in  his  courses  in  graduate 
program 


MATHEMATICS  FOR  ELEMENTARY  SCHOOL 
TEACHERS 

The  program  leading  to  a  Master  of  Education  Degree  in 
Mathematics  for  Elementary  School  Teachers  is  designed  to 
give  the  elementary  school  or  middle  school  teacher  both  depth 
and  breadth  in  the  mathematical  concepts  essential  to  a 
contemporary  school  mathematics  program.  An  integral  part  of 
the  program  will  be  to  familiarize  the  students  with  recent 
developments  in  curriculum,  instruction,  and  implementation  of 
contemporary  mathematics  programs  in  the  elementary 
schools.  Upon  completion  of  the  program  the  student  will  be 
prepared  to  serve  as  a  supervisor,  coordinator  or  resource 
person  for  the  elementary  or  middle  school  mathematics 
program  within  his  school  or  school  district.  For  teachers  in  the 
public  schools,  the  program  meets  the  credit  requirements  for 
instructional  Level  II  certification. 

Each  person  admitted  to  the  program  will  be  assigned  an 
advisor  who  will  assist  the  student  in  selection  of  the  course 
work  best  suited  to  the  student's  background  and  professional 
aspirations. 

A  minimum  of  30  semester  hours  is  required  for  the  Master  of 
Education  in  Mathematics  for  Elementary  School  Teachers 
Degree.  Courses  taken  must  satisfy  the  following  requirements: 

I.  Professional  Development  Area  —  9semester  hours  as  listed 
below: 

A.  Humanistic  Studies  —  3  semester  hours  should  be 
selected  from  FE  511-514.  Course  descriptions  are  under 
listings  for  the  Foundations  of  Education  department. 


Program  Curricula  —  91 
Mathematics 
Mathematics  tor  Elementary  Teachers 

B.  Behavioral  Studies  —  3  semester  hours  should  be 
selected  from  the  following:  EP  504,  EP  573,  EP  576, 
EP  578,  EP  580,  CE  529  (Elem.),  CE  539,  or  SE  531 .  Course 
descriptions  are  under  the  appropriate  departmental 
listings  for  the  Educational  Psychology,  Counselor 
Education,  and  Special  Education  departments. 

C.  Educational  Research  —  3  semester  hours. 
GD  515         Elements  of  Research. 


II.  Specialization  Core  —  6  semester  hours  required  from  EM 
520-522. 


III.  Subject  Matter  Concentration  Area  — 11 -15  semester  hours. 

A  minimum  of  15  semester  hours  will  usually  be  selected 
from  EM  501-522  if  the  student  elects  not  to  write  a  thesis. 
If  the  student  elects  to  write  a  thesis,  1 1  semester  hours  will 
be  taken  in  the  Subject  Matter  Concentration  Area.  Courses 
other  than  those  with  "EM"  department  label  (such  as  MA 
690)  may  be  taken  to  meet  the  Subject  Matter  Concentration 
Area  requirements  with  the  advisor's  consent. 

IV.  Thesis  (optional)  —  2-4  semester  hours. 

A  student  may  elect  to  write  a  thesis  for  2-4  semester 
hours  of  credit  after  consultation  with  his  advisor.  This 
decision  must  be  made  at  the  time  the  student  is  admitted  to 
candidacy  for  the  degree. 

Thesis  credits  will  be  determined  by  the  advisor  in  con- 
sultation with  the  student.  No  more  than  3  credits  may  be 
received  for  a  noncommittee  thesis. 


92  —  Indiana  University  of  Pennsylvania 


INTERNSHIP  PROGRAM  AS  PART  OF  THE 
MASTER  OF  EDUCATION  IN  MATHEMATICS 
FOR  ELEMENTARY  SCHOOL  TEACHERS 
DEGREE  PROGRAM 

Indiana  University  of  Pennsylvania  in  cooperation  with  a 
selected  school  system  offers  a  graduate  level  Internship 
Program  leading  to  the  Master  of  Education  in  Mathematics  for 
Elementary  School  Teachers  degree.  This  program  is  intended 
to  provide  a  limited  number  of  w^ell  qualified  graduate  students 
with  teaching  experiences  in  a  compensatory  K-8  mathematics 
program  while  completing  the  requirements  for  the  Master  of 
Education  in  Mathematics  for  Elementary  School  Teachers 
degree. 

The  professional  work  experiences  of  the  interns  will  earn 
graduate  credit  and  therefore  will  be  subject  to  review  and 
evaluation  by  a  faculty  member  from  the  University,  as  well  as 
being  under  the  supervision  of  designated  public  school 
personnel. 

Information  regarding  the  Internship  Program  may  be 
obtained  from:  Director  of  Graduate  Studies  in  Mathematics  for 
Elementary  School  Teachers,  Mathematics  Department, 
Indiana  University  of  Pennsylvania,  Indiana,  PA  15701. 


COURSE  DESCRIPTIONS 

EM  501  BASIC  CONCEPTS  IN  MATHEMATICS  I  3  s  h 

For  students  who  have  not  taken  MA  160  or  an  equivalent  course  as 
undergraduates  Will  give  a  good  understanding  of  development  and  structure  ot 
systems  of  numeration  up  to  and  including  the  set  of  real  numbers. 


EM  502  BASIC  CONCEPTS  IN  MATHEMATICS  II  3  s.h. 

For  students  who  as  undergraduates  have  not  taken  MA  250  or  an  equivalent 
course.  Will  give  a  basic  understanding  of  algebraic  properties  of  different 
mathematical  systems,  and  help  the  student  to  understand  how  properties  of 
number  systems  are  interrelated 

EM  504  FOUNDATIONS  OF  ALGEBRA  3  s.h. 

Concepts  of  an  algebraic  system  and  its  basic  structure,  group,  ring,  integral 
domain,  field  and  vector  space  are  considered  within  the  context  of  the 
mathematical  maturity  of  the  student.  Other  concepts  include  —  relation  and 
function,  polynomials  and  polynomial  equations,  systems  of  equations,  and 
systems  of  inequalities  Concepts  at  the  elementary  level  are  illustrated  and 
studied  to  afford  opportunity  for  application  of  the  technique  developed 
Prerequisite:  EM  502  or  equivalent 

EM  505  PRINCIPLES  OF  GEOMETRY  I  3  s.h 

Acquaints  students  with  an  informal  approach  to  geometry  by  looking  at  world 
of  shapes  and  their  properties  Students  involved  in  activities  that  can  be  used  in 
elementary  classroom;  they  will  look  at  practical  instances  of  various  theorems  of 
both  plane  and  solid  figures.  The  newer  notation,  vocabulary  and  methods  will  be 
used  and  discussed.  Prerequisite:  EM  502  or  equivalent. 

EM  506  PRINCIPLES  OF  GEOMETRY  II  3  s.h. 

This  course  is  an  extension  of  EM  515.  Some  topics  will  be  studied  in  greater 
depth,  but  relatively  informally.  Non-Euclidean  geometries  studied  through 
related  activities   Prerequisite:  EM  505  or  equivalent. 

EM  507  PRE-CALCULUS  MATHEMATICS  I  3sh 

Will  examine  function  concept  as  applied  to  elementary  real  number  functions 
and  techniques  used  to  graph  these  functions.  Topics  include  real  number 
functions  such  as  absolute  value  function,  step  functions,  linear  quadratic  and 
other  polynomial  functions,  trigonometric  and  other  periodic  functions,  and 
inverse  functions  such  as  exponential  and  logarithmic  functions.  Students  will 
examine  curricular  materials  that  develop  these  concepts  in  grades  K-B. 
Prerequisite:  EM  502  or  equivalent 

EM  508  PRE-CALCULUS  MATHEMATICS  II  3  s.h. 

Will  extend  investigations  begun  in  EM  507  or  real  relations  and  their  graphs. 
Topics  included  are  relations  and  functions  whose  graphs  are  conic  sections, 
transformations  of  coordinate  systems  and  the  complex  number  system  as  a 
vector  space  Consideration  given  to  placement  of  these  concepts  in  the  K-12 
curriculum.  Prerequisite:  EM  507  or  equivalent. 


Program  Curricula  —  93 
Mathematics  tor  Elementary  Teachers 


EM  509  INTRODUCTION  TO  NUMBER  THEORY  3  s  h 

Introduction  to  topics  of  elementary  number  theory  including:  basic 
operations  and  properties  o(  integers,  divisibility  properties  of  integers;  modular 
arithmetic  and  congruences;  diophantine  equations;  interesting  relationships 
among  numbers,  applications  of  number  theory  in  elementary  school 
mathematics   Prerequisite   EM  502  or  equivalent 

EM  510  INTRODUCTION  TO  LOGIC  AND  BOOLEAN  ALGEBRA  3s  h 

Introduction  to  some  basic  ideas,  terminology  and  notation  of  logic  and 
Boolean  Algebra  Topics  considered:  symbolic  logic,  with  special  emphasis  on 
algebra  of  propositions;  applications  of  Boolean  Algebra  such  as  algebra  of  sets 
and  switching  circuits;  an  introduction  to  quantification  theory  and  its  value  in 
determining  validity  of  mathematical  arguments,  inference  schemes  and  logical 
puzzles  and  a  consideration  of  other  topics  in  logic  suitable  for  a  K-8  mathematics 
curriculum   Prerequisite:  EM  502  or  equivalent 

EM  511  INTRODUCTION  TO  COMPUTING  MACHINES 

AND  THEIR  USES  3  s.h. 

Introduces  student  to  computing  machines  and  techniques  which  could  have 
implications  for  the  contemporary  elementary  school  mathematics  curriculum. 
Topics  include  understanding  of  construction  and  uses  of  nomograms;  slide 
rules;  desk  calculators  and  high  speed  digital  computer:  introduction  to  computer 
programming  using  "Basic"  computer  language;  use  of  computer  for  Computer 
Assisted  Instruction  in  grades  K-8  Prerequisite:  EM  502  or  equivalent 

EM  512  INTRODUCTION  TO  PROBABILITY  &  STATISTICS  3  s.h 

Introduces  students  to  elementary  concepts  of  probability  and  statistics  which 
will  enable  them  to  analyze  data,  make  predictions  and  determine  what  concepts 
may  be  used  with  children   Prerequisite:  EM  502  or  equivalent 

EM  513  CONCEPTS  OF  CALCULUS  3sh 

Introduction  to  differential  and  integral  calculus  designed  to  develop  basic 
concepts  and  to  show  both  power  of  calculus  and  its  position  in  mathematics 
Relation  of  calculus  to  the  fundamental  concepts  developed  in  elementary  school 
and  middle  school  mathematics   Prerequisite   EM  508  or  equivalent 

EM  515  INTUITIVE  TOPOLOGY  3  s.h. 

Selected  topological  concepts  from  an  intuitive  rather  than  an  axiomatic 
viewpoint  Topics  included  are:  topological  equivalence;  networks;  maps;  Jordan 
Curve  Theorem;  topological  transformations;  spaces;  Piagefs  studies  regarding 
topological  understandings  of  children;  methods  and  material  for  teaching  related 
topics.  Prerequisite:  EM  505  or  equivalent. 


EM  520  CURRICULUM  4  INSTRUCTION  IN  ELEMENTARY 

SCHOOL  MATHEMATICS  PROGRAMS  3  s.h. 

Gives  the  experienced  elementary  teacher  access  to  latest  literature, 
equipment,  materials  and  procedures  Topics  include:  experimental  programs 
that  have  made  an  impact  on  teaching  and  learning,  criteria  for  selection  of 
suitable  new  texts  for  a  school  district;  ways  of  implementing  a  contemporary 
program;  investigation,  discussion,  demonstration  and  evaluation  of  manipulative 
aids   Prerequisite:  EM  502  or  equivalent. 

EM  521  THE  LABORATORY  APPROACH  TO  TEACHING 

MATHEMATICS  3  s  h. 

Development  of  lab  approach  to  the  teaching  of  mathematics  Includes  both  an 
intensive  study  of  techniques  organization  and  supervision  of  laboratory  activities 
and  the  practical  design  construction  and  implementation  of  materials 

EM  522  DIAGNOSIS  AND  REMEDIAL  TEACHING 

OF  MATHEMATICS  3  9  h. 

Examines    why   some    children    have    difficulty    in    learning   mathematical 

concepts  and  present  tools  and  techniques  for  diagnosing  and  remediating 

common  difficulties  in  elementary  and  middle  school  mathematics.  Course 

valuable  for  those  teaching  in  elementary,  middle  school  or  remedial  programs. 


94  —  Indiana  University  of  Pennsylvania 


MUSIC  AND  MUSIC  EDUCATION 

The  graduate  program  in  music  provides  the  student  with 
opportunities  to  improve  his  sl<ills  as  teacher,  performer  or 
scholar  beyond  the  bachelor's  degree.  Upon  acceptance  by  the 
Graduate  School,  each  student  consults  the  Director  of 
Graduate  Studies  in  Music  who  will  help  to  plan  the  sequence  of 
courses,  and  who  will  be  responsible  for  the  formation  of  the 
thesis  or  recital  committee. 

Admission:  Undergraduate  degree  with  major  in  music  or  its 
demonstrated  equivalent  is  required.  Placement  examinations 
will  be  required  in  theory,  music  history,  piano  proficiency  and 
principal  performing  medium.  The  advisor  will  use  the  results  of 
these  examinations  to  determine  areas  of  deficiency  and  to 
prescribe  specific  electives. 

CURRICULUM  FOR  MASTER  OF  ARTS  IN  MUSIC 

Core  Courses:  MU  500,  MU  516  (MU  518  for  Music  Education) 
and  MU  532  9  s.h. 

Major  Concentration: 
1.  Music  History  and  Literature  —  Courses  (4)  are  selected 
from  the  following: 

MU  503,  MU  504,  MU  505,  MU  507.  MU  508,  MU  510, 
MU518  12  s.h. 

II.  Music  Theory  and  Composition  —  Courses  (4)  are 
selected  from  the  following: 
MU  511,  MU  512,  MU  513,  MU  514,  MU  515, 
MU  518  11-12  s.h. 

III.  Music  Performance  —  Applied  music  courses  in  the 


major  performance  area 

AM  501-670  12  s.h. 

IV.  Music  Education  —  MU  519  and  MU  520  are  required; 
with  recital  or  thesis,  two  or  three  additional  courses 
are  selected;  without  recital  or  thesis,  up  to  four 
additional  courses  are  selected  from  the  following: 
MU  501,  MU  502.  MU  528,  MU  529,  MU  531,  MU  533, 
MU  534,  MU  535,  MU  536,  MU  537,  MU  540-550  10-14  s.h. 

Elective  Courses: 

If  major  concentration  is  I,  II.  or  III.  courses  totaling 

6  s.h.  are  selected  according  to  students'  needs  and 

interests. 

If  major  concentration  Is  IV.  select  a  music  theory  or 

history  course  and  applied  music  study  in  students' 

major  or  minor  performance  area 

Thesis  or  Recital: 

GD  550         Thesis— If  majorconcentrationlslorll  3-4s.h. 

(Optional  if majorconcentration  is  IV)  2-4s.h. 

GD  551          Recital— If  majorconcentration  Is  III  4s. h. 

(Optional  if  majorconcentration  is  IV)  2-4s.h. 

CURRICULUM  FOR  MASTER  OF  EDUCATION 
IN  MUSIC  EDUCATION 

I.  Professional  Development  Area  (9  s.h.) 

A.  Humanistic  Studies  (3  s.h.)  —  One  of  the  following: 
FE  511,  FE  512,  FE  513,  or  FE  514 

B.  Behavioral  Studies  (3  s.h.  )  —  One  of  the  following: 

EP  504,  EP  573,  EP  576,  EP  578,  EP  580,  CE  529,  CE  539,  or 
SE531 


Program  Curricula  —  95 
Music  and  Music  Education 


C.  Research  (3  s.h.) 

GR  515,  Elements  of  Research 

Specialization  Core  (6  cr.)  —  Two  of  the  following: 
F.E.  515  Decision  Making  Curriculum 

Development  3  cr. 

L.R. 500  Seminar  in  Learning  Resources  3  cr. 

Departmental  Methods  Course(s)       3-6  cr. 

Departmental  Curriculum  Course(s)  3-6  cr. 

.  Subject  Area  and/or  Electives  and/or  Thesis  (15  cr.) 

A.  Required  Courses  —  Music  Education  Core  (9  cr.) 
MU518  Comprehensive  Musicianship  3  cr. 
MU  519         Methods  for  Comprehensive 

Musicianship  3  cr. 

MU520         Foundations  of  Music  Education  3  cr. 

B.  Elective  Courses  (6  cr.  selected  from  the  following  list) 


MU501 
MU502 
MU528 


MU529 
MU531 

MU533 
MU534 
MU535 
MU536 

MU537 


Advanced  Choral  Conducting 
Advanced  Instrumental  Conducting 
Contemporary  International  Ap- 
proaches to  Elementary  Music 
Education 

Advanced  String  Pedagogy 
Administrative  Problems  in  Music 
Education 

Comparative  Choral  Methods 
Practicum  in  Instrumental  Music 
Psychology  of  Music  Education 
Advanced  Technology  of  Music 
Teaching 
Techniques  of  the  Marching  Band 


2cr. 
2  cr. 


2cr. 
2cr. 

2cr. 
2cr. 
2  cr. 
2  cr. 

2  cr. 
2cr. 


MU  540-550  Summer  Music  Workshop 

(content  varies)  1-3cr. 

AM  501-670  Applied  Music  1-4cr. 

Other  approved  elective 
C.  Thesis  or  Recital  (optional)  2-4  cr. 


COURSE  DESCRIPTIONS 


MU  500  BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  MUSIC  3  S.h. 

Introduces  graduate  students  to  various  types  ot  music,  music  literature  and 
bibliographical  tools  which  exist  and  which  may  be  used  in  research  in  music  Asa 
project,  each  student  will  prepare  an  extensive  annotated  bibiography  ot  a  music 
subject  within  his  special  interest 

MU  501  ADVANCED  CHORAL  CONDUCTING  2  S.h. 

Material  will  include  large  choral  works  with  and  without  accompaniment. 
Student  will  be  expected  to  develop  skills  in  reading  score. 

MU502  ADVANCED  INSTRUMENTAL  CONDUCTING  2  s.h. 

An  intensive  study  of  large  instrumental  works.  Skill  development  of  each 
individual  will  be  stressed. 


MU  503  MUSIC  OF  THE  BAROQUE  ERA 

A  survey  of  music  from  about  1600  to  1750 


MU  504  MUSIC  OF  THE  CLASSIC  ERA 

A  survey  of  music  from  about  1725  to  about  1827 


MU  505  MUSIC  OF  THE  ROMANTIC  ERA 

A  survey  of  music  from  about  1800  to  1910. 


MU  507  MUSIC  OF  THE  20TH  CENTURY  3  s.h. 

A  survey  of  the  principal  stylistic  trends  in  music  from  1900  to  the  present. 


MU  508  MUSIC  OF  THE  16TH  CENTURY 

A  survey  of  music  from  about  1500  to  about  1600. 


96  —  Indiana  University  of  Pennsylvania 


MU510  SEMINAR  IN  MUSIC  3sh 

Subject  matter  will  change  each  semester  Students  will  make  presentations 
and  write  an  extensive  research  paper  Seminar  may  be  repeated  provided  subject 
matter  is  not  (with  departmental  approval)  An  in-depth  study  can  be  made  of 
narrowly  defined  areas,  such  as  life  and/or  works  of  a  specific  composer  or  group 
of  composers. 

MU511  COMPOSITION  3sn 

Composition  of  Music  in  various  song  forms  through  the  rondos  and  the  larger 
sonata  allegro  form.  Careful  analysis  of  similar  forms  of  major  composers 
Instruction  will  be  highly  individualized  and  will  depend  considerably  on  personal 
interest  of  the  student 

MU512  ADVANCED  ORCHESTRATION  3  s  h. 

Consideration  to  problems  of  scoring  for  full  symphony  orchestra,  string 
orchestra  and  chamber  orchestra  Students  will  produce  a  full  score  and  orchestra 
parts  so  that  orchestration  may  be  tested  by  actual  playing  by  the  University 
Symphony 

I^U513  ADVANCED  BAND  SCORING  3sh 

Problems  of  scoring  for  modern  concert  band.  In  addition,  problems  of  scoring 
for  brass  band,  woodwind  choir,  and  percussion  ensemble  will  be  considered. 


MU  519  METHODS  FOR  COMPREHENSIVE  MUSICIANSHIP  3  s.h. 

Includes  learning  strategies,  experiences,  and  activities  appropriate  for 
introducing  Comprehensive  Musicianship  at  elementary  and  secondary  school 
levels 


MU  520  FOUNDATIONS  OF  MUSIC  EDUCATION  3  s  h 

Study  of  historical,  philosophical  and  social  foundations  of  music  education 
including  current  trends  in  educational  thought  and  their  implications  for  school 
music  program. 

MU  521  MUSIC  LITERATURE  AND  MATERIALS 

(NON-MUSIC  MAJORS  ONLY)  2  s.h. 

Enhance  musical  background  of  elementary  teacher  through  acquaintance 
with  suitable  literature  and  materials.  (See  Elementary  Education  Program) 

MU  528  CONTEMPORARY  INTERNATIONAL  APPROACHES 

TO  ELEMENTARY  EDUCATION  2  s  h. 

An  introduction  to  new  developments  in  elementary  music  education  practices 

based  on  techniques  originated  by  Carl  Orff  in  Germany,  Zoltan  Kodaly  in 

Hungary  and  Shinichi  Suzuki  in  Japan.  Authentic  adaptations  of  music  and 

materials  in  lecture,  demonstration  and  workshop  situations 


MU514  ADVANCED  CHORAL  ARRANGING  2  s.h. 

Four-part  writing  for  chorus.  Five,  six,  seven,  and  eight-part  writing  will 
comprise  large  part  of  the  course  Special  consideration  will  be  given  to  problem  of 
writing  for  men's  and  women's  voices. 


MU  529  ADVANCED  STRING  PEDAGOGY  2  s  h 

Study  of  specific  techniques  and  problems  of  teaching  violin,  viola,  cello,  and 
double  bass  in  both  individual  and  class  situations. 


MU515  CANON.  DOUBLE  COUNTERPOINT,  AND  FUGUE  3  s.h. 

Application  of  contrapuntal  techniques  through  analysis  and  creative  writing. 
Included  will  be  study  and  writing  of  two-  and  three-voice  canons:  two-  and  three- 
part  inventions;  and  two-,  three-,  and  four-voice  fugues. 

MU516  ANALYTICAL  TECHNIQUES  3  s.h 

Study  of  representative  compositions  of  various  periods,  with  emphasis  on 
formal  harmonic  and  stylistic  analysis.  Student  will  develop  basic  analytical 
techniques  necessary  for  analysis  of  music  of  any  period 

MU518  COMPREHENSIVE  MUSICIANSHIP  3sh 

Combines  undergraduate  concepts  and  skills  in  music  theory,  literature,  and 
performance  at  an  advanced  level  using  an  integrated  approach.  Prepares  student 
to  function  in  a  variety  of  musical  roles. 


MU  531  ADMINISTRATIVE  PROBLEMS  IN  MUSIC  EDUCATION  2sh 

Review  of  conventional  administrative  organization  of  music  education  in 
public  schools.  Role  of  music  director,  music  specialist,  consultant,  and  music 
resource  teacher  will  be  carefully  defined  Consideration  of  problems  of 
scheduling  in  public  school.  Current  issues  concerned  with  music  education  and 
public  education  in  general  will  be  considered  including  curriculum  development. 

MU  532  RESEARCH  TECHNIQUES  IN  MUSIC  3  S  h 

Study  of  research  techniques  appropriate  for  music  and  music  education 
including  selection  of  research  problem,  collection  of  data,  types  of  research, 
survey  of  current  research  studies  in  music  education  and  use  of  library  in 
connection  with  research  problems  Elements  of  statistics  are  introduced  as 
needed  to  interpret  research  reports.  As  part  of  requirements,  student  will  prepare 
a  written  plan  for  research  project  or  thesis 


Program  Curricula  ■ 
Music  and  Music  Education 


MU  533  COMPARATIVE  CHORAL  METHODS  2  s  h 

Materials  and  procedures  of  preparation  of  vocal  groups  for  public 
performance  Several  accepted,  yet  contrasting,  approaches  will  be  considered, 
ranging  from  the  Christiansen  technique  to  that  of  John  Finley  Williamson  Special 
attention  to  program  building 

MU  534  PRACTICUM  IN  INSTRUMENTAL  MUSIC  2  s.h 

Consideration  of  those  materials  and  procedures  which  have  been  proven  by 
actual  use  in  the  United  States  These  various  approaches  will  be  compared  and 
critically  analyzed  by  the  class  Rehearsal  techniques,  efficient  use  of  time  and 
basic  motivation  will  be  stressed 

MU  535  PSYCHOLOGY  OF  MUSIC  EDUCATION  2  s  h 

An  analysis  of  latest  evidence  produced  by  field  of  psychology  in  music 
education  as  applied  in  actual  classroom  situations 

MU  536  ADVANCED  TECHNOLOGY  OF  MUSIC  TEACHING  2  s  h. 

Examination  and  application  of  modern  communications  media  and  their  role 
in  music  education  Development  of  an  experimental  sound  lab,  use  of  electronic 
devices,  synthesizers  and  computers  Application  of  systems  approach  and 
programmed  learning  to  music  education 

MU  537  TECHNIQUES  OF  THE  MARCHING  BAND  2  s.h. 

Theory  and  practical  application  of  fundamentals  of  precision  drill  Also,  this 
course  deals  with  building  "half-time  shows,"  materials  and  instrumentation  of  the 
marching  band 


INDEPENDENT  STUDY  IN  MUSIC 


APPLIED  MUSIC  (AM  501-670)  1-4  s  h. 

The  following  courses  will  be  taught  in  form  of  private  lessons  geared  to 
individual  student  and  aiming  at  maximum  progress  of  each  student,  depending 
on  background  of  the  student  and  time  available  The  student  should  for  any  series 
of  lessons  use  the  first  number  in  programming  for  the  first  time,  the  second 
number  tor  the  second  time,  etc 


MU  540-550  SUMMER  MUSIC  WORKSHOP 

Concentration  in  special  interest  areas.  Content  varies. 


1-3  s.h. 


AM  501 

551 

601 

651 

Private  Piano 

AM  502 

552 

602 

652 

Private  Organ 

AM  503 

553 

603 

653 

Private  Harpischord 

AM  505 

555 

605 

655 

Private  Voice 

AM  506 

556 

606, 

656 

Private  Violin 

AM  507 

557 

607 

657 

Private  Viola 

AM  508 

558 

608 

658 

Private  Cello 

AM  509 

559 

609 

659 

Private  Bass  Viol 

AM  510, 

560 

610 

660 

Private  Flute 

AM  511 

561 

611 

661 

Private  Clarinet 

AM  512 

562 

612, 

662 

Private  Oboe 

AM  513, 

563 

613, 

663 

Private  Bassoon 

AM  514 

564, 

614 

664 

Private  Saxophone 

AM  515, 

565, 

615, 

665 

Private  Trumpet 

AM  516, 

566 

616, 

666 

Private  French  Horn 

AM  517, 

567, 

617, 

667 

Private  Trombone 

AM  518. 

568, 

618, 

668 

Private  Baritone  Horn 

AM  519. 

569, 

619, 

669 

Private  Tuba 

AM  520. 

570, 

620. 

670 

Private  Percussion 

98  —  Indiana  University  of  Pennsylvania 


PHILOSOPHY 


PHYSICS 


Graduate  courses  in  Philosophy  are  primarily  designed  to 
provide  elective  study  in  an  unfamiliar  discipline  for  teachers  in 
the  public  schools.  No  graduate  degree  in  Philosophy  is  offered. 
Degrees  toward  which  credit  in  these  courses  may  be  used  are 
indicated  in  the  curriculum  requirements  sections  of  the 
catalog.  Research  or  thesis  work  may  be  done  in  Philosophy 
with  approval  of  the  student's  major  program  advisor. 


COURSE  DESCRIPTIONS 


PH   580  READINGS  IN  RELIGIOUS  THOUGHT  2  s  h. 

An  examination  of  religion  as  a  vital  human  phenomenon.  Treating  both 
classical  and  contemporary  themes;  origin  of  western  theological  thinking; 
alienation;  contemporary  atheism;  definitions  of  deity  in  western  and  eastern 
religions;  the  sacred;  origins  of  religion. 

PH  581  PROBLEMS  IN  LOGIC  2  s.h. 

Difficulties  of  meaning  (semantics),  formal  structures  of  reasoning 
(syntactics),  and  nature  of  truth  finding  (empirics)  Fallacy. 


The  graduate  program  in  physics  offers  a  choice  of  three 
degrees:  a  Master  of  Education,  a  Master  of  Arts,  and  a  Master  of 
Science.  The  student  obtaining  a  master's  degree  for  fulfillment 
of  certification  requirements  usually  selects  either  the  Master  of 
Education  Degree  or  the  Master  of  Arts  Degree.  The  student 
obtaining  a  master's  degree  for  additional  preparation  for 
research,  an  industrial  position,  or  further  graduate  work  will 
usually  select  the  Master  of  Science  Degree. 

With  a  wide  range  of  possible  courses  and  research  areas 
available,  the  student  is  required  to  have  the  consent  of  his 
departmental  advisor  before  selecting  a  course  or  initiating  a 
research  project.  Advisor  assignments  are  made  as  soon  as  the 
acceptance  of  a  graduate  student  reaches  the  physics 
department.  The  graduate  student  should  arrange 
appointments  with  his  advisor  by  contacting  the  secretary  in  the 
physics  office. 

Almost  any  combination  of  educational  goals  can  be  met. 


PH   582  PROBLEMS  OF  ETHICS  2  s  h 

Rational  justification  of  moral  judgments.  Analysis  of  function  and  meaning  of 
moral  language  (Staff) 


PH   583  AMERICAN  PHILOSOPHIC  THOUGHT  2  s.h. 

Study  of  more  influential  and  original  philosophies  developed  in  America  from 
colonial  period  to  present.  (Staff) 


PH   584  PHILOSOPHY  SEMINAR  2  s  h 

Area  research  In  the  discipline,  considering  various  facets  of  a  central 
problem.  Students  doing  a  thesis  or  research  project  in  Philosophy  will  register  for 
this  course.  (Staff) 


CURRICULUM  FOR  MASTER  OF 

EDUCATION  DEGREE 

This  program  has  a  very  large  component  of  professional 
education  with  a  limited  number  of  semester  hours  available  for 
Physics  content  courses.  Thus  students  In  this  degree  program 
will  usually  be  those  who  hold  an  undergraduate  B.A.  or  B.S.  in 
Physics  with  a  great  deal  of  Physics  content  and  for  whom  the 
professional  education  credential  will  be  advantageous.  The 
expectation  is  that  these  students  will  be  working  toward  full 
certification  to  teach  Physics  in  public  secondary  schools. 


I.  Professional  Development  Area  —  9  semester  hours 

A.  Humanistic  Studies  (3  s.h.)  —  One  course  must  be 
selected  from  FE  511  through  FE  514 

B.  Behavioral  Studies  (3  s.h.)  —  One  course  must  be 
selected  from  the  follovt^ing:  EP  504,  EP  573,  EP  576, 
EP  578,  EP  580,  CE  529,  CE  539,  SE  531 

C.  Research  Coursework  (3  s.h.)  —  Students  in  this  program 
must  enroll  in  GD  515. 

II.  Specialization  Core  —  9  semester  hours 
Students  in  this  program  must  enroll  in  the  following  three 
courses  for  three  semester  hours  each:   PY  511,  PY  512, 
SO  576. 

III.  Thesis  (optional)  —  0  to  4  semester  hours 

Each  student  may  undertake  an  individual  research  and 
complete  an  acceptable  thesis  under  the  direction  of  one  of 
the  Graduate  Faculty.  The  semester  hour  requirement  is 
fulfilled  by  enrolling  in  GD  550  for  the  proper  number  of 
semester  hours  as  decided  jointly  by  the  student  and  his 
thesis  advisor. 

IV.  Subject  Area  and/or  Electives  —  8  to  12  semester  hours 
With  the  written  approval  of  his  graduate  advisor,  the  student 
may    complete    his    30   semester   hour   requirement*    by 
choosing  from  among  any  of  the  remaining  courses  in  the 
Graduate  School. 


*lf  the  option  of  "no  thesis"  is  exercised,  an  additional  three 
semester  hours  are  required  bringing  the  total  requirement  to 
33  semester  hours. 


Program  Curricula  —  99 
Philosophy 
Physics 

CURRICULUM  FOR  MASTER  OF  ARTS  DEGREE 

This  program  is  the  most  flexible  of  the  three  graduate 
degree  programs  offered  by  the  Physics  Department.  Each 
student's  program  is  designed  to  meet  his  or  her  Individual 
needs  by  the  student  and  advisor  working  together. 

The  educational  goals  of  students  In  many  categories  can  be 
met  while  the  student  is  working  to  attain  his  degree.  Several 
examples  of  the  category  of  student  who  may  select  this  degree 
program  are: 

1.  The  student  whose  undergraduate  training  is  in  Physics 
Education,  Physical  Science  Education,  or  Science 
Education  with  a  strong  professional  education 
component.  This  student  may  need  more  content  than 
professional  education.  In  this  program  he  may,  with  the 
concurrence  of  his  advisor,  enroll  in  exactly  that  ratio  of 
content  courses  to  professional  education  courses  which 
are  necessary  to  attain  his  goals. 

2.  The  student  who  holds  a  teaching  certificate  in  a  field 
other  than  physics  but  is  a  secondary  school  physics 
teacher  These  students  often  require  formal  course  work 
in  a  number  of  areas  of  Physics  in  order  to  have  Physics 
added  to  their  certificate.  This  is  normally  a  requirement 
of  their  school  districts  and/or  the  Commonwealth.  This 
program  allows  them  to  meet  this  requirement  while 
working  toward  a  degree. 

3.  The  student  who  wishes  to  enroll  in  a  cooperative  program 
including  those  programs  with  internship  components. 
Students  may  earn  8  to  12  semester  hours  during  a 
semester  while  interning  under  one  of  the  special 
programs  instituted  by  the  University. 


100  —  Indiana  University  of  Pennsylvania 


SUBJECT  MATTER  —  15  semester  hours  minimum. 

Required  coursework  in  Physics  is  to  be  selected  from  the 
Graduate  Physics  courses  whose  course  number  is  510  or 
greater.  This  selection  must  have  the  prior  approval  of  the 
student's  academic  advisor  and  a  notation  of  such  approval  Is  to 
appear  in  the  student's  folder. 

ELECTiVES  —  11  to  18  s.h. 

The  student  may  complete  the  requirements  for  an  M.A.  by 
selecting,  with  the  approval  of  his  advisor,  from  among  the 
offerings  of  the  Graduate  School.  The  number  of  credits  he 
selects  for  electives  depends  upon  the  option  he  exercises 
under  Research  and  Thesis. 

RESEARCH  AND  THESIS  OPTION 

Each  Master  of  Arts  student  must  complete  his  degree 
requirements  in  one  of  the  following  two  ways: 

A.  Undertake  an  individual  research  problem  and  complete 
an  acceptable  thesis.  For  this  option  he  must  schedule 
PY  600  for  2  s.h.  and  GR  550  for  at  least  2  s.h.  If  he  selects 
this  option  he  will  have  completed  a  minimum  of  30  s.h. 
including  these  two  courses  for  his  degree. 

B.  Decide,  with  the  approval  of  his  academic  advisor,  that  he 
does  not  wish  to  undertake  such  a  research  problem.  If  he 
exercises  this  option,  he  will  not  do  a  thesis  but  must 
complete  a  minimum  of  33  s.h.  of  coursework. 


B.S.  with  the  major  in  physics  will  be  permitted  to  initiate 
study  in  this  curriculum.  Students  having  other  degrees  that 
provide  sufficient  preparation  in  mathematics  and  physics 
may  be  permitted  to  initiate  study  with  approval  of  the 
Chairman  of  Physics. 

II.  Subject  Matter  Concentration 

A  minimum  of  six  courses  to  beselected  with  the  approval  of 
the  advisor  from  the  following:  PY  536,  PY  601-602,  PY  634, 
PY  641,  PY  651,  PY  652,  PY  661-662. 

III.  Research  Requirement 

Each  Master  of  Science  student  is  required  to  undertake  an 
individual  research  problem  and  complete  an  acceptable 
thesis  under  the  direction  of  one  of  the  Graduate  Faculty. 
The  semester  hour  requirement  is  normally  fulfilled  by 
scheduling  PY  600  and  GD  550. 

IV.  Comprehensive  Examination 

The  student  is  expected  to  pass  a  comprehensive  examina- 
tion. 

V.  Free  Electives 

The  student  may  complete  the  30  semester  hour  requirement 
by  choosing  from  among  any  of  the  offerings  of  the 
Graduate  School,  with,  of  course,  the  advice  and  approval  of 
his  graduate  advisor. 


CURRICULUM  FOR  THE  MASTER  OF 

SCIENCE  DEGREE 

I.  Admission  Requirements.  Any  student  meeting  the  require- 
ments of  the  graduate  school  and  having  either  a  B.A.  or  a 


COURSE  DESCRIPTIONS 


PY   500  SPECIAL  STUDIES  1-6  sh. 

A  special  topic  may  be  offered  at  the  discretion  of  the  department  to  fulfill  a 
special  necessity 


Program  Curricula  ■ 
Physics 


PY   507  INTRODUCTION  TO  MATHEMATICAL  PHYSICS  I  3  s  h 

Designed  to  provide  background  needed  lor  most  500  level  courses  Student 
will  acquire  skills  in  problem  solving  in  areas  of  mechanics  and  wave  motion 
utilizing  calculus  and  vectors   Prerequisite:  Permission  of  advisor 

PY   508  INTRODUCTION  TO  MATHEMATICAL  PHYSICS  II  3  s.h. 

A  continuation  of  PY  507  Develops  skills  in  problem  solving  in  areas  of 
electricity  and  magnetism  utilizing  vectors  and  calculus.  Prerequisite:  Permission 
of  advisor 


mectianics    Temperature,   entropy,   cfiemical   potential   and   free  energy  are 
introduced  and  applied  to  a  monatomic  ideal  gas  and  systems  of  fermions  and 

bosons  in  quantum  and  classical  regions. 

PY    535  ELECTRONICS  4  s.h. 

DC  and  AC  circuits,  diode  circuits,  and  transistor  circuits,  such  as  the  common 
emitter  and  emitter  follower  amplifiers,  are  extensively  covered  Negative 
feedback,  operational  amplifiers,  oscillators,  and  digital  logic  are  introduced 
These  topics  are  discussed  in  lecture  and  investigated  by  the  student  in  the  lab 


PY   510  INTRODUCTION  TO  THEORETICAL  PHYSICS  3  s.h. 

Application  of  mathematical  methods  to  physical  theory  in  area  of  mechanics, 
electricity  and  magnetism  including,  partial  differentials,  vector  calculus,  and  non- 
cartesian  coordinate  systems  Intended  primarily  for  individuals  in  the  M  Ed 
program.  Prerequisite:  Permission  of  advisor. 

PY   511  SECONDARY  SCHOOL  PHYSICS 

LABORATORY  PRACTICE  1-3  sh 

Designed  not  only  to  give  the  student  training  in  use  of  PSSC  and  Harvard 
Project  Physics  Laboratory  materials,  but  also  to  increase  his  ability  to  make  the 
lab  a  more  effective  teaching  tool 

PY   512  CURRICULUM  DEVELOPMENTS  IN 

SECONDARY  SCHOOL  PHYSICS  3sh 

Includes  an   intensive  study  of  developments,  such  as   PSSC  and   HPP 

Philosophy,  methodology  and  cognitive  theory  behind  each  curriculum  will  be 

considered    The  lab  equipment,  experiments,  and  visual  aids  for  each  will  l>e 

studied  in  their  proper  setting. 

PY   520  ADVANCED  LABORATORY  PRACTICE  3  s.h. 

Experimental  Physics  Experiments  are  made  available  to  supplement 
student's  previous  training  Data  interpretation  and  experimental  techniques  are 
emphasized  Topics  can  include  but  are  not  limited  to  various  methods  of 
measurement  and  analysis  of  radioactivity,  interferometry.  spectrometry, 
microwave  optics,  NMR,  mechanical  vibrating  systems,  and  thermal  properties 

PY    531  MODERN  PHYSICS  3  s.h 

An  introduction  to  particle  and  wave  properties  of  matter,  atomic  structure, 
quantum  mechanics  and  the  quantum  mechanical  model  of  the  atom 

PY   533  THERMAL  AND  STATISTICAL  PHYSICS  3  s.h. 

A  unified  approach  to  study  of  thermodynamics  through  use  of  statistical 


PY    536  ADVANCED  ELECTRONICS  3sh 

Field  effect  transistors,  noise  problems,  grounding  and  shielding,  applications 
of  digital  logic,  digital  to  analog  to  digital  conversion  techniques,  transmission 
lines,  and  RCA  1 10A  applications  Two  one-hour  lectures  and  one  three-hour  lab. 
Prerequisite:  PY  535. 

PY   541  ANALYTICAL  MECHANICS  I  2sh 

Kinematics  particle  dynamics  graviation,  free  and  forced  harmonic  motion, 
LaGrange's  and  Hamilton's  Equations  Treatment  of  these  topics  utilizes  vector 
calculus  and  differential  and  integral  calculus 

PY    542  ANALYTICAL  MECHANICS  II  2  S.h. 

Central-force  motion,  dynamics  of  rigid  bodies,  coupled  oscillations,  and 
vibrating  strings. 

PY   545  OPTICS  3s  h 

Mam  concepts  of  modern  optics  utilized  in  areas  of  geometrical,  wave  and 
quantum  optics  Includes  presentation  of  illustrative  examples  in  areas  of  laser 
technology,  complex  optical  systems,  interferometry,  and  spectroscopy 

PY   551  ELECTRICITY  AND  MAGNETISM  I  2  S  h. 

Coulomb's    Law,    electrostatic    potential.    Gauss'    Law,    dielectrics   will    be 

presented  using  vector  calculus  in  a  modern  field  formalism  Prerequisite:  PY  510 

PY   552  ELECTRICITY  AND  MAGNETISM  II  2  s.h. 

Biot  and  Sevan's  Law,  induced  emf,  vector  potential,  displacement  current, 
special  relativity  and  electromagnetic  radiation  will  be  presented  using  techniques 
introduced  in  PY  551    Prerequisite   PY  551 

PY   561  QUANTUM  MECHANICS  I  3  s  h. 

Introduction  to  theory  of  linear  vector  spaces,  linear  operators,  eigenvalues. 

eigenvectors  and  eigenfunction  and  their  application  to  the  harmonic  oscillator. 


102  —  Indiana  University  of  Pennsylvania 


hydrogen   atom,  electron   in  a   magnetic  field,   scattering   and   perturbations 
Prerequisites:  PY  222  and  PY  331. 

PY   565  INTRODUCTION  TO  NUCLEAR  PHYSICS  3  s  h 

Survey  of  introductory  nuclear  physics  including:  nuclear  size.  mass,  types  of 
decay,  models,  forces,  elementary  particles,  reaction  theory 

PY   600  METHODS  OF  RESEARCH  IN  PHYSICS  2sh 

Offers  the  student  practical  training  in  special  methods  and  materials  of 
research  in  physics.  Emphasis  on  types  of  research,  use  of  physics  and  physics- 
related  journals  and  library  facilities   Prerequisite   Permission  of  department 

PY   601  THEORETICAL  PHYSICS  I  3  s  h 

Serves  as  a  preparation  in  mathematical  physics  for  graduate  students 
Included  will  be  vector  and  cartesian  tensor  analysis,  curvilinear  coordinate 
systems,  matnces.  infinite  series,  ordinary  and  partial  differential  equations 
Prerequisite:  Permission  of  department, 

PY   602  THEORETICAL  PHYSICS  II  3  s.h 

A  continuation  of  PY  601.  covering  complex  variables,  and  calculus  of 
residues.  Sturn-Lionville  Theory,  special  functions.  Fourier  Series,  integral 
transforms,  integral  equations  and  calculus  of  variations.  Prerequisite    PY  601 

PY    634  STATISTICAL  MECHANICS  3  s  h 

A  quantum  approach  to  statistical  mechanics  Fermi.  Bose.  ideal  gas  and 
imperfect  gas  systems  are  investigated  Selected  optics  in  kinetic  theory  of  gases, 
transport  phenomena,  magnetic  systems  and  liquid  helium  Co-requisite: 
Quantum  I 


expansions,  macroscopic  electrostatics  and  magnetostatics.  Maxwell's  equations 
and  plane  electromagnetic  waves.  Prerequisite:  PY  323  or  equivalent. 

PY   652  ADVANCED  ELECTROMAGNETIC  THEORY  II  3  s.h. 

Solution  of  electrostatic  problems  using  cylindrical  coordinates.  Green's 
function  for  time-dependent  wave  equation,  conservation  laws,  wave  guides  and 
resonant  cavities,  special  Theory  of  Relativity,  simple  radiating  systems  and 
diffraction    Prerequisite:  PY  651 

PY   657  SOLID  STATE  THEORY  3  s.h. 

Quantum  approach  to  solid  state  Topics  include  second  quantization  or 
fermion  and  boson  systems,  electron  theory  of  metals,  electron-phonon 
interactions,  and  superconductivity  Selected  subjects  in  thermal  transport, 
magnetic  phenomena   Co-requisite:  Quantum  I 

PY   661  QUANTUM  MECHANICS  II  3sh 

Fundamental  concepts  of  quantum  mechanics,  theory  of  representations  and 
linear  vector  spaces,  relationship  between  quantum  and  classical  mechanics. 
Approximation  methods  for  stationary  problems  with  applications  to  central 
potentials. 

PY   662  QUANTUM  MECHANICS  III  3  s  h. 

Approximation  methods  for  time  dependent  problems  with  applications  to 
scattering  and  transition  theory  Elementary  theory  of  many  particle  systems  with 
applications  to:  molecules  and  chemical  bonds,  fundamentals  of  the  quantum 
theory  of  solids.  Dirac  theory, 

PY   690  RESEARCH  PROBLEMS  IN  PHYSICS  1-6  s.h. 

Introduction  to  advanced  research  problems  through  individual  assignment. 
Prerequisite:  Permission  of  department. 


PY   641  ADVANCED  MECHANICS  I  3sh 

Includes  the  following  topics:  LaGrange's  Equations.  Hamilton's  Principle 
Two  body  central  force.  Euler's  Theorem.  Small  Osciallations.  Hamilton's 
Equations,  canonical  Transformations  Prerequisite:  PY  312  or  its  equivalent. 

PY   642  ADVANCED  MECHANICS  II  3sh 

Rigid  body  mechanics,  including  Angular  Momemtum.  Euler's  equations. 
Processions,  Special  relativity.  Covariant  four  dimensional  formulation.  Covariant 
Langragian  formulation,  Hamilton-Jacoby  Theory,  Introduction  to  classical  field 
theory   Prerequisite:  PY  641  or  equivalent 

PY   651  ADVANCED  ELECTROMAGNETIC  THEORY  1  3sh 

Solution  of  boundary  value  problems  using  Green's  function  and  separation  of 

variables  techniques,  Cartesian  and  spherical  coordinate  systems,  multipole 


SCIENCE  COURSES 

SC  575  THE  GROWTTH  OF  SCIENCE  AND  ITS  CONCEPTS  I  3  s.h. 

Traces  development  of  science  and  its  concepts  from  early  beginnings  to  time 
of  Newton.  Interaction  of  science  and  math  and  their  impact  on  growing  society  of 
Western  Civilization  is  treated  in  a  non-mathematical  manner.  Three  hours  lecture 
per  week. 

SC  576  THE  GROWTH  OF  SCIENCE  AND  ITS  CONCEPTS  II  3  s.h. 

Influence  and  development  of  concepts  of  science  in  Western  Civilization  are 
studied  from  Newton  to  present  time  While  the  concurrent  development  of 
mathematics  is  considered,  stress  is  placed  on  the  non-mathematical 
understanding  of  basic  concepts.  Three  hours  lecture  per  week. 


POLITICAL  SCIENCE  DEPARTMENT 

The  Political  Science  Department  offers  Concentration  in  the 
Social  Science  M.Ed,  program  (see  page  111). 

Subject  to  final  approval  of  Pa.  Department  of  Education,  the 
Department  plans  to  offer  an  M.A.  in  Public  Affairs.  For  current 
status  of  plans  and  implementation  dates  for  this  new  program, 
contact  the  Department  Chairman. 


MASTER  OF  ARTS  IN  PUBLIC  AFFAIRS 

The  MA.  in  Public  Affairs  Program  is  designed  for  part-time 
and  full-time  students  who  are  seeking  or  are  engaged  in 
professional  careers  as  administrators,  project  directors,  staff 
analyst  supervisors  in  government  and  in  human  service  agency 
delivery  systems,  and  teachers  in  the  Social  Sciences. 

The  MA.  in  Public  Affairs  degree  requires  a  minimum  of  30 
graduate  credits,  including  a  research  and/or  internship 
requirement.  In  order  to  complete  a  program  for  his  or  her 
particular  professional  needs,  however,  a  student  may  be 
required  to  complete  specific  courses,  not  for  graduate  credit,  In 
statistics,  accounting,  business  administration,  computer 
methods,  foreign  language,  economics,  political  science, 
psychology,  and  sociology.  The  student  should  have  sufficient 
preparation  in  the  social  sciences,  or  equivalent  professional 
experience,  in  order  to  perform  satisfactorily  in  the  program. 
These  requirements  may  be  satisfied  by  prior  course  work, 
correspondence  courses,  qualifying  examinations,  or 
undergraduate  courses  offered  at  lUP.  These  preparatory 
requirements  will  be  determined  by  the  Political  Science 
Department  upon  formal  application  to  the  Graduate  School 


Program  Curricula  —103 
Physics 
Political  Science 

and  may  be  completed  after  admission  to  the  Graduate  School 
prior  to  admission  to  candidacy  for  degree. 

Required  of  all  students  is  PS  574  and  one  Concentration  of 
at  least  21  s.h.  (A)  Political  Science,  or  (B)  International  Studies, 
or  (C)  Government  and  Public  Service.  The  following  courses, 
with  Advisor  approval,  are  open  to  students  in  all 
Concentrations:  PS  501,  590,  595,  599.  Courses  which  may  be 
included  in  Concentration  (A)  are:  PS  550-586.  with  560  or  561 
required;  Concentration  (B):  PS  570,  and  581-586,  with  572 
required;  Concentration  (C):  PS  550-559,  573,  with  571 
required.  Up  to  6  s.h.  of  Concentration  (A)  may  be  selected  from 
other  related  fields;  up  to  9  s.h.  for  Concentrations  (B)  and  (C). 
See  department  chairman  or  advisor  for  list  of  approved  related 
courses. 

The  Research  Requirement  of  a  minimum  of  6  s.h.  may  be 
met  by  scheduling  SS  514  or  GD  515  or  PS  574  plus  2-6  s.h. 
Thesis  credit  and/or  2-6  s.h.  Internship  (with  Research  Project), 
PS  595.  For  students  with  Government  and  Public  Service 
Concentration  (C),  Internship  may  be  waived  and  up  to  6  s.h. 
credit  may  be  extended  to  those  students  with  at  least  three 
years  prior  experience  in  public  administration,  as  evaluated  by 
and  at  discretion  of  the  department. 

Students  will  receive,  in  addition  to  MA.  in  Public  Affairs 
degree,  a  Certificate  in  Political  Science,  or  International 
Studies,  or  Government  and  Public  Service.  Certification 
requirements  include:  Meeting  all  Degree  and  Concentration 
requirements;  a  3.5  QPA;  and  written  and  oral  examination  by 
Departmental  Committee.  Non-aegree  students  who  do  not 
have  a  baccalaureate  degree  may  also  seek  certification 
through  meeting  18  s.h.  Concentration  requirements,  3.5  QPA 
and  examination. 


104  —  Indiana  University  of  Pennsylvania 


COURSE  DESCRIPTIONS 


PS   501  STUDIES  IN  POLITICAL  SCIENCE  1-3  sh 

In  depth  study  of  a  specific  problem  or  topic  not  regularly  treated  in  courses. 
(Staff) 

•PS  550  THE  PRESIDENCY  3sh 

Examines  the  Office  of  President  with  attention  to  constitutional  foundations, 
evolution,  structure  powers,  and  functions  Comparisons  are  made  between 
presidential  and  parliamentary  systems  and  between  offices  of  President  and 
Governor.  (Thorpe) 

•PS  551  THE  LEGISLATIVE  PROCESS  3sh 

Study  of  legislative  process  in  the  U.S.  with  emphasis  on  Congress  and  the 
Pennsylvania  General  Assembly  Focus  on  organization  and  function  of 
legislative  bodies,  with  American  legislative  institutions  compared  with  those  of 
other  nations.  (Thorpe) 

•PS  552  PUBLIC  OPINION  3sh 

Study  of  nature  of  public  opinion  within  political  system.  Attention  to 
formation  of  public  opinion,  expression,  propaganda,  mass  media,  and  interest 
groups.  (Green) 

•PS  553  AMERICAN  POLITICAL  PARTIES  3  sh. 

Role  of  people,  parties,  and  pressure  groups  in  politics  of  American 
democracy.  Attention  is  devoted  to  sectional  and  historic  roots  of  national  politics, 
voting  behavior,  pressure  group  analysis,  and  campaign  activities.  (Smith) 

•PS  554  METROPOLITAN  PROBLEMS  3  sh 

Analyzes  multiplicity  of  problems  facing  our  metropolitan  areas  such  as  urban 
renewal,  shrinking  tax  base,  federal  aid  to  cities,  subsidized  mass  transit, 
municipal  authorities,  and  political  consolidation.  (Green) 

•PS  558  JUDICIAL  PROCESS  3sh 

Explores  nature  and  limits  of  judicial  power,  courts  as  policy-making  bodies, 
selection  of  judges,  decision  process,  external  forces  impinging  on  the  courts,  and 
role  of  Supreme  Court  in  its  relationship  with  Congress,  the  Presidency,  and 
federalism.  (Keene) 

•PS  559  CONSTITUTIONAL  LAW  AND  CIVIL  LIBERTIES  3  sh 

Study  of  civil  liberties  and  civil  rights  issues  through  leading  Supreme  Court 
decisions.  Topics  include  First  Amendment  rights,  procedural  due  process  and 
the  Bill  of  Rights,  and  equal  protection  problems   (Keene) 


•PS  560  POLITICAL  PHILOSOPHY  3  sh. 

Evolution  of  Western  political  tradition  of  Constitutionalism  from  Plato  and 
Aristotle  to  Locke  and  Montesquieu;  religious  and  rational  foundations;  medieval 
theories  of  authority  and  representation;  early  modern  theories  of  state  and 
sovereignty  Concepts  of  law,  natural  rights,  liberty,  and  equality,  and  justice  are 
treated  in  detail   (Wilson) 

•PS  561  MODERN  POLITICAL  THOUGHT  3  sh. 

Development  of  Western  political  thought  since  the  mid-16th  century;  classic 
liberalism;  conservative  thought;  modern  irrational  ideologies  such  as  fascism  and 
national  socialism;  socialist  thought;  contemporary  collectivist  liberalism. 
(Wilson) 

PS   570  FOREIGN  POLICY  STUDIES  3  s  h. 

Considers  selected  problems  in  international  affairs  Emphasis  on  those 
problems  and  conflicts  which  have  evolved  in  the  post-war  era,  particularly  as  they 
relate  to  position  of  the  United  States  in  world  affairs.  Specific  problems  are 
approached  both  in  terms  of  countries  involved  and  the  existing  balance  in  world 
economic,  ideological,  and  power  structure.  (Carone.  Piatt) 

•PS  571  FEDERAL  ADMINISTRATIVE  POLICY  3  sh. 

An  intensive  study  of  role  of  federal  agencies  and  their  administrators  in 
determining  and  developing  public  policy  Public  administration  in  practice  is 
emphasized  by  utilizing  case  studies.  Previous  course  in  Public  Administration  is 
desirable  but  not  required   (Palmer) 

PS   572  COMPARATIVE  POLITICAL  STUDIES  3  sh. 

Theory,  structure,  politics,  and  problems  of  selected  foreign  governments  are 

analyzed  from  comparative  point  of  view.  Special  emphasis  on  comparing  and 

contrasting  ideas  and  institutions  with  those  of  the  U.S.  (Carone,  Morris.  Piatt) 

PS   573  REGIONAL  POLITICAL  STUDIES  3  sh 

Examines  structure  and  function  of  state,  county,  and  municipal  governments. 
Emphasizes  problems  faced  by  government  at  these  levels  and  seeks  solutions  to 
these  problems  Pennsylvania  governmental  forms  are  stressed  but  are  contrasted 
with  those  of  other  states  (Heiges) 

PS   574  POLITICAL  SCIENCE  SEMINAR: 

SCOPE  AND  METHODS  3  sh. 

Exposes  the  student  to  approaches,  methods,  tools,  focus,  and  boundary  lines 
of  political  science  study  As  an  introductory  course  to  graduate  work  in  political 
science.  It  It  required  for  all  student!  In  M.A.  In  Public  Affairs  degree  program,  and 
should  be  scheduled  early  In  program.  Prerequisite:  Open  only  to  students 
enrolled  in  MA.  in  Public  Affairs,  M.Ed,  in  Social  Science,  and  MA.  in  Social 
Science.  (Green.  Thorpe) 


•PS  581-586  POLITICAL  SYSTEMS  3  S.h. 

Comparative  study  o(  government  and  politics  of  a  selected  region.  PS  572 
Comparative  Political  Studies  should  be  taken  first,  if  possible 

•PS  581  LATIN  AMEHICA  (Ctiaszar) 

PS   582  AFRICA  (Carone) 

PS   583  ASIA 

PS    584  MIDDLE  EAST 

PS    585  CENTRAL  AND  EASTERN  EUROPE  (Piatt) 

PS   586  ATLANTIC  COMMUNITY  (Carone) 

PS   590  SPECIAL  TOPICS  1  s  h 

Series  of  "mini-courses"  on  special  topics  requiring  less  attention  than  the 
usual  course  Topics  usually  are  a  specific  problem  area,  skill  or  concept 
Prerequisite:  Open  only  to  students  enrolled  in  MA  in  Public  Affairs.  M.Ed,  in 
Social  Science,  and  MA.  in  social  Science  Requires  specific  approval  of  advisor 
as  to  relevance  of  topic  to  student's  program  and  concentration  This  is  not 
"independent  study."  in  that  students  electing  the  "mini-course"  will  meet  as  a 
group  However,  individual  study  assignments  may  be  made  between  course 
meetings.  Scheduling  of  meetings  will  be  flexible  Political  science  staff  develop 
and  offer  "special  topics"  on  basis  of  apparent  student  needs  and  interests 
Occasionally  a  "mini-course"  will  be  offered  by  an  "adjunct"  or  "visiting 
professor,"  where  this  can  be  arranged.  May  be  repeated  up  to  6  s.h.  (Staff) 

•May  not  be  programmed  by  students  with  undergraduate  credit  for  course. 

PS   595  POLITICAL  SCIENCE  INTERNSHIP  1-6  sh 

Practical  experience  in  government  and  politics  Students  are  individually 
assigned  to  a  cooperating  local  or  state  government  agency,  political  party,  or 
interest  group,  or  to  a  federal  or  international  agency  when  arrangements  can  be 
made  Students  report  periodically  to  professor  in  charge,  and  undertake  reading 
assignments  and  write  such  reports  and  papers  as  the  professor  may  require 
Course  credit  hours  will  be  determined  by  department  chairman  and  by  professor 
in  charge  Course  grade  will  be  determined  by  the  professor  Prerequisite  Must 
have  approval  of  instructor  and  department  chairman  Course  is  offered  only  when 
arrangements  for  internship  can  be  made  with  cooperating  agencies  and  is 
normally  available  only  to  full-time  students 

PS    599  INDEPENDENT  STUDY  1-3  sh 

Readings  and  written  assignments  on  a  specific  topic  determined  by  student 
and  instructor  in  charge   May  be  repeated   (Staff) 


Program  Curricula  —  705 
Political  Science 
Psychology 

PSYCHOLOGY 


The  Psychology  Depailment  offers  a  Master  of  Arts  degree 
with  concentrations  in  General  Experimental  Psychology  and 
Clinical-Community  Psychology.  The  areas  of  concentration 
are  so  designed  that  graduates  will  be  prepared  to  either 
immediately  assume  responsibilities  in  appropriate 
professional  settings  or  proceed  to  doctoral  level  study.  The 
department  also  offers  courses  open  to  students  following  other 
degree  programs  in  the  graduate  school. 

MASTER  OF  ARTS  IN  PSYCHOLOGY 

In  addition  to  meeting  the  requirements  for  admission  to  the 
Graduate  School,  a  student  intending  to  work  toward  a  Master 
of  Arts  in  Psychology  must  have  completed  an  undergraduate 
major  in  psychology,  including  courses  in  Experimental 
Psychology  and  Statistics,  earned  a  B  average  or  higher  in 
courses  taken  in  psychology,  taken  GRE's,  and  have  submitted 
the  Psychology  Department  admission  form. 

After  completion  of  at  least  six  hours  of  graduate  work  in 
psychology  at  Indiana,  a  student  may  formally  apply  to  the 
Psychology  Department's  Graduate  Admissions  committee  for 
admission  to  degree  candidacy.  At  this  time,  the  applicant  must 
have  attained  at  least  3.00  GPA,  present  satisfactory  scores  on 
the  Graduate  Record  Examination  (both  Aptitude  and 
Advanced  Tests)  and  recommendations  from  faculty  members 
familiar  with  his  work.  He  should  also  submit  for  approval  a 
complete  course  program  planned  in  consultation  with  his 
advisor. 

The  MA.  in  Psychology  will  be  awarded  at  the  successful 
completion    of   45   hours   work    in   the   Clinical-Community 


706  —  Indiana  University  of  Pennsylvania 


concentration  or  33  hours  work  in  the  General  Experimental 
Concentration.  Course  requirements  for  both  concentrations 
are  PC  501,  PC  502,  and  a  6-hour  thesis.  The  Clinical- 
Community  concentration  requires,  in  addition  to  the  above,  9 
hours  of  PC  575.  The  remaining  courses  are  to  be  selected  in 
consultation  with  advisor. 


COURSE  DESCRIPTIONS 

PC   501  RESEARCH  METHODS  I  3  s.h. 

Research  designs  stressing  experimental  and  statistical  controls  appropriate 
to  lab  studies  are  examined:  lab  included  Prerequisites:  Undergraduate  courses  in 
statistics  and  experimental  psychology  major  or  minor. 

PC   502  RESEARCH  METHODS  II  3  s  h. 

Research  strategies  characteristic  of  clinical  psychology  and  applied  social 
psychology  will  be  studied.  Prerequisites:  Introductory  courses  in  statistics  and 
experimental  psychology:  Psychology  major 

PC   530  PSYCHOLOGY  OF  GROVi/TH  AND  DEVELOPMENT  3  s.h 

A  comprehensive  study  of  human  growth  and  development  from  conception  to 

death.  Major  research  findings  and  developmental  theories  will  be  considered. 

PC  533  THE  PSYCHOLOGY  OF  PERSONALITY  3  s  h. 

An  overview  and  integration  of  the  major  theories  of  personality. 

PC   534  ABNORMAL  PSYCHOLOGY  3  s.h. 

Theories  of  pathological  behavior  with  reference  to  clinical  and  experimental 
data 

PC  536  PSYCHOLOGY  OF  LEARNING  3sh 

Examination  of  classical  and  operant  conditioning,  and  their  basis  for  behavior 
modification  techniques. 

PC   540  COMMUNITY  PSYCHOLOGY  &  MENTAL  HEALTH  3  s.h. 

Preventive    approaches    to    mental    health    and    illness    which    stress   the 

relationship  between  individuals  and  the  social  systems  with  which  they  interact. 


PC   541  ASSESSMENT  OF  INTELLIGENCE  3  s  h. 

An  introduction  to  various  tests  of  general  ability  and  training  In  their 
administration,  scoring  and  interpretation.  Prerequisites:  Course  in  Introduction 
to  Psychological  Measurement  or  its  equivalent:  departmental  consent. 

PC  542  ASSESSMENT  OF  PERSONALITY  3  s.h. 

An  introduction  to  vanous  tests  of  interest  and  personality,  and  training  in  their 
administration,  scoring,  and  interpretation.  Prerequisites:  Course  in  Introduction 
to  Psychological  Measurement  or  its  equivalent;  departmental  consent 

PC  545  THEORY  AND  TECHNIQUES  OF 

PSYCHOLOGICAL  INTERVENTION  3  S.h 

An  introduction  to  major  approaches  to  therapeutic  psychological 
intervention:  psychoanalysis,  client-centered  psychotherapy,  group  techniques 
and  behavior  modification.  Prerequisite:  Departmental  consent. 

PC  546  PRINCIPLES  OF  BEHAVIOR  MODIFICATION  3  S.h. 

Applications  of  learning  theory  principles  in  changing  maladaptive  behavior, 
both  on  the  individual  and  group  levels. 

PC   550  SOCIAL  PSYCHOLOGY  OF  CHANGE  3  S.h. 

Models  for  influencing  behavioral  environments  through  using  techniques 
designed  to  change  social  structures 

PC   552  ENVIRONMENT  AND  BEHAVIOR  3  s.h 

The  effects  of  political,  social  and  economic  environments  on  individual  and 
group  behaviors. 

PC  558  SOCIAL  PSYCHOLOGY  3  s.h. 

A  scientific  approach  to  the  study  of  behavior  and  experience  of  individuals  in 

relation  to  other  individuals,  groups  and  culture.  Prerequisite:  Psychology  major. 

PC   561  MOTIVATION  3  s.h. 

A  systematic  study  of  how  behavior  is  initiated,  sustained,  directed,  and 
terminated  Lab  projects  are  conducted  Prerequisites:  Course  in  experimental 
psychology;  Psychology  major 

PC   562  PHYSIOLOGICAL  PSYCHOLOGY  3  S.h. 

The  relationship  between  behavior  and  the  anatomy  and  physiology  of  the 
nervous  system  Lab  projects  are  conducted  Prerequisites:  Course  in 
experimental  psychology;  Psychology  major. 


Program  Curricula  ■ 
Psychology 

Reading 


PC  563  PERCEPTION  3  s  h 

The  interaction  o(  sensory  and  cognitive  events  in  production  of  awareness  o( 
the  world  Lab  projects  are  conducted  Prerequisites:  Course  in  experimental 
psychology.  Psychology  major 

PC  565  CONDITIONING  AND  LEARNING  3sh 

The  focus  is  on  animal  research  with  discussion  of  classical  conditioning 

discrimination   learning   and   aversive   control   of   t>ehavior    Lab   projects  are 

conducted  Prerequsites  Course  in  experimental  psychology;  Psychology  major 

PC  566  HUMAN  LEARNING  AND  MEMORY  3sh 

The  methodology  employed  in  areas  of  verbal  learning  and  retention, 
encoding,  storage,  and  retneval  processes  Lab  projects  are  conducted 
Prerequisites:  Course  in  expenmental  psychology;  Psychology  major 

PC   567  ANIMAL  BEHAVIOR  3sh 

Behavior  of  various  animal  species  and  men  are  examined  from  the  position  of 
evolution  of  behavior  as  adaptation  to  a  changing  ecology 

PC   568  LEARNING  THEORIES  2sh 

A  review  of  current  research  and  theoretical  developments  in  the  psychology 
of  learning 

PC   571  SEMINAR  IN  PSYCHOLOGY  3sh 

Designed  to  examine  a  special  topic  in  depth  Students  prepare  presentations 
representing  selected  research  areas  Deprtmental  consent 

PC  574  PSYCHOLOGY  OF  ADULTHOOD  4  OLD  AGE  3  s  h 

A  review  of  theories  and  research  which  apply  to  young,  middle,  and  later 
adulthood,  with  particular  emphasis  on  old  age 

PC   575  ADVANCED  PSYCHOLOGICAL  PRACTICUM  3-9  s.h 

Provides  graduate  students  with  expenence  in  applied  settings  Prerequisites: 
Permission  of  Coordinator  of  Practimm 

PC  590  HISTORY  OF  PSYCHOLOGY  3  s  h 

Comprehensive  overview  of  historical  antecedents  of  contemporary 
psychology  Prerequisite:  Psychology  major 

PC   599  INDEPENDENT  STUDY  IN  PSYCHOLOGY  2-6  s  h 

Individual  students  develop  and  conduct  research  studies  in  consultation  with 
a  faculty  member  Prerequisites:  Psychology  major,  departmental  consent. 


READING 


There  is  a  marked  need  for  qualified  and  properly  certified 
reading  personnel  in  public  and  parochial  schools  at  all  levels  of 
instruction.  In  particular,  there  is  a  noted  shortage  of  both 
Reading  Specialists  and  Reading  Supervisors  in  the 
Commonwealth  of  Pennsylvania, 

In  keeping  with  these  demands,  Indiana  University  of 
Pennsylvania  provides  and  directs  the  formal  learning 
experiences  of  the  Reading  Specialists  and  Reading  Supervisor 
at  the  graduate  level.  These  learning  experiences  entail  both 
classroom  and  clinical  instruction  by  faculty  members  who  are 
sincere  and  dedicated  to  the  students  and  the  programs.  In 
addition,  the  faculty  members  represent  a  marked  balance  with 
a  variety  of  backgrounds  and  areas  of  expertise  —  reading, 
elementary  and  secondary  education,  psychology  and  reading 
research. 


Specific  Requirements 

Students  seeking  a  Master  of  Education  degree  with  a  major 
in  reading  and  who  desire  certification  as  Reading  Specialists 
are  required  to  complete  a  minimum  of  thirty-six  (36)  semester 
hours  of  course  work  selected  from  the  curriculum  designed  for 
the  preparation  of  Reading  Specialists. 

A  student  who  wishes  to  secure  reading  specialist 
certification  does  not  desire  a  Master  of  Education  degree  may 
do  so  by  formulating  a  program  of  studies  with  the  Coordinator 
of  the  Graduate  Reading  Program  contingent  upon  admission 
to  the  Graduate  School.  The  program  for  each  student  will  be 
formulated  based  on  the  student's  needs,  educational 
experiences  and  teaching  experiences.  All  students  who  desire 


108  —  Indiana  University  of  Pennsylvania 


certification  are  required  to  either  take  the  required  courses  as 
outlined  in  Program  for  Reading  Specialist,  or  demonstrate  or 
document  the  competencies  required  in  the  program. 

Criteria  for  final  recommendation  for  certification  of  program 
enrollees  are  as  follows: 

1.  Mastery  of  competencies  determined  through  the  use  of 
oral  and/or  written  examination  administered  by  Reading 
Faculty. 

2.  Recommendation  of  Reading  faculty. 

Procedures  for  Admission 

An  applicant  must  first  be  admitted  to  the  Graduate  School  as 
a  qualified  student.  He  then  secures  the  Reading  Program 
application  packet  from  the  Coordinator  of  the  Graduate 
Reading  Program,  completes  the  forms  and  returns  them  to  the 
Coordinator's  office  for  review.  Applicants  may  be  requested  to 
report  for  an  interview  with  the  Reading  Faculty  and  will  be 
notified  of  admission  to  the  program. 

Upon  admission  to  the  Reading  Program,  students  should 
arrange  to  meet  with  the  Coordinator  to  formulate  an  approved 
program  of  courses. 

READING  SPECIALIST  PROGRAM 

I.  Professional  Development  (9  s.h.) 

A.  Humanistic  Studies  (3  s.h.):  FE  511,  FE  512,  FE  513, 
FE514. 

B.  Behavioral  Studies  (3  s.h.):  EP  504*,  EP  573*,  EP  576*, 
EP  578*,  EP  580,  CE  529,  CE  539,  SE  531. 

0.  Research  (3  s.h.):  GR  515 
'Students  will  select  one  for  certification. 
11.  Specialization  Core  (6  s.h.):  ED  500*,  ED  501* 


III.  Subject  Area"  (21  s.h.):  ED  502,*  ED  503*,  ED  510*,  ED  507, 
ED  508,  ED  520,  ED  596,  ED  597,  ED  598*,  EL  544,  EL  547, 
EL  548,  EL  555,  EN  504,  EN  544,  SE  531,  SE  565,  SE  566. 
*Required  of  students  seeking  certification. 

**lf  thesis  option  is  selected,  minimum  is  17  s.h. 

READING  SUPERVISOR  PROGRAM 
Procedures  for  Admission 

Students  must  have  a  M.Ed,  degree  and  certification  in 
reading.  Before  completion  of  the  program  students  must  have 
had  five  years  teaching  experience  as  a  reading  specialist  to 
receive  certification. 

Program 

Students  will  plan  their  program  on  an  individual  basis  with 
the  Coordinator  of  Reading.  A  minimum  of  sixteen  semester 
hours  beyond  the  M.Ed,  program  is  required.  Students  may  be 
required  to  take  additional  courses  for  competencies  not 
achieved  at  the  M.Ed,  level.  Courses  will  be  selected  from  the 
following:  ED  504,  ED  505*,  GD  515,  ED  570*,  ED  596,  ED 597,  EL 
532,  EP  562*,  SE  566*,  FE  515*. 

*  Required 


COURSE  DESCRIPTIONS 

ED   500  BASIC  FOUNDATIONS  OF  READING  INSTRUCTION  3  s.h. 

Emphasis  on  nature  of  reading  process;  nature  of  learner;  advancement  ot 
pupil's  reading  skills;  how  pupil  learns  to  read;  what  teacher  can  do  when  pupils 
fail  to  learn  to  read. 


Program  Curricula  —  109 
Reading 


ED   501  DIAGNOSIS  AND  REMEDIATION  OF 

READING  DISABILITIES  3sh 

General  principles,  types,  and  specific  approaches  to  diagnosis  that  are 

appropriate  for  classroom  and  clinic    Students  will  examine  and  administer 

diagnostic  instruments.  Methods  and  materials  used  in  remediation  at  elementary 

and  secondary  level  will  be  discussed  and  demonstrated 


ED   508  READING  IN  THE  CONTENT  AREAS  3  s  h. 

Problems  related  to  teaching  students  reading  and  study  skills  specifically 
needed  in  each  of  the  subject  areas  at  elementary  and  secondary  levels  Content 
teachers  learn  how  to  develop  students  competence  in  these  skills  as  part  of  their 
regular  classroom  instruction  Reading  specialists  study  ways  to  help  classroom 
teachers  be  more  effective  in  this  kind  of  instruction 


ED  502  READING  PRACTICUM:  DIAGNOSTIC  CASE  STUDIES  3sh 

By  preparing  a  case  study  on  a  pupil  who  has  been  referred  to  the  Reading 
Clinic,  the  student  will  administer  and  interpret  a  battery  of  tests,  both  formal  and 
informal,  leading  to  specific  recommendations  for  further  testing,  if  appropriate, 
and  remediation   Prerequisite:  ED  500.  ED  501.  and  ED  510 

ED  503  READING  PRACTICUM:  REMEDIAL  CASE  STUDIES  3  s.h. 

Student  will  design  a  remedial  program  for  an  individual  pupil,  basing  their 
work  on  a  previously  written  diagnostic  case  study  report  including 
implementation  of  program,  selection  of  appropriate  learning  materials, 
administration  of  further  diagnostic  tests  to  determine  additional  problems,  if  any 
are  suspected,  and  recommendations  for  further  remediation  Prerequisites:  ED 
502  and  its  prerequisites 

ED  504  REMEDIATION  OF  SEVERE  READING 

DISABILITY  CASES  3  s,h. 

An  extension  of  ED  501,  it  considers  scope  of  extreme  disability  reading  cases, 
analysis  and  treatment,  including  (1)  primary  and  secondary  classifications  of 
reading  difficulties.  (2)  specific  patterns  of  syndromes  of  severe  reading 
disabilities  together  with  diagnosis  and  prognosis  of  them,  and  (3)  specific 
treatment  advocated  for  these  disabilities  Practical  experience  with  a  student 
diagnosed  as  a  severe  reading  disability  case  under  supervision  of  specially 
trained  university  personnel 

ED   505  ADMINISTRATION  AND  SUPERVISION 

OF  READING  PROGRAMS  3  S.h, 

An  understanding  of  functions  and  duties  of  reading  supervisor  and  effective 
ways  of  implementing  them 

ED   507  INSTRUCTIONAL  MATERIALS  IN  READING 

FOR  CHILDREN  AND  YOUTH  3sh 

Designed  to  guide  teachers,  librarians,  principals,  reading  specialists,  and 
other  curriculum  workers  in  viable  choices  of  appropriate  materials  for  reading 
Instruction. 


ED   510  THE  TEACHING  OF  READING  IN 

THE  SECONDARY  SCHOOL  3  s.h. 

Specific  guidelines  and  techniques  for  developing  reading  skills  in  each  of  the 
content  areas 


ED   520  READING  INSTRUCTION  FOR  THE 

CULTURALLY  DISADVANTAGED  3  s.h. 

Sociological,  psychological,  experiential  and  linguistic  variations  that  are 

sources  of  disadvantages  and  enables  teacher  to  modify  attitudes,  diagnostic 

procedures,  materials  and  instructional  procedures  to  enhance  reading/learning 

skills. 

ED  570  INTERNSHIP  IN  SUPERVISION  OF 

READING  INSTRUCTION  4  S.h. 

Students  are  assigned  to  various  school  systems  and  clinical  agencies  in 
which  they  perform  as  supervisors  under  university  and  faculty  selected  local 
administrative  personnel  Internship  includes  research,  discussions,  evaluation  of 
reading  programs,  and  supervision  of  developmental,  corrective,  and  remedial 
programs.  Prerequisite:  Administration  and  Supervision  of  Reading  Program. 

ED   596  INDEPENDENT  STUDY  IN  READING  EDUCATION  1-3  s  h. 

The  student,  with  cooperation  of  the  reading  faculty  member  with  whom  he 
expects  to  work  and  his  reading  faculty  advisor,  engages  in  a  study  individually  or 
with  a  small  group  on  some  problem  or  field  not  clearly  defined  in  existing  courses. 
Prerequisite   Permission  of  the  Coordinator. 

ED  597  SEMINAR  IN  SPECIAL  PROBLEMS  IN  READING  3  s.h. 

Topics  such  as  reading  disability,  preschool  reading  instruction,  adult  literary 
programs,  or  organization  of  school-wide  reading  programs  may  be  covered 

ED  598  RESEARCH  SEMINAR  IN  READING  3  s  h. 

Studens  will  scrutinize  anj  report  on  research  in  reading  according  to  their 
interest  Areas  of  research  concentration  can  vary  each  term  Prerequisite: 
Permission  of  the  Coordinator 


110  —  Indiana  University  of  Pennsylvania 


SCIENCE  FOR  THE 
ELEMENTARY  SCHOOL  TEACHER 

The  program  leading  to  a  Master  of  Education  Degree  in 
Elementary  Science  is  designed  to  give  elementary  teachers 
depth  and  competency  in  the  content  areas  of  the  physical  and 
biological  sciences.  The  assemblage  of  courses  cited  below 
should  prepare  the  student  for  work  as  an  Elementary  Science 
resource  person  within  his  school  or  school  district.  Except  for 
Bl  500,  GS  502,  and  GS  561  all  of  these  courses  are  not  open  to 
majors  in  Biology,  Chemistry,  or  Physics. 

Following  admission  to  the  graduate  school,  each  candidate 
is  expected  to  appear  before  the  Elementary  Science 
Committee.  At  this  meeting  the  candidate  will  be  assigned  to  an 
advisor  who  will  assist  the  student  in  selecting,  preparing,  and 
presenting  his  thesis  or  research  project. 


B.  Behavioral  Studies  (3  s.h.)  —  One  of  the  following: 

EP  504,  EP  573,  EP  576,  EP  578,  EP  580,  CE  529,  CE  539, 
or  SE  531 

C.  Research  (3  s.h.) 

GR  515,  Elements  of  Research 

II.  Specialization  Core  —  (6  s.h.) 

III.  Subject  Area  and/or  thesis  —  (15-18  s.h.) 

Subject  Matter  Concentration  Area  —  fifteen  to  eighteen 
(15-18)  semester  hours  of  work  in  subject  matter  content 
are  to  be  selected  from  the  following  courses  except  that  a 
more  advanced  course  may  be  required  by  the  advisor  if  the 
background  of  the  student  warrants:  ES  510-511,  ES  530, 
ES  540,  ES  550,  ES  560,  ES  564,  ES  566,  ES  568,  ES  569, 
ES  574,  ES  580,  ES  588,  ES  592,  GS  502,  GS  561,  MA  521 
or  Bl  500. 


CURRICULUM  FOR 

MASTER  OF  EDUCATION  DEGREE 

This  program  is  not  intended  for  certification  in  science  at  the 
secondary  level.  It  is  designed  to  provide  the  elementary  teacher 
with  an  opportunity  to  increase  his  ability  to  teach  science  at  the 
elementary  level.  Students  working  for  this  degree  with  a  major 
in  Elementary  Science  will  complete  thirty  (30)  semester  hours 
of  work  in  accordance  with  the  following  divisions  if  a  thesis  is 
completed.  If  no  thesis  is  selected,  (33)  semester  hours  must  be 
completed. 

I.  Professional  Development  Area  (9  s.h.) 
A.  Humanistic  Studies  (3  s.h.)  —  One  of  the  following: 
FE  511,  FE  512,  FE  513,  or  FE  514 


ES   530  QUANTITATIVE  TOOLS  FOR  EL.  SCIENCE  3  s.h. 

Proficiency  in  quantitative  aspects  of  science.  Emphasis  on  practical  problem 
solving  related  to  typical  lab  data  Instruments,  instrument  calibration,  graphing, 
and  graph  interpretation(  interpolation  and  extrapolation).  Area  under  the  curve 
idea  and  meaning  of  slope  on  a  graph  will  be  explored  extensively.  Concentrated 
instruction  in  use  of  slide  rule,  use  of  logarithms  and  significant  figures  as  tools  to 
achieve  above  objectives  (Wolfe) 

ES   540  CHEMISTRY  IN  ELEIVIENTARY  SCIENCE  EDUCATION  3  s.h. 

Principles  of  chemistry  through  lab  and/or  field-centered  experiences  relevant 
to  teaching  chemistry  in  elementary  school.  Recommended  for  all  elementary 
education  majors   (Costa  or  Zambotti) 

ES   550  PHYSICS  IN  ELEMENTARY  SCIENCE  EDUCATION  3  s.h. 

Development  of  basic  concepts  in  physics  on  a  quantitatively  plausible  basis 
appropriate  for  elementary  science  Lab  work  is  designed  to  develop  an 
understanding  of  force,  work,  and  energy,  and  conservation  of  energy  in 
mechanical  thermal  and  electrical  systems.  Operational  definitions  and 
formulation  and  use  of  physical  models   (Riban) 


ES   560  BOTANY  IN  ELEMENTARY  SCIENCE  EDUCATION  3  s  h 

Introduction  to  anatomy  and  life  processes  of  plant  cells,  tissues,  and  organs. 
Consideration  to  selected  algae,  bactena.  fungi,  mosses,  ferns  and  theiralliesand 
seed  plants  Recognition  of  groups  of  local  plants,  theireconomic  importance  and 
health  implications  are  emphasized  Lab  studies  will  include  practical  uses  of 
plants   (Schrock) 

ES   564  ZOOLOGY  IN  ELEMENTARY  SCIENCE  EDUCATION  3  s  h 

A  lab  and  field  study  which  surveys  principles  and  theory  of  zoological 
taxonomy  and  study  of  representative  invertebrate  and  vertebrate  taxa  Emphasis 
on  freshwater  and  terrestrial  forms  which  may  be  observed  or  collected  in  Western 
Pennsylvania  Homologous  structures  are  compared  and  their  functions  are 
studied  Pnnciples  of  embryology,  genetics  and  animal  behavior  are  introduced. 
{Stapleton  or  Mernti) 

ES   566  CONSERVATION  IN  ELEMENTARY 

SCIENCE  EDUCATION  3  s.h 

A  new  concept  in  conservation-corrective  and  preventive  conservation  for 
mans  survival  Problems  of  pollution  and  population  are  central  theme  Field  work 
is  required   (Ferrence  or  Hue) 


ES   568-569  FIELD  BIOLOGY  I  AND  II  IN  ELEMENTARY 
SCIENCE  EDUCATION 


6  s.h. 


ES   568  FIELD  BIOLOGY  I 

A  lab  course  on  biological  environment  Included  will  be  recognition  of 
regional  vegetation  formations  and  typical  animals  associated  with  these 
formations  Identification  and  collections  will  be  made  No  prerequisites. 
(Summers  only) 

ES    569  FIELD  BIOLOGY  II 

Ecology  of  Southwestern  Pennsylvania  counties  Attention  toward 
interrelationships  of  plant,  animal,  and  human  populations  Field  techniques 
including  population  analysis  and  measurements  of  effects  of  industrial  activities 
will  receive  particular  attention  No  prerequisites.  (Summers  only)  (Merritt. 
Stapleton.  Waechter) 

ES   574  METEOROLOGY  IN  ELEMENTARY 

SCIENCE  EDUCATION  3  S.h. 

A  descriptive  analysis  of  fundamentals  of  weather,  including:  composition  and 
structure  of  atmosphere,  radiation,  heat  budget,  cloud  and  rain  physics, 
circulation  patterns,  storm  structuros.  air  pollution,  and  biometeorology 
Familianzation  with  weather  instruments,  maps  and  records,  as  well  as  activities 
applicable  to  elementary  science   (Prince) 


Program  Curricula  —111 
Science  for  the  Elemenlary  Teacher 
Social  Science 

ES   580         ASTRONOMY  IN  ELEMENTARY  SCIENCE  EDUCATION  3  s  h. 

A  descriptive  and  qualitative  study  of  stellar  and  solar  system  astronomy 
including  telescopes  and  space  travel  at  a  level  adaptable  to  the  elementary  school 
classroom  and  techniques  (or  their  presentation  Three  (3)  hours  lecture  and/or 
lab.  (Sutton) 

ES   588  FIELD  NATURAL  HISTORY  OF  WESTERN  PA  3  8  h. 

Bus  and  automobile  travel  throughout  Western  Pennsylvania  Races  of 
interest  in  ecology,  geology,  conservation,  and  nature  study  will  t>e  visited. 
Offered  in  pre-  or  post-session  only  Travel  may  require  the  student  be  away  from 
campus  for  several  days  at  a  time.  A  travel  assessment  based  upon  needs  will  be 
made  (Ferrence) 

ES   592  ELEMENTARY  SCIENCE  CURRICULUM  3  S  h 

Various  approaches  to  teaching  of  elementary  science  and  bases  for  these 
approaches  New  curricula  t>eing  used  in  elementary  schools  will  be  examined  and 
critiqued   (Ferrence  or  Moore) 


GS  502  PRINCIPLES  OF  GEOLOGY 

See  course  description  under  Geoscience   (Park) 

GS  561  OCEANOGRAPHY  I 

See  course  description  under  Geoscience.  (Prince) 


3«.h. 
3sJi. 


SOCIAL  SCIENCE 


Master  of  Education  in  Social  Science 

The  Master  of  Education  Degree  in  Social  Science  is 
designed  to  give  secondary  teachers  greater  depth  and 
competency  In  the  subject  matter,  methodology  and  research 
techniques  of  the  social  sciences. 

Each  student  admitted  to  the  Graduate  School  will  be 
assigned  to  an  advisor  in  the  Social  Science  Division.  All 
courses  must  be  approved  by  that  advisor. 

Students  working  for  this  degree  will  complete  a  minimum  of 
30  semester  hours  of  work  in  accordance  with  the  M.Ed. 


112  —  Indiana  University  of  Pennsylvania 


program  description  on  page  20.  Courses  in  subject  matter 
concentration  must  be  elected  in  three  of  five  Social  Sciences 
(Economics,  Geography,  History,  Political  Science,  Sociology- 
Anthropology).  See  course  listings  elsewhere  in  this  catalog. 

COURSE  DESCRIPTIONS 

SS   510  NEW  APPROACHES  IN  SOCIAL 

SCIENCE  INSTRUCTION  2  s  h 

Selected  new  and  Innovative  curriculum  projects  and  materials  beginning  with 
an  analysis  of  recent  research  in  the  behavioral  sciences  and  history.  Some 
emphasis  on  strategies  (or  use  of  such  materials  in  the  classroom. 

SS   511  SOCIAL  SCIENCE  SEMINAR  2sh 

Research  in  methodology  of  social  science  in  the  secondary  schools. 
Restricted  to  M.Ed  candidates.  Prerequisite:  GD  515  or  SS  514. 

SS   514  RESEARCH  METHODOLOGIES  IN 

THE  SOCIAL  SCIENCE  2  s  h 

Selection  of  a  research  topic,  techniques  of  locating  and  using  source 
materials,  evaluation  of  evidence,  organization  of  tested  data,  and  exposition  of 
tested  data  according  to  approved  forms  Methodologies  of  value  of  students  of 
politics,  economics,  or  sociology,  in  addition  to  those  techniques  usually  treated 
in  historiography 

SS   521  CONTEMPORARY  AMERICAN  ISSUES  2  s  h 

Conducted  in  seminar  fashion,  centering  its  attention  on  one  or  two  major 

contemporary  American  issues.  Open  only  to  non-majors  in  the  social  sciences 

SS   561  SOCIAL  POLICY  STUDIES  2sh 

Focusing  on  several  key  issues  on  American  social  scene,  the  class  will 
examine  genesis  of  each  problem,  present  conflict  of  values  inherent  in  the 
problem,  alternative  proposals  for  its  solution  and  the  social  consequences.  Open 
only  to  non-majors  in  the  social  sciences 

SS   598-599 SOCIAL  SCIENCE  FOREIGN  STUDY  2-6  s  h 

Directed  foreign  study  that  involves  travel  and  observation  outside  the  United 
States.  Areas  visited  and  itineraries  vary  from  year  to  year  Background  reading, 
lectures  and  briefings,  diary  or  evaluative  paper  In  recent  years  Argentina,  India, 
the  Soviet  Union  and  countries  of  Western  Europe  have  been  tour  destinations. 
For  details  on  projected  tours  direct  inquiries  to  Director,  Center  for  International 
Studies. 


SOCIOLOGY 


The  Masters  of  Arts  in  Sociology  is  designed  to  serve  two 
basic  orientations:  a)  preparing  for  professional  careers  in 
academic  organizations,  such  as  community  college  teaching 
and  governmental  and  social  agencies,  and/or  research;  as  well 
as  a  scholarly  foundation  for  those  students  who  are  interested 
in  continuing  their  studies  into  a  doctoral  program;  b)  a 
professional  commitment  to  community  service  and  social 
agencies.  This  orientation  recognizes  that  mature  students  can 
apply  sociological  theory  and  research  findings  to  community 
organizations  through  their  daily  Interactions,  making  major 
contributions  to  the  community  and  human  life.  The  M.A.  in 
Sociology  is  also  geared  to  benefit  students  who  have  an 
interest  in  government  administration,  urban  planning,  social 
welfare  agencies,  and  other  human  services. 

In  addition  to  graduate  school  admission  requirements,  the 
student  must  have  completed  at  least  1 2  hours  of  undergraduate 
Sociology  courses  with  an  average  grade  of  B  or  better.  In 
individual  cases  the  department  may  allow  a  promising  student 
to  enter  the  program  with  deficiencies;  however,  such 
deficiencies  must  be  made  up  by  taking  one  or  more  of  the 
departmental  readings  courses  or  other  specified  courses  at  the 
discretion  of  the  department  in  addiiion  to  the  required  total 
number  of  course  hours. 

Degree  Requirements 

All  Master  of  Arts  degree  candidates  are  required  to  take  the 
basic  core  requirements:  SO  567,  SO  591,  SO  592* 

*Master  of  Arts  in  Social  Science  and  Master  of  Science  in 
Education  students  may  substitute  either  SO  564  or  GD  565. 


students  preparing  for  doctorates  are  advised  to  take  the  first 
area  of  concentration,  and  those  students  preparing  for 
Sociology  related  professions  are  encouraged  to  follow  the 
second  area  of  concentration. 

AREAS  OF  CONCENTRATIONS: 

I.  Students  preparing  for  doctorate.  In  addition  to  the  core 
requirements,  at  least  one  course  must  be  selected  from 
each  of  the  following  four  major  areas: 

a)  Social  Institutions  —  SO  560,  SO  572,  SO  590*,  and 
SO  591'. 

b)  Social  Problems  —  SO  557,  SO  559,  SO  562,  SO  563. 
SO  565,  SO  566,  SO  590*,  and  SO  591*. 

c)  Social  Change  —  SO  560,  SO  590*  and  SO  591*. 

d)  Social   Policies  —  SO  557,  SO  559,  SO  563,  SO  565. 
SO  590*,  SO  591*. 

and  six  hours  of  electives  within  concentration  and  GD 

550  (4-6  s.h.) 
*S0  590  and  SO  591  are  accepted  in  the  specific  major  areas 
when  either  the  topic  or  focus  of  the  individual  instructor 
directly  relates  to  the  area  involved.  For  example.  Social 
Institutions  may  include  family,  medicine,  religion,  political; 
special  problems  may  include  drug  culture,  alcoholism, 
battered  children,  marginal  man,  social  self  identity;  social 
change  may  include  rural-nonfarm  communities  emerging 
societies,  social  forces  of  change;  and  social  policies  may 
include  either  ethical  imperatives,  cultural  values,  helping 
relations,  modern  values  affecting  marital  patterns. 

II.  Preparation  for  Sociology  related  professions:  administrative, 
community,  community  organization,  and  social  welfare 
agencies.  This  program  requires  36  graduate  credits  with  the 


Program  Curricula  —  113 
Social  Science 
Sociology 

courses  and  practicum  being  selected  in  mutual  consulta- 
tion between  student  and  advisor  within  the  following 
guidelines: 

a)  The  core  requirements:  SO  567,  SO  591,  SO  592 

(a  waiver  of  these  required  courses  is  sometimes  possible 
in  consultation  with  the  department.) 

b)  6-9  credits  in  sociological-related  courses  which  are 
relevant  to  student's  career,  and 

c)  Graduate  550  Thesis  —  3  credits,  which  is  optional  for  this 
concentration. 

COURSE  DESCRIPTIONS 

so  551  SYMPOSIUM  OF  SOCIOLOGICAL  PRINCIPLES  3  s  h. 

General  overview  of  sociological  principles  regarding  intergroup  relationships 
and  social  system  processes  directed  to  students  who  tail  to  have  at  least  a 
sociological  minor  equivalent  at  undergraduate  level 

SO  557  SOCIAL  PROCESSES  OF  AGING  3  s  h. 

An  introduction  to  problems  of  the  aged  and  of  aging  past  the  middle  life. 
Covered  first  is  the  aging  Individual  and  later  the  interrelation  of  this  individual 
with  family,  community,  and  special  setting,  within  framework  of  the  limited 
welfare  state. 

so  559  SOCIAL  SERVICES  3  s  h. 

To  explore  a  specific  aspect  of  social  services  ranging  from  aging  to  youth 
services  with  student  choosing  the  area  of  exploration 

so  560  SOCIOLOGY  OF  POWER  3  s  h. 

Social  power  dimension  of  social  strata  and  class  with  particular  emphasis  on 
lower  or  "underprivileged"  strata  Employs,  where  possible,  a  cross-cultural 
approach  for  comparisons  of  US  with  developing  societies 

SO  562  DEVIANT  BEHAVIOR  3  S  h. 

Social-individual  analysis  of  deviant  behavior.  Effect  of  social  conditions  and 

cultural  values  is  emphasized.  Legal,  social  and  cultural  perspectives  to  deviance 

are  discussed 

so  563  INTERGROUP  RELATIONS  3  S.h. 

Intergroup  tensions  and  conflicts  with  emphasis  on  techniques  of  social  action 
designed  to  reduce  conflict. 


114  —  Indiana  University  of  Pennsylvania 


SO  564  RESEARCH  SEMINAR  IN  SOCIOLOGY  3  s.h. 

Area  research  considering  various  facets  of  a  central  problem  both  from  the 
research  and  theoretical  view  points 

SO  565  ADOLESCENT  IN  AMERICAN  SOCIETY  3  S.h. 

Students  will  prepare  papers  on  topics  such  as  delinquency  or  peer-group 
relationships. 

SO  566  THE  SOCIOLOGY  OF  SMALL  GROUPS  3  s  h. 

Interrelation  between  the  individual  and  groups  such  as  home,  school, 
neighborhood,  work,  community,  etc.,  and  dynamics  and  development  of  groups 
as  well  as  interactional  and  behavioral  processes. 

SO  567  RECENT  SOCIAL  THEORIES  3  s.h. 

Review  of  basic  and  advanced  concepts  in  sociology  with  emphasis  on  modern 

theoretical  and  substantive  contributions  to  the  field.  Include  majors  in  sociology 

SO  572  SOCIOLOGY  OF  LAW  3  s.h 

Sociological  analysis  of  law  and  legal  institutions.  Prerequisites:  9  graduate 
credits. 

SO  590  READINGS  IN  SOCIOLOGY  3  s.h. 

Students  report  and  develop  extensive  bibliographies  on  assigned  readings  for 
a  depth  understanding  of  a  specific  sociological  concept,  process,  or  problem 

SO  591  SPECIAL  TOPICS  SEMINAR  IN  SOCIOLOGY  3-6  s  h 

Seminar  focuses  on  particular  substantive  areas  Students  will  do  extensive 
reading  accordig  to  topics  selected  by  instructor 

SO  592  METHODS  AND  FIELDWORK  PRACTICES  3  s  h. 

An  examination  of  latest  methodological  and  fieldwork  procedures  in 
sociology.  Students  will  be  expected  to  develop  reasonable  project  outlines 
Required  for  MA  majors  in  Sociology. 

In  addition  to  the  above  courses,  students  can  take  SO  599  if  they  wish  to  do 
Independent  Study  in  Sociology. 

Note:  Anthropology  graduate  courses  listed  in  Social  Science  Program: 


AN  591  STUDIES  IN  ANTHROPOLOGY 

AN  592  COMPARATIVE  CULTURES 

AN  593  THE  SCIENCE  OF  CULTURE 

AN  594  ANTHROPOLOGY  SEMINAR 

AN  595  PRE  HISTORY 


3s.h. 
3s.h. 
3  s.h. 
3  s.h. 
3  s.h. 


SPECIAL  EDUCATION  AND  CLINICAL  SERVICES 

This  Depaiiment  offers  a  graduate  program  leading  to  the 
Master  of  Education  degree  in  Education  of  Exceptional 
Children  or  in  Speech  Pathology.  The  Department  also  offers 
the  Master  of  Science  degree  in  Exceptionality  or  in  Speech 
Pathology.  A  graduate  level  of  competency  in  these  major  areas 
Is  In  accord  with  national  standards  now  emphasized  by 
professional  organizations  such  as  the  Council  for  Exceptional 
Children  and  the  American  Speech  and  Hearing  Association. 

CURRICULUM  FOR  THE  MASTER  OF 
EDUCATION  DEGREE  IN  EDUCATION  OF 
EXCEPTIONAL  CHILDREN  OR  THE  MASTER 
OF  SCIENCE  DEGREE  IN  EXCEPTIONALITY 

The  M.Ed,  degree  requires  a  course  in  Foundations  of 
Education  and  practlcum  experiences  in  appropriate  settings. 
The  Master  of  Science  degree  is  based  upon  an  individual 
program  which  integrates  academic  as  well  as  practicum 
experience  with  selected  community  agencies.  A  minimum  of 
36  semester  hours,  or  30  s.h.  plus  a  thesis  is  required  for  either 
degree. 

CURRICULUM  FOR  MASTER  OF  SCIENCE 

IN  EXCEPTIONALITY 

Professional  training  is  provided  for  those  who  wish  to  gain 
competencies  for  working  with  mentally  and/or  physically 
handicapped  adults  and  their  families  in  the  community  or  in 
various  agencies  and  organizations.  Advisor  recommendation 
should  be  obtained  prior  to  enrollment.  Course  selection  and 


degree  candidacy  is  based  upon  individual  background  and 
employment  goals.  Candidates  for  the  Master  of  Science  degree 
will  select  a  minimum  of  21  s.h.  in  Subject  Matter  Concentration 
including  6 s.h.  of  EX  555  Practicum,  EX  522,  EX  530,  EX  531 ,  and 
PC  540  and  EX  545.  They  will  also  complete  a  minimum  of  3  s.h. 
in  GR  515  Elements  of  Research  as  well  as  3-6  hours  of  Inter- 
related Study  selected  according  to  student  needs. 


CURRICULUM  FOR  THE  MASTER 

OF  EDUCATION  DEGREE  IN  EDUCATION 

OF  EXCEPTIONAL  CHILDREN 

This  graduate  program  offers  student  majors  Master  of 
Education  options  in  one  of  the  following  areas  of 
concentration:  (1)  Mentally  Retarded,  (2)  Emotionally 
Disturbed,  (3)  Learning  Disabled.  As  a  prerequisite  for 
completion  of  the  M.Ed,  degree,  all  three  major  options  require 
Pennsylvania  teaching  certification  in  Education  of  Mentally 
and/or  Physically  Handicapped.  Candidates  with  teaching 
certification  in  other  fields  will  be  required  to  complete 
additional  semester  hours  toward  such  certification,  depending 
on  individual  background. 

All  three  concentration  areas  require  9  semester  hours  in 
Professional  Development  selected  from  the  approved  list, 
including  3  s.h.  in  Foundations  of  Education,  3  s.h.  selected 
from  the  course  list  in  Behavioral  Studies,  and  3  s.h.  in  Research 
(GR  515).  (See  page  20  for  detailed  information  on  these 
requirements)  All  three  concentration  areas  also  require  6  s.h.  in 
Specialization  Core,  including  EX  540  as  well  as  the 
specialization  courses  in  each  area,  EX  523  for  the  Mentally 
Retarded  concentration,  EX  565  for  the  Emotionally  Disturbed 


Program  Curricula  —115 
Sociology 
Special  Education  and  Clinical  Services 

concentration,   and   EX  566  for  the   Learning   Disabled 
concentration. 

All  three  concentration  areas  require  a  minimum  of  21  s.h.  in 
Subject  Area  course  work  unless  the  thesis  option  is  selected. 
Course  work  selection  for  all  3  options  include  EX  522,  EX  530, 
EX  532,  EX  539,  EX  546,  EX  555,  EX  560.  Additional  subject  area 
selections  for  each  option  include  EX  565  for  both  Mentally 
Retarded  or  Learning  Disabled,  EX  566  for  Mentally  Retarded, 
and  EX  523  and  PC  534  for  the  Emotionally  Disturbed 
concentration. 

CURRICULUM  FOR  THE  MASTER  OF 
EDUCATION  OR  MASTER  OF  SCIENCE  DEGREE 
IN  SPEECH  PATHOLOGY 

The  Speech  Pathology  major  leads  to  a  Master  of  Education 
or  a  Master  of  Science  Degree.  A  minimum  of  36  semester  hours 
or  30  semester  hours  plus  a  thesis  is  required  for  either  degree. 
The  Master  of  Education  Degree  requires  a  course  in 
Foundations  of  Education  and  minimal  practicum  experiences, 
whereas  the  Master  of  Science  Degree  is  based  upon  an 
individual  academic  program  including  sufficient  practicum 
experiences  to  meet  the  national  standards  established  for  a 
Certificate  of  Clinical  Competence.  Those  students  who  have 
not  completed  at  least  18  semester  hours  normally  included  in 
an  undergraduate  major  in  the  area  may  be  provisionally 
admitted  and  upon  completion  of  the  deficiencies  may  apply  for 
fall  graduate  status.  Each  student  Is  assigned  an  advisor  whose 
signature  will  be  required  for  Initial  registration. 

MASTER  OF  EDUCATION 

Candidates  for  the  Master  of  Education  Degree  will  choose  9 


7  76  —  Indiana  University  of  Pennsylvania 


semester  hours  in  Professional  Development,  a  Specialization 
Core  of  6  semester  hours  (SH  504  and  SH  530),  and  18  to  22 
semester  hours  in  the  Subject  Area.  SH  510,  SH550and1  credit 
of  SH  561  will  be  required.  See  page  20. 

MASTER  OF  SCIENCE 

Candidates  for  the  Master  of  Science  Degree  will  select  a 
minimum  of  24  semester  hours  in  the  Subject  Matter 
Concentration  including  SH  504,  SH  510.  SH  530,  SH  540,  SH 
550,  SH  561  and  SH  663.  They  will  also  complete  a  3-6  semester 
hours  of  Research  and  choose  3-6  semester  hours  from  the 
Course  Offerings  of  the  following  departments:  Art,  Counselor 
Education,  Educational  Psychology,  Elementary  Education, 
English,  Foundations  of  Education,  Learning  Resources  and 
Mass  Media,  Psychology,  Reading,  Sociology-Anthropology, 
Social  Sciences  or  Special  Education. 

COURSE  DESCRIPTIONS 

EDUCATION  OF  EXCEPTIONAL  CHILDREN 

EX   522  ORIENTATION  TO  PHYSICALLY  HANDICAPPED  3  S.h. 

Principles  and  practices  in  rehabilitation,  with  attention  to  contributions  of 
teachers,  counselors,  nurses,  social  workers,  psychologists,  speech  therapists, 
and  other  professional  workers. 

EX   523  CURRICULUM  AND  METHODS  3  s.h. 

Designed  to  provide  an  in-depth  understanding  of  current  curriculum  levels 
for  all  retarded  students.  Curriculum  guides  are  evaluated  and  analyzed  in  relation 
to  present  and  future  programs.  Some  consideration  to  subject  matter  at 
elementary  and  secondary  levels,  relationship  between  academic  subjects  and 
vocational  skills:  emphasis  on  clinical  and  diagnostic  approach  in  curriculum 
design 

SH  524  PRINCIPLES  AND  PRACTICES  IN 

SPEECH  IMPROVEMENT  3  s.h. 

Study  of  the  normal  development  of  speech,  classroom  methods  in  speech 

improvement,  and  special  consideration  for  children  handicapped  in  speech  or 


hearing.  Library  research,  project  work,  demonstrations  and  experimentation  will 
be  heavily  stressed. 

EX   530  ORGANIZATION  AND  ADMINISTRATION  OF 

PROGRAMS  FOR  EXCEPTIONAL  CHILDREN  3  s.h. 

Principles,  practices,  and  problems  of  administration  and  supervision  as  they 
relate  to  developing  and  maintaining  special  education  programs.  Criteria  are 
analyzed  for  use  in  evaluation  of  local  programs.  Functions  of  administrators  and 
supervisors  in  school  systems  are  compared  according  to  rural,  urban,  or  state- 
wide responsibilities.  Prerequisite:  SE  520,  521,  540  (Required  for  administrators 
and  supervisors  ) 

EX   531  PSYCHOLOGY  OF  THE  EXCEPTIONAL  CHILD  3  s.h. 

Designed  to  aid  the  student  in  meeting  needs  of  those  children  who  deviate 

from   the   typical    in   areas  of   physical,    mental,   emotional,   and   educational 

developments.  Consideration  to  methods  of  instruction  and  curricular  material. 

EX    532  GUIDANCE  AND  ADJUSTMENT  3  s.h. 

Home,  school,  and  community  influences  are  analyzed  in  family  adjustment  to 
the  presence  of  an  exceptional  child.  Family  reactions  are  considered  in 
behavioral  differences  among  children  with  various  degrees  of  exceptionabilitles. 
Emphasis  to  guidance  skills  and  knowledges  needed  by  teachers  and  other 
professional  workers  in  field  of  exceptionability. 

EX   538  PSYCHOLOGY  OF  THE  GIFTED  CHILD  3  S.h. 

Characteristics  of  the  bright,  fast-learning  child  along  with  implications  for 
education.  Emphasis  to  measurement  techniques,  motivational  factors,  and 
personality  dynamics. 

EX   539  PSYCHOLOGY  OF  THE  MENTALLY  RETARDED  3  s.h. 

Characteristics  of  the  slow-learner  and  of  the  non-educable  child  along  with 
implications  for  education  Emphasis  to  measurement  techniques,  motivational 
factors  and  personality  dynamics. 

EX   540  DIAGNOSTIC  TECHNIQUES  IN  SPECIAL  EDUCATION  3  s.h. 

Diagnostic  procedures  and  appropriate  test  materials  are  selected  for  use  in 
assessment  of  pupils  with  mental,  physical,  emotional,  and  Isarning  disabilities. 
Observations  and  demonstrations,  reporting  and  interpreting  results  of  diagnostic 
procedures  are  integrated  with  remedial  or  developmental  recommendations  in 
individual  case  studies.  Prerequisite:  SE  531,  SE  539. 

EX   541  INTERPRETATION  OF  RESULTS  OF 

PSYCHOLOGICAL  TESTS  3  S.h. 

Results   of   psychometric  tests  are  analyzed  and  interpreted.   Various 


Program  Curricula—  117 
Special  Education  and  Clinical  Services 


standardized  psychological  instruments  and  test  batteries  are  considered  in  the 
light  of  their  purpose  and  usage  Both  individual  and  group  test  results  are 
examined 

EX    545  COMMUNITY  AND  AGENCY  PLANNING  3sh 

Selected  professional,  governmental  and  community  organizations  are 
studied  for  their  contributions  to  comprehensive  planning  toward  educational, 
personal-social,  and  occupational  adjustments  Social,  educational,  economic, 
and  cultural  aspects  are  analyzed 

EX    546  TEACHING  THE  TRAINABLE  MENTALLY  RETARDED         2-3  s  h 

An  analysis  of  curriculum  and  program  content  for  the  trainable  mentally 
retarded  ranging  from  preschool  age  to  adult  ages-  Directed  toward  students  and 
teachers  who  plan  to  teach  the  trainable  retarded  in  public  schools,  institutional 
facilities,  and/or  sheltered  workshops 

EX    555  PRACTICUM  AND  INTERNSHIP  2-6  sh 

Advanced  students  are  offered  guided  practicum  experiences  in  selected 
schools,  residential  institutions,  clinics,  or  agencies.  Internship  or  supervised 
student  teaching  is  planned  individually.  Students  analyze,  evaluate,  and  report  on 
their  experiences. 

EX   560  SELECTED  PROBLEMS  AND  RESEARCH  3  s  h. 

Students  will  review  critically  recent  developments  in  the  field  Opportunity  is 
afforded  tor  independent  readings  and  limited  research  reports  A  student  may 
identify  a  topic  tor  subsequent  Development  as  his  thesis  or  research  project 
Prerequisites:  SE  539.  SE  540 

EX   565  EDUCATION  OF  CHILDREN  WITH  SOCIAL  AND 

EMOTIONAL  MALADJUSTMENTS  3  s  h 

Examines  reactions  of  children  in  the  schools  who  deviate  in  their  emotional  or 

social    t>ehavior    Consideration   is   given   to   children   who   habitually   exhibit 

overcontrolled.   undercontrolled.  or  immature  reactions    Identification, 

characteristics,  educational  provisions,  and  preventive  measures  are  emphasized 

EX   566  EDUCATION  OF  CHILDREN  WITH 

LEARNING  DISABILITIES  3  sh. 

Emphasizes  curriculum  and  remedial  instruction  for  children  with  special 
learning  disabilities  who  exhibit  a  disorder  in  one  or  more  of  the  basic 
psychological  processes  involved  in  understanding  or  in  using  spoken  or  written 
language  These  may  be  manifested  in  disorders  of  listening,  thinking,  talking, 
reading,  writing,  spelling,  or  in  arithmetic. 


SPEECH  PATHOLOGY 


SH  502  LANGUAGE  DEVELOPMENT  3  ».h. 

Study  of  requisites,  stages,  and  pnnciples  of  ontogenetic  development  of  an 
interpersonal  communication  system;  structure  and  development  of  language; 
nature  of  and  development  of  nonverbal  communication 

SH   504  DIAGNOSTIC  METHODS  3  sh. 

Evaluation  of  tests  and  techniques  for  diagnosis  of  speech  and  language 

disorders:  interpretation  of  results  and  planning  appropriate  subsequent  case 

management  Interviewing  techniques  appropriate  to  case  history  taking.  Writing 

of  diagnostic  and  case-history  reports 

SH   510  ARTICULATION  3  Sh. 

Linguistic  approach  to  articulatory  process,  and  analysis  of  misarticulations  aa 
symptoms  of  language  dysfunction;  variables  related  to  articulatory  mastery: 
programmed,  traditional,  and  sensory-motor  methods  of  modifying  articulatory 
behavior 

SH  512  CLEFT  PALATE  3  s  h. 

Problems  associated  with  phenomenon  of  cleft  lip  and  palate  with  special 
emphasis  in  areas  of  speech,  hearing,  and  language  Included  in  course  will  t>e 
human  embryology  with  specific  emphasis  on  oral  facial  development;  physical 
remediation,  including  both  surgical  and  prosthetic  repair;  the  effects  of  clefts  on 
structure  and  function  of  speech  and  hearing  mechanism;  role  of  speech 
correctionist  on  the  cleft  palate  team;  evaluation  and  current  remedial  procedures 
for  speech,  hearing,  and  language  problems. 

SH  514  NEUROPATHOLOGIES  OF  SPEECH  3  s  h 

Anatomy  and  physiology  of  nervous  system  in  common  neuropathologies 
affecting  speech  and  language  Investigation  of  symptoms  and  etiologies 
associated  with  deviant  neutral  transmission  and  muscular  contraction 
Examination  of  diagnostic  techniques  employed  m  neuromuscular  conditions 
resulting  from  Daisies,  progressive  deoenorotive  diseases,  dysarthrias  tumors 
and  paralytic  or  paretic  involvement  Empnasis  on  therapeutic  approacnes 
currently  in  use  and  associated  psychological  impact  of  such  debilitating 
conditions. 

SH  516  STUTTERING  3  Sh. 

Nature  and  causes  of  stuttering  Emphasis  on  diagnoses  and  management. 
Counseling  and  learning  theory  applications  as  two  main  approaches  to 
treatment  Consideration  of  the  person  as  a  stutterer  Review  of  pertinent  and 
recent  research  topics 


118  —  Indiana  University  of  Pennsylvania 


SH   518  VOICE  3s.h 

Scientific  principles  of  voice  production  and  modification  witfi  emphasis  on 
physiology,  pathologies,  or  malfunctioning  which  produce  voice  defects; 
relationship  between  disorders  of  voice  and  personality;  diagnostic  and 
therapeutic  considerations  for  both  organic  and  psychogenic  disorders,  including 
the  laryngectomized 

SH   530  LANGUAGE  DISORDERS  OF  CHILDREN  3  s  h. 

Anatomical,  physiological,  psychological,  neurological  and  environmental 
factors  related  to  language  delay  or  disordered  language  acquisition  An  inventory 
of  language  skills  and  means  of  fostering  their  development  or  compensating  for 
inadequacies;  a  holistic  vs.  specific  approach  to  programs  of  remediation. 

SH   532  APHASIA  3  s.h. 

Consideration  of  language,  speech  and  related  problems  resulting  from 
neurological  insult  Neurological  functioning  and  dysfunctioning  will  be 
highlighted  Diagnosis  and  management  of  persons  with  aphasia,  agnosias  or 
aprasias  will  be  emphasized  Role  of  family  in  rehabilitation  and  family  counseling. 

SH  535  SEMINAR  IN  COMMUNICATION  1-3  s.h. 

Intensive  study  of  one  or  more  areas  of  speech  science,  speech  and  language 
pathology,  or  audiology  Topics  vary  to  meet  the  student's  needs  and  interests. 
Course  may  be  repeated  for  credit  with  a  change  in  area  considered.  Prerequisite: 
Speech  Pathology  major,  admission  to  degree  candidacy  and  advisor  approval. 

SH   540  ADVANCED  AUDIOLOGY  3  s.h. 

Identification  of  types  of  peripheral  hearing  impairment  by  standard 
audiometric  procedures.  Pure  tone  audiometry  air  conduction,  bone  conduction, 
masking.  Speech  Audiometry  speech  reception  threshold,  speech  discrimination 
score,  tolerance  level  Hearing  aids  selection  procedures  and  acoustics. 
Specialized  diagnostic  audiological  tests  for  cochlear  lesions,  retrocochlear 
lesions,  central  lesions,  and  non-organic  losses  Practical  experience  to  develop 
skills  in  administration  of  standard  tests,  special  tests,  and  hearing  aid  selection. 

SH   550  SPEECH  SCIENCE  3  S.h. 

Physiologic,  acoustic,  and  perceptual  characteristics  of  speech,  with  special 
emphasis  on  speech  monitoring  and  controls  Major  lab  instrumentation  and 
research  techniques  in  current  use  are  described  and  demonstrated.  Status  of 
present  knowledge  is  summarized  and  discussed. 


with  individuals  exhibiting  speech,  language,  and/or  hearing  dysfunction. 
Planning  and  carrying  on  of  programs  of  therapy  plus  interviewing,  diagnosing, 
counseling,  and  report  writing   Two  clock  hours  per  credit. 

SH   663  ADVANCED  CLINICAL  PRACTICUM  II  2-6  s.h 

Similar  to  SH  561;  students  assume  more  responsibility,  and  experience  may 
be  done  at  approved  off-campus  sites  Two  clock  hours  per  credit. 


SH    561  ADVANCED  CLINICAL  PRACTICUM  1  2-6  s.h. 

Supervised  practicum  experience  in  the  University  Speech  and  Heanng  Clinic 


Directory  —119 


DIRECTORY 


lUP  BOARD  OF  TRUSTEES 

PATRICK  J.  STAPLETON Indiana 

PATRICK  F.  McCarthy Punxustawn«y 

A.  J.  DEREUME Punsxutawney 

FRANK  GORELL,  SR Indiana 

DONALD  W   MINTEER Worttlington 

MIRIAM  K.  LUDWIG North  Braddock 

ROBERT  J   SHUPALA Fairview 

E.  JAMES  TRIMARCHI  Indiana 

CATHERINE  M.  BURGER Hollldaysburg 


GRADUATE  COUNCIL 


DR.  EDWARD  MOTT.  Chairman 

DR.  GERARD  PENTA.  Vice  Chairman 

DR.  CHARLES  CASHDOLLAR.  Execut)ve  SecreUry 

MR.  WILLIAM  LAFRANCHI 

DR.  DONALD  McCLURE 

MR.  ROBERT  MOORE 

DR.  HOWARD  RUSSELL 

MS.  BECKY  PETERSON 

MR.  HARRY  SHOFF 

MS.  GLENDA  SPRINGER 


720  —  Indiana  University  of  Pennsylvania 


ADMINISTRATIVE  OFFICERS 


ROBERT  C.  WILBURN President 


BERNARD  T.  GILLIS  Academic  Vice  President  and  Provost 

J.  Christopher  Benz  Dean,  School  of  Fine  Arts 

George  W  Bilicic Dean,  School  of  Continuing  Education 

Brian  McCue Director,  Community-University  Studies 

Judith  L.  Cope  Director,  Adult  Education  Center 

Ronald  Martinazzi  Director,  Criminology  Extension  Classes 

Vacant Director,  Continuing  Education  (Extension) 

Program  for  Business,  Industry  and  Labor 

William  F  Wegener Director,  Crime  Study  Center 

John  Chellman Dean  School  of  Health  Services 

Herman  L.  Sledzik Director  of  Athletics 

Ruth  Podbielski  Associate  Director  of  Athletics 

Joseph  M.  Gallanar Dean,  School  of  Social  Sciences  &  Humanities 

Suzanne  H.  Hudson  Associate  Dean,  Social  Sciences  &  Humanities 

Charles  R  Fuget  Dean,  Natural  Sciences  &  Mathematics 

M.  Kathleen  Jones Dean,  School  of  Home  Economics 

Francis  G.  McGovern Dean,  Graduate  School 

Vacant Associate  Dean  of  GraduateSchool  for  Research 

Elwood  B.  Sheeder Dean,  School  of  Business 

Charles  M.  Kofoid Dean,  School  of  Education 

Vacant Associate  Dean,  School  of  Education 

Harold  Dock  Director  of  Laboratory  Experiences 

Robert  Warren  Associate  Provost 

Norman  Storm  Director,  Punxsutawney  Campus 

David  B.  Borofsky Assistant  Director,  Punxsutawney  Campus 

Robert  H.  Doerr Director,  Armstrong  County  Campus 

Richard  A.  Distanlslao Assistant  to  Director, 

Armstrong  County  Campus 

William  E.  Lafaranchi Director  of  Libraries 

Ronald  A  Steiner Asociate  Director  of  Libraries 

J.  Robert  Murray  Director,  Instructional  Resources  Services 

Lawrence  D.  Bergman Associate  Director, 

Instructional  Resources  Services 

William  J.  Lesko Coordinator,  Radio  &  Television 

C.  Donald  Seagren  Registrar 

Frederick  A.  Sehring Assistant  Registrar 


BERNARD  J.  GANLEY Vice  President  for  Administration 

Charles  T.  Buford  Personnel  Director 

Vacant Director,  Affirmative  Action 

Robert  L.  Gaylor  Special  Assistant  to  the  President  &  Director, 

Employee  Relations 
E  Receski  Assistant  to  Vice  President  for  Administration 

S.  TREVOR  HADLEY Vice  President  for  Student  Affairs 

Fred  Dakak  Dean  of  Admissions 

Pete  Metarko Associate  Dean  of  Admissions 

Lyman  Connor Assistant  Dean  of  Admissions 

Lana  M.  Zink Assistant  Dean  of  Admissions 

Crawford  W.  Johnson Director,  EOP 

Diane  L.  Duntley  Academic  Coordinator,  EOP 

Julia  B.  Miller  Counselor,  EOP 

Alphonse  N   Novels Counselor,  EOP 

Carolyn  Wilkie  Special  Services 

James  W.  Laughlin  Dean  of  Student  Services 

John  E.  Frank Director,  Counseling  Services  and  Veterans  Affairs 

E  Samuel  Hoenstine  Director,  Career  Services 

Roy  A  Moss  Associate  Director,  Career  Services 

Frederick  A.  Joseph  Director,  Financial  Aid 

William  M.  Srsic Associate  Director,  Financial  Aid 

Cleo  McCracken   Dean  of  Student  Development 

Terrell  O.  Martin Director,  Special  Programs  and  Organizations 

H.  Bruce  Zimmerman Director,  Student  Activities 

Ronald  W.  Thomas  Dean  of  Student  Life 

Sherrill  A.  Kuckuck Director,  Residence  Programming 

and  Orientation 

Donald  S.  McPherson Director,  Residence  Life 

Bonnie  Miller Residence  Coordinator 

Barbara  C.  Kunz Residence  Coordinator 

Ronald  Lunardini Residence  Coordinator 

James  Falcone Residence  Coordinator 

ISADORE  R.  LENGLET Vice  President  for  Development 

Arnold  R.  Schaid Executive  Director  of  University  Foundation 

Randy  L  Jesick  Director  of  Public  Information 

Larry  Judge Director  of  Alumni  Affairs 


Directory  —  121 


Robert  L.  Marx Director,  Campus  Physical  Planning 

Judith  A.  Moorhead  Director.  University  Relations  &  Publications 

Patricia  K.  Heilman Information  &  Publications  Specialist 

Richard  T  Wolfe  Director  of  Sponsored  Research,  Grants  &  Fund  Raising 


GEORGE  W.  MURDOCH   Vice  President  for  Finance 

Owen  J   Dougherty Housing  and  Food  Service  Director 

Dale  P  f^archand  Director  of  Institutional  Research 

John  J.  Nold Director,  Computer  Center 

Bruce  Beaumont  Assistant  Director,  Computer  Center 

Thomas  P  Cunningham  Assistant  Director,  Computer  Center 

Barbara  Eisen Assistant  Director,  Computer  Center 

Robert  L  Woodard  Director  of  institutional  Research 


DEPARTMENT  CHAIRPERSONS 

School  of  Social  Sciences  &  Humanities 

DAVID  I^EHDI  AZIMI Sociology/Anthropology 

LUDO  OP  DE  BEECK  Foreign  Languages 

RUTH  I   SHIREY  Geography  and  Regional  Planning 

GEORGE  T  WILEY History 

RICHARD  F   HEIGES Political  Science 

ROBERT  M   HERMANN   Philosophy 

RICHARD  D   MAGEE Psychology 

RICHARD  E   RAY  English 

DONALD  A  WALKER  Economics 

VICTOR  D   McGUIRE,  JR Criminology 

School  of  Natural  Sciences  &  Mathematics 

GARY  L   BUCKWALTER Physics 

WALTER  H   GRANATA Geoscience 

RICHARD  F  WAECHTER Biology 

STANFORD  L   TACKETT Chemistry 

GARY  L   BUTERBAUGH Computer  Science 

MELVIN  R.  WOODARD Mathematics 


School  of  Business 

DENNIS  D   TIGER Business  &  Distributive  Education 

DONALD  J   ROBBINS Business  Administration 

School  of  Education 

BRUCE  A   MEADOWCROFT Educational  Psychology 

GERARD  C   PENTA Foundations  of  Education 

DONALD  C   McFEELY Elementary 

RONALD  A  JULIETTE  Communications  Media 

EUGENE  F  SCANLON  Special  Education 

GEORGE  8.  SPINELLI Counselor  Education 

WARNER  E.  TOBIN   University  School 

School  of  Fine  Arts 

RICHARD  S   KNAB MusIC 

BENJAMIN  T   MILLER Art 

DONALD  G   EISEN Theater 

School  of  Health  Services 

ROBERT  J   LAUDA Safety  Sciences 

D   SHELBY  BRIGHTWELL Health  &  Physical  Education 

MARY  C.  KATZBECK Nursing 

ALLAN  T  ANDREW Allied  Health  Professions 

HERMAN  i..  SLEDZIK  Athletic 


School  of  Home  Economics 

ALMA  L   KAZMER Home  Economics  Education 

SANDRA  LYNN  Consumer  Services 

ALLEN  M   WOODS Food  and  Nutrition 


Reserve  Officer  Training  Corps 

LIEUTENANT  COLONEL  ANTHONY  F.  LENZI Military  Science 


722  —  Indiana  University  of  Pennsylvania 


INDEX 


Academic  Load 11 

Admission  to  Graduate  Study 

Application  Procedures 9 

Requirements  for  Admission  9 

Admission  Classifications 10 

Admission  to  Candidacy  for  a  Degree  18,  22 

Advanced  Graduate  Study  Beyond  Master's  Degree 20 

Advisement  12 

Administration   120 

Applicants  for  Specialist  Certification  Programs 15 

Auditors  11 

Board  of  Trustees  119 

Calendar 2-3 

Campus  Map 133 

Career  Services  6 

Class  Cancellation 15 

Computer  Center 6 

Computer  Science 24 

Counselor  Education  Certification 46 

Course  Abbreviation  Key  14 

Delta  PI  Epsllon  Graduate  Scholarship 7 

Department  Chairpersons 121 

Doctoral  Programs  21-23 

Eligibility  of  Teaching  Staff  21 

Fees 12 

Financial  Aid 

Assistantships 6 

Fellowfships  7 

Graduate  Alumni  Scholarship 7 

Scholarships 7 

Foreign  Student  Applicants  11 

Forms 


Application  for  Admission  to  Candidacy  for  Master's  Degree. .  125 

Research  Approval  127 

Application  for  Graduation 129 

Request  for  Career  Service 131 

Full-time  Students 11 

General  Service  Courses 24-25 

Grading  System 14 

Graduate  Council   119 

Graduate  Student  Rights  and  Responsibilities 15 

Graduation  (Application) 19 

Graduate  Record  Examination   11 

Instructional  Resources  Services 5 

Kappa  Delta  Pi  Grad  Scholarship 7 

Library 5 

Location  5 

Master  of  Education  Curriculum  Requirements 20 

Master's  Degree 17 

Miller  Analogies  Test  10 

Part-time  Students 11 

Permanent  Certification  Requirements 19 

Placement  Service 6 

Principal's  Certification 16-17 

Professional  Growth  Degree  18 

Program  Changes 8 

Programming  and  Registration 12 

Program  Curricula,  Instructions  and  Course  Descriptions 

Adult  —  Community  Education 26 

Art  and  Art  Education  27 

Biology 32 

Business 36 

Chemistry 41 

Communications  Media 84 

Counselor  Education  46 

Criminology 49 

Economics 53 


Index  —  123 


Educational  Psychology  54 

Elementary  Education  57 

English   62 

Foreign  Languages 66 

Foundations  of  Education 70 

Geography  and  Regional  Planning  71 

Geoscience  74 

Health  and  Physical  Education 77 

History 77 

Home  Economics  Education  80 

Communications 84 

Mathematics 88 

Mathematics  for  Elementary  School  Teachers 91 

Music  and  Music  Education 94 

Philosophy 98 

Physics 98 

Political  Science 103 

Psychology  105 

Reading 107 


Science  for  the  Elementary  School  Teacher 110 

Social  Science  ill 

Sociology 113 

Special  Education  and  Clinical  Services  114 

Student  Personnel  Services  in  Higher  Education  46 

Refunds 13 

Research  Courses 25 

Research  Requirement 19 

Residency  Requirement 18.  21 

Scholarship  Requirement  19 

Statistics  Courses  25 

Student  Personnel  Services  in  Higher  Education  46 

Supervised  Laboratory  Experiences   25 

Time  Limit  19 

Transfer  of  Credit  19 

Tuition  and  Fees  12 

University  Refund  Policy 13 

Veterans 7 

Withdravi'als 13 


124  —  Indiana  University  of  Pennsylvania 


c 

(0   ^ 

o  «  "» 
o>  o  — 

m  >> 

^    —     ^ 
(0     ^     m 

I-  «  « 

C  TJ 
«    C 

•a  ~ 
c 


o 

< 
o 

a 

z 
< 

X  •" 

O  oc 

H  O 

qQ 
55«> 

(A  OC 

Q  (A 
<  < 

O  < 

O  u. 

< 

u 

-J 
a 
o. 
< 


o 


^ 

oc 
O 


o    t;; 


>-         >-        Q. 

(3      O     < 


$  r. 


TO 
T3 

T3 

T) 

TJ 

■a 

T3 

0) 

<U 

OJ 

(U 

(0 

U 

O 

(J 

o 

<J 

O 

V> 

OT 

<n 

« 

!2 

(0 

F 

(0 

F 

c 

D 

(U 

r/1 

b 

N       .t     .t 


S  CO 


W        0>     ^ 


=    2     c 


•^        b        0) 


5    *     0)     =     "" 


<n    »-       o 


£     E 


5        a 


3 

tT 

r 

0) 

II 

<D 

■" 

O 

o 

CO 

5 

to 

<t> 

H 

0) 

'- 

n 

^ 

r 

UJ 

<D 

<0 

nr 

^ 

u. 

o 

>. 

(U 

rr 

(A 

Q. 

O 

CO 

fc 

o 

w 

O 

05 

« 

F 

n 

Q. 

r 

Ol 

U 

JC 

— 

o 

TJ 

k- 

O 

> 

— 

(0 

.?     E 


E     t. 


X     O 


126  —  Indiana  University  of  Pennsylvania 


069  1 


INDIANA     UNIVERSITY 

OF    PENNSYLVANIA 

INDIANA,  PENNSYLVANIA 
BUILDING    LOCATION   MAP 


//j 1       7^   Co-op  Bookftlot*  24  FUgii     .  •■»..- 


I  Ua^l«n«nc*  Garag* 


I  Pecfiafi  KMHn  C«f>i«f 

>  Ctmpui  Tow»f>  |*p«rtin^nUi 

I  McCfVaw  M*U 


I    UcfvlanOMOu 

)  UcG(«co>  Hail 


t   5ci»M0r>  h 


,    S^OpP-ng  tK  RKCning 


Eu«i  Houw  (A| 

prii 

1?  Wnandl  ► 

fit9»ncv  [Apt* 

IB  Wh.lmyr« 

Un„    snipping 

"•"■■^ 

11    Wi*»OnH« 
73  W»eim<n9